Quarterlytics / Specialty Retail / SCS Group Plc

SCS Group Plc

scs. · LSE
Claim this profile
Ticker scs.
Exchange LSE
Sector
Industry Specialty Retail
Employees 1001-5000
← All annual reports
FY2021 Annual Report · SCS Group Plc
Sign in to download
Loading PDF…
Annual Report 2021

Helping create
the home
you love

S

c

S

G

r

o

u

p

p

l

c

A

n

n

u

a

l

R

e

p

o

r

t

2

0

2

1

 
 
 
 
 
Helping create
the home
you love

ScS is one of the UK’s leading furniture and flooring retailers, operating from 
100 stores nationwide.

Our mission is to be the UK’s best value-for-money home retailer. Delivering 
outstanding value, quality and choice with a seamless customer experience.

Despite ongoing challenges, we continue to live our values and deliver for all  
of our stakeholders, including our colleagues and customer by helping create 
the homes people love.

Contents

Strategic report

1 

2 

4 

Financial highlights

At a glance

Key events in the year

6   Chair’s letter

8  Our business model

10  A year in review

18  Our markets

20  Chief Executive Officer Q&A

22  Chief Executive Officer’s review

24  Our strategy

28  Key performance indicators

30  Responsible business

42  Section 172 statement

44  Financial review

48  Risk and risk management

50  Principal risks and uncertainties

60  Viability statement

Corporate Governance
62  Board of Directors

Corporate governance statement

65 

Introduction from the Chair

66  Compliance with the UK Corporate 

Governance Code

68  Board leadership and company purpose

70  Division of responsibilities

72  Composition, succession and evaluation

73    Nomination Committee report

75  Audit Committee report

81  Directors’ Remuneration report

96  Directors’ report

Financial Statements
100   Independent auditors’ report  

to the members of ScS Group plc

106   Consolidated statement  
of comprehensive income

107 

 Consolidated statement  
of financial position 

108   Consolidated statement  
of changes in equity

109   Consolidated statement  

of cash flows

110 

 Notes to the consolidated  
financial statements

128  Company statement of financial position

99  Statement of Directors’ responsibilities

129  Company statement of changes in equity

130  Company statement of cash flows

131  Notes to the company  

financial statements

134  Alternative performance  

measures (APMs)

136  Company information

 
Financial highlights

Gross sales*

£324.5m

+£56.4m

Gross margin*

45.3%

FY20: 44.6%

Underlying profit before tax*

£18.4m

+£17.6m

Underlying earnings per share*

41.3p

+38.7p

Cash

£87.7m

+£5.4m

The community you love
It’s been a fulfilling year of giving back and raising 
awareness.

Read more on page 10

1

The products you love
We have a clear mission to be the UK’s best value  
home retailer.

Read more on page 12

Dividend**

 10.0p

reinstated

*  See Alternative performance measures pages 134 to 135.
**  Dividend includes 3.0p interim paid and 7.0p proposed  

final dividend.

ScS Group plc
45-49 Villiers Street, Sunderland
SR1 1HA, Tyne and Wear
Tel. 0191 731 3000
www.scs.co.uk

The company you love
Our colleagues’ wellbeing continues to be a key focus 
for us. 

Read more on page 14

Strategic ReportCorporate GovernanceFinancial StatementsAt a glance

Sofa Carpet  
Specialists

Where we are
From Aberdeen to Plymouth,  
we trade from 100 showrooms 
across the UK, providing an inspiring 
experience and showcasing the 
latest developments in our range 
and brands. Most importantly,  
our showrooms provide the key  
‘sit test’ to our customers. We 
want to ensure our showrooms 
are accessible and reach as many 
potential customers as possible; 
the right showroom in the right 
location works hand-in-hand with 
having great people, great product, 
excellent service and value. 

As customer shopping habits evolve and the demand for 
omnichannel shopping experience increases, we are able to 
support our physical estate through offering all of our ranges 
on our website, enhanced with additional web exclusive ranges 
with a wider market appeal. 

Our improved omnichannel offering allows customers not 
only to purchase with more confidence online but perform 
detailed research before visiting one of our showrooms. The 
retail network is then further supported by nine strategically 
placed regional distribution centres.

2

1
2
0
2
t
r
o
p
e
R

l

a
u
n
n
A

c
l
p
p
u
o
r
G
S
c
S

Our stores and  
distribution centres

  Stores

  Distribution

 
 
 
 
 
About us
We are ScS – the Sofa Carpet Specialists. We have over 100 
years of furniture and retailing experience and have established 
ourselves as one of the leading furniture and flooring retailers 
in the UK. Our specialist colleagues are highly trained, ensuring 
we offer our customers the best combination of customer 
service, value for money, quality and product choice.

Our purpose
Never have our homes been more important to us. They 
have evolved and become offices, schools and much more, 
although above all they have continued to be where we can 
relax and enjoy quality time with our families and friends.  
Our refreshed purpose is simply ‘Helping create the home  
you love’, leaving our customers to focus on creating memories 
with those closest to them.

Founded in the 1890s as a family-owned business in 
Sunderland, we understand our customers and how important 
customer experience and value are to them. Working closely 
with our suppliers we offer a wide range of products across a 
broad range of price points, ensuring that our customers have 
the best available choice of quality furniture and flooring, and 
all at a price that meets their requirements. Alongside offering 
our customers great products, our retail colleagues are on hand 
to ensure that they also receive an excellent customer service. 
Our customers are of utmost importance to us and drive us to 
continuously look for ways to improve the customer journey. 

Read more on Our business model on pages 8 to 9

Gross sales breakdown*

£324.5m

(FY20: £268.1m)

Our values
Our people make us who we are, and creating an outstanding 
team is at the forefront of our existing and refreshed business 
strategy; it encourages our people to give their very best and 
enjoy what they do. We are committed to creating a great place 
to work and our culture is underpinned by our RIGHT values:

Responsive: To our customers, colleagues, markets  

and new ways of working; 

Inclusive: Working and communicating with each other 

to achieve common goals;

Get it right: Doing things right first time;
Hard working: Passionate, committed and driven with  

a winning attitude; and

Trusted: Operating with fairness, respect, honesty  

and integrity.

We encourage an open and honest culture when engaging with 
our stakeholders. We inspire success in our teams, ensuring 
that all our colleagues feel supported. Every team member is 
treated as an equal and we recognise and reward people for 
doing the right thing. 

Delivering our values will continue to help our business grow, evolve 
and build a community that our people are proud to be a part of.

Our responsibility 
At ScS, we recognise that as a responsible business we have an 
obligation to operate in a manner that is both ethical and sustainable. 

Our focus is on three key areas: 
 – Environmental, where our emphasis is on recycling waste, 
reducing energy consumption and emissions, and working 
with our supply base to ensure ethical sourcing; 

 – Social, to continue to make ScS a great place to work,  

with a focus on creating an outstanding team and making  
a positive impact in our communities; and

 – Governance, promoting the long-term sustainable success 
of the business and a culture aligned with our right values.

Read more on being a responsible business on  
pages 30 to 41

3

  Furniture sales: £248.9m (2020: £219.0m)

  Flooring sales: £28.7m (2020: £30.0m)

  Online sales: £46.9m (2020: £19.1m)

*  See Alternative performance measures on pages 134 to 135.

Showrooms across the UK

100 (2020: 100)

Distribution centres

9 (2020: 9)

Average retail space per store

14,374 sq ft

Average employees

1,855

(FY20: 1,707)

  Store: 56% (2020: 55%)

  Head office and support: 22% (2020: 22%)

  Delivery and warehousing: 22% (2020: 23%)

Strategic ReportCorporate GovernanceFinancial StatementsKey events in the year

Being there for  
our customers and 
colleagues throughout  
the COVID-19 pandemic 

August 
New website launched. 

October
Wales entered a two week 
national lockdown.

December
‘Zero touch’ finance 
introduced on website.

December 
Stores across  
England reopened.

Group continues 
to benefit from 
reopening bounce 
following second 
lockdown.

September
UK government increased  
COVID-19 related restrictions, 
including localised lockdowns.

Order intake

November
England entered a 
national lockdown.

Boxing Day
Following the UK government 
announcement, we saw store 
closures across Scotland, 
Wales, East of England and 
South East England, including 
London.

4

1
2
0
2
t
r
o
p
e
R

l

a
u
n
n
A

c
l
p
p
u
o
r
G
S
c
S

 
 
 
 
 
As a result of the COVID-19 pandemic our stores have experienced 
temporary closures throughout the year and customer shopping habits 
have not followed the usual trends. We saw a shift towards a more usual 
sales pattern towards the end of the year. The profile of our order intake 
can be seen below. 

April
English and Welsh 
stores reopen 
producing record week.

May
Bank holiday weekend.

5

May
Repaid £3.0m 
Coronavirus Job 
Retention Scheme 
grant claimed for FY21.

Late December
Our key winter sale saw an increase 
in orders, but was ended early 
following further store closures.

Late January
MyScSLive launched.

April
Scottish stores  
able to reopen.

June
Trading begins  
to stabilise above  
pre-pandemic levels.

July
Interim dividend of 3.0p 
per share paid, reflecting 
strong performance.

Strategic ReportCorporate GovernanceFinancial StatementsChair’s letter

 “I would like to thank  
our customers for their 
continued support.”

6

1
2
0
2
t
r
o
p
e
R

l

a
u
n
n
A

c
l
p
p
u
o
r
G
S
c
S

After another challenging year ScS is recovering well. It has 
continued to be of the utmost importance to us to do the  
right thing by our colleagues, customers, communities and  
other stakeholders.

 
 
 
 
 
Dear Shareholder,

This report covers FY21, which ended on 31 July 2021. In 
last year’s Annual Report, I expressed how proud I was of our 
colleagues’ response to the COVID-19 pandemic as they 
continued to live by our RIGHT values during such challenging 
times. Twelve months on and once again I want to take the 
opportunity to express my gratitude to all my colleagues for 
their support and commitment to the business during the 
ongoing pandemic.

Overview
After the challenges brought by COVID-19 in FY20, I remained 
cautiously optimistic coming into this year, although acutely 
aware there was a significant amount of continued uncertainty. 
No one could have foreseen a year which included a further 
17 weeks of closures for our store network. However, I am 
delighted that, in the face of the challenges, the Group has 
delivered a robust set of results and finds itself in a strong 
position as it enters the new financial year.

In a significant moment for the Group, and as previously 
announced, on 31 July 2021, after 33 years with the business, 
David Knight retired from the Group. As Chief Executive 
Officer, David was a significant part of the Group’s success,  
and he has been unwavering in his commitment to ScS. 
On behalf of the Board, I would like to thank David for his 
outstanding contribution to the Group. 

As part of our planned succession, in January 2021, Steve 
Carson joined the Board to succeed David as Chief Executive 
Officer. Steve has made an immediate and valued contribution, 
leading the Board and senior management team through a 
review of the Group’s purpose, mission and strategy, whilst 
continuing to navigate the business through the ongoing 
pandemic. Our new strategic plan can be found on page 27 
and a Q&A section introducing Steve, is included on page 
20. Alongside the newly refreshed strategy, the Group’s 
colleagues, customers and shareholders have helped to 
refresh the overarching goal of the Group. The Group’s 
purpose, ‘Helping create the home you love’, will guide us into 
the future. This new purpose has guided our new mission and 
strategy and will make an increasing difference as we emerge 
from the pandemic stronger, more aligned and operating in a 
way that makes the most of Group’s strengths and resources.

As a responsible business, the Group is committed to acting 
in the best interests of our stakeholders and in a sustainable 
and inclusive manner. Prioritising our colleagues’ safety and 
wellbeing has continued to be of utmost importance. Through 
regular communication, we have supported our colleagues 
through this challenging time and maintained our commitment 
to ensure our furloughed colleagues received full pay. We are 

grateful for the support of the UK government through  
the pandemic and have repaid the £3.0m Coronavirus Job 
Retention Scheme (CJRS) grants claimed during the year. 
It has been more important than ever to support our local 
communities and I am delighted that we have continued 
to support them, providing 10,000 free school meals to 
underprivileged families in our founding city of Sunderland, 
supporting the ITV Bowel Cancer Awareness campaign,  
and continuing our support of the Foundation of Light and  
its programmes to tackle loneliness and social isolation.  
We have also strengthened our internal teams responsible 
for our people and our environmental impact by welcoming 
a People Director to our Operating Board and a Supply Chain 
Sustainability Manager to our senior management team. 

Dividend
Our efforts in previous years to build a strong and resilient 
business have been key to ensuring our continued success, 
particularly in light of the continued turbulence caused by 
the ongoing COVID-19 pandemic. Despite more temporary 
store closures as a result of government imposed lockdowns, 
our flexible cost base has enabled the Group to minimise 
cash outflow and to maintain profitability. The strength of 
the Group’s balance sheet, coupled with the robust trading 
experienced since our stores opened in April, gave the Board 
the confidence to repay the £3.0m CJRS claim made in the 
year, and recommence dividend payments, starting with a 3.0p 
interim dividend paid in July. Continued progress and growing 
confidence has allowed the Board to propose a final dividend  
of 7.0p. If approved, this would give a full-year dividend of 10.0p.

Summary
I continue to be very proud of the Group that I am privileged 
to be a part of. After a turbulent 18 months it is encouraging 
to see a sense of normality returning. I am delighted that 
despite unprecedented times for the business, the Group’s 
resilience has been proven and we emerge an even stronger 
business. I am very encouraged to see trading continue above 
pre-pandemic levels and look forward to working with Steve 
Carson, the wider Board and our colleagues on implementing 
our refreshed strategy and delivering strong results, alongside 
embedding our new purpose into the Group’s culture.

On behalf of the Board, I would like to thank our shareholders 
and customers for their continued support and our colleagues 
for their ongoing dedication and professionalism.

Alan Smith
Chair
4 October 2021

7

Strategic ReportCorporate GovernanceFinancial StatementsOur business model

Creating value and choice 
for our customers

With a wide range of products, a comprehensive choice across all price points 
and a seamless customer experience, we are able to help our customers create 
the home they love. 

Our key ingredients

Range of  
price points
From £299 to £6,399, 
creating value and choice  
for our customers.

Easy ways  
to pay
Long-term interest-free  
credit making  
buying affordable.

Online
Showcasing product 
and a rapidly growing 
sales platform.

Brands
Long-term relationships 
with leading furniture 
and flooring brands.

On key retail 
parks
High quality stores  
in prime locations.

Service 
‘Excellent’ Trustpilot  
rated service delivered  
by our passionate and  
caring team.

8

1
2
0
2
t
r
o
p
e
R

l

a
u
n
n
A

c
l
p
p
u
o
r
G
S
c
S

 
 
 
 
 
Our strengths
Product
We choose our suppliers carefully, with our customer in mind, 
to ensure that we are able to offer great value products at a 
range of price points. We’ve established relationships with 
some of the most recognisable brands in the market, whose 
products are an excellent match for our customers’ homes. 
Working closely with our suppliers, with long-established 
relationships, allows us to offer our wide range of designs and 
brands at the best possible value. Our furniture products are 
made-to-order and tailored to meet our customers’ needs. 
Our flooring offering ranges from carpets and rugs to laminate 
and luxury vinyl tiling. There is something for every home.

In-store expertise
Our 100 stores allow us to showcase our product ranges 
and gives our customers the opportunity to purchase their 
furniture and flooring under a single roof. Our stores remain 
an essential part of our offering, and work alongside our 
online channel, providing our customers with the critical 
‘sit’ test, which they continually tell us is so important. Our 
dedicated retail professionals are on hand to help the customer 
choose the right product for them within our large, modern 
showrooms. During periods of temporary store closures 
due to lockdowns, we adapted our operations to ensure that 
our customers still received a great customer experience 
by launching MyScSLive. This web-based solution enables 
our customers to video call with a colleague based in one of 
our showrooms. For peace of mind, we also provide a free 
surveying service so flooring customers can be assured 
that they have ordered the correct size and quantity of floor 
covering for their home.

As we welcomed back customers into our showrooms, we 
introduced a VIP appointments system to give customers 
the option to book a convenient time where they would be 
met with their own personal shopper, further enhancing our 
customers’ safety and shopping experience. 

Digital
The online sales experience is more important than ever and 
we continue to invest in and improve our digital offering. Our 
showroom network is supported by our new website, making it 
even easier for our customers to browse our products on their 
phones and tablets. With improved features such as ‘zero touch’ 
finance which enables our customers to apply for finance as part 
of an integrated step in their online buying journey, our website 
allows customers the chance to browse and purchase our full 
range of products, viewing all colours and styles via our huge 
image library and 3D models, at their leisure and convenience. 
We have also launched website exclusive products, extending 
our range beyond that available to our customers in our 
showrooms and appealing to a broader customer base. 

Delivery
Our delivery teams operate from our nine distribution centres 
located across the UK. We offer a two-man home delivery 
and installation service for our furniture products, utilising 
electronic proof of delivery software which integrates with our 
core system to give our teams’ real time visibility of operations. 
Our delivery teams provide customers with an efficient and 
friendly service, taking pride in their work and having respect 
and consideration for our customers’ homes. For our flooring 
ranges we offer a full fitting service. Working with our third-
party fitting partners, our flooring is cut, delivered and fitted  
to our customers’ specifications. 

Customer experience
Our ‘Excellent’ rated customer experience is key to our 
offering. Our showroom professionals, dedicated customer 
experience teams, highly skilled service technicians, 
flooring surveyors and delivery teams prioritise ensuring 
our customers’ shopping journeys are a positive one. We 
encourage feedback at every step of this journey and regularly 
monitor our customers’ reviews on Trustpilot to see what  
we are doing well and also identify areas for improvement.

Stakeholder outcomes
Customer experience
Offering our customers a great customer experience which 
ensures they get the right product for them, either in one 
of our showrooms or online, is at the heart of our business, 
helping our customers to create the home they love.

Trustpilot rating

‘Excellent’

People and culture
It’s vital to the success of our business that our colleagues  
feel engaged and supported. Doing right by our colleagues 
gives them an environment in which they can thrive and in 
turn give our customers an excellent customer experience. 
Through regular communication we update our colleagues 
on the performance of the business, opportunities available, 
support programmes and much more.

Employee satisfaction score

 73Colleague survey score (+2 vs national benchmark data)

Suppliers as our partners
We have built our supplier relationships over a number of years 
and meet regularly with our key suppliers. The vast majority 
of products that we sell are exclusive to us. We are delighted 
to be able to offer our customers the brands of our partners 
alongside our own in-house brands. As we continue to focus 
on our core model and experience success and growth, our 
suppliers benefit too. 

Supporting our communities 
As a responsible business, it’s important to us that we give  
back to our local communities where we live and work. We do 
this through donating funds to various charities and supporting  
our colleagues in volunteering their time. 

Donated to local and national charities

 £60,000

Return for shareholders 
The Group has built a robust balance sheet over the years 
which has contributed to our sustainable business model. 
This, coupled with our lean operating model and excellent cost 
control, provides us with the ability to grow and create value  
for our investors.

Dividend per share

 10.0p

Dividend includes 3.0p interim paid and 7.0p proposed  
final dividend.

9

Strategic ReportCorporate GovernanceFinancial StatementsA year in review

Helping create
the community
you love

It’s been a fulfilling year of giving back to our communities 
and raising awareness for the ScS team.

With the ScS head office being located in Sunderland, the 
city where the business was founded, giving back to the local 
community is very important to us. Working with ‘Together for 
Children Sunderland’ we donated 10,000 free schools meals 
to some of Sunderland’s most underprivileged families during 
October 2020 half term. 

As part of our ongoing relationship with Sunderland AFC’s 
charity, Foundation of Light, ScS has been supporting their 
‘Wear Together’ programmes which aim to tackle loneliness 
and social isolation for the over 50’s. Attending various 
sessions on a range of topics our colleagues have provided 
some much needed conversation and interaction for those  
in the local community who feel isolated and lonely. 

10

Throughout April, with the aim of raising awareness for bowel 
cancer, 250 of our colleagues donned their walking boots, 
mounted their bikes and dusted off their trainers to cover a 
total of over 25,000 miles, greater than the distance of the 
circumference of the earth! Working with ITV’s Lorraine 
as part of a nationwide campaign, we filled the pitch at 
Sunderland’s Stadium of Light with 22 two-seater sofas to 
represent the 44 people who lose their lives every day due to 
bowel cancer. Our delivery fleet also proudly displayed special 
bowel cancer awareness livery to raise further awareness.  
The Group then donated £1 for every mile, and together  
with our colleagues own fundraising, we raised £28,448 for  
this worthy cause. 

The finance department swapped their calculators for bin 
bags as they joined a beach clean-up in partnership with the 
local council. 

Lorraine presents the ‘No Butts’ campaign

1
2
0
2
t
r
o
p
e
R

l

a
u
n
n
A

c
l
p
p
u
o
r
G
S
c
S

 
 
 
 
 
11

“We donated 
10,000 free 
school meals.” 

Strategic ReportCorporate GovernanceFinancial StatementsA year in review continued

12

1
2
0
2
t
r
o
p
e
R

l

a
u
n
n
A

c
l
p
p
u
o
r
G
S
c
S

“ We have a clear 

mission to be the 
UK’s best value 
home retailer.”

 
 
 
 
 
Helping create
the products
you love

This year we introduced online exclusive products to  
our website. Introducing these products allows us to offer 
an enhanced range to our customers and helps broaden  
our customer base.

In May 2021 we launched our new and improved warranty 
product, Premium Sofa Guard. It is a complete five-year 
package designed to not only protect our customer’s furniture 
but to keep it looking great for longer. As an enhancement to 
the cover already provided, the updated product includes a 
new protective layer that is added to our customer’s furniture 
to provide protection from stains and spills, giving our 
customers peace of mind. 

Following extensive testing and successful trial, the Group 
is looking forward to launching an innovative SpringBond 
flooring underlay product range in Autumn 2021. 85% of the 
underlay is made from recycled PET plastic bottles and other 
single use plastics. Furthermore, SpringBond contains no 
harmful VOC’s and at the end of its life the product is 100% 
recyclable. SpringBond is trying to combat the eight million 
tonnes of plastic that fill our oceans every year while improving 
household air pollution at the same time, offering a cleaner 
living environment for everyone.

13

During the year we reviewed the wool offering within our 
flooring range. Wool has unique qualities and appeals to 
a specific differentiated customer base. Our colleagues 
undertook specific product training to give them a deeper 
understanding of the product and how best to present the 
wool flooring collection in-store. To help our customers make 
an informed decision we also created a series of educational 
videos which were showcased within our stores to highlight the 
benefits of wool.

Strategic ReportCorporate GovernanceFinancial StatementsA year in review continued

Helping create
the company
you love

The COVID-19 pandemic has had a profound impact on 
our business and our colleagues. 

After over a year of successful remote working, we have 
committed to creating a flexible, hybrid way of working for our 
office-based teams, whilst ensuring that our colleagues stay 
well connected and supported.

Our survey showed that our colleagues felt particularly 
strongly that they ‘understand how their work contributes  
to ScS’ success’, ‘understand how ScS plans to achieve its 
goals’ and that ScS ‘does a good job of communicating  
with employees’. 

14

As a trusted and responsible employer, we continued our 
commitment to our people, ensuring whilst the stores were 
closed that we continued to top up all of our furloughed 
colleagues’ pay to 100% so that they were not financially 
impacted. Our colleagues’ wellbeing will always be a key focus 
and we will continue to make sure that each and every one of 
our colleagues feel appreciated and proud to be an integral part 
of the business.

In our annual colleague survey, we were very encouraged to 
see that our satisfaction score was above the national average 
when benchmarked against similar companies. 

With our continued focus on how we reduce our carbon 
footprint and protect the environment, we have expanded 
our car scheme during the year to include all-electric vehicles. 
We continue to assess further changes to our delivery and 
upholstery network to improve our environmental impact.

1
2
0
2
t
r
o
p
e
R

l

a
u
n
n
A

c
l
p
p
u
o
r
G
S
c
S

 
 
 
 
 
15

“Our colleagues’ 
wellbeing will  
always be  
a key focus.”

Strategic ReportCorporate GovernanceFinancial StatementsA year in review continued

16

1
2
0
2
t
r
o
p
e
R

l

a
u
n
n
A

c
l
p
p
u
o
r
G
S
c
S

“ We are continuously 
looking for ways to 
improve how we can  
help and support  
our customers.”

 
 
 
 
 
Helping create
the experience
you love

At the start of the year we launched our new website, 
making it even easier for our customers to browse  
our products on their phones and tablets.

With video calls becoming increasingly popular and lockdowns 
preventing customers trying our products for themselves, 
we wanted to bring our customers into our showrooms from 
the comfort of their own homes. In January, we launched 
MyScSLive, a web-based solution that enables our customers 

to video call with a colleague based in one of our showrooms, 
to give product demonstrations, review product options and 
explain product features.

Knowing our online customers value convenience, a key 
priority was the introduction of ‘zero touch’ finance. Where 
previously customers were required to complete a finance 
application over the phone, ‘zero touch’ finance enables our 
customers to apply for finance as part of an integrated step in 
their online buying journey, receiving an immediate decision 
from the lender, and completing their purchase independently 
from the comfort of their own home. 

17

During the year, an external review was conducted of our 
customer journey to help us identify areas for improvement. 
We are continuously looking for ways to improve how we  
can help and support our customers, especially after they  
have placed an order with us. Changes we’ve already made 
include online live chat into our customer support and  
aftercare teams, increasing customer communication options 
and strengthening our customer support teams to be able  
to provide timely assistance. 

Strategic ReportCorporate GovernanceFinancial StatementsOur markets

Gaining market share 
in a recovering market

Current UK market
We operate in both the furniture and 
flooring markets.

Market commentary
Following a 15.4% reduction in the size of the upholstery 
market in 2020, GlobalData’s latest analysis suggests the 
market will recover with 20.8% growth through 2021, restoring 
the market to 2.2%, or £69m above 2019 levels. This growth 
is largely driven by homeowners continuing to invest in their 
home early in the year and utilising savings which had been 
earmarked initially for foreign holidays instead on big ticket 
products such as new furniture.

Similarly, following a 14.8% decrease to the size of the flooring 
market through 2020, GlobalData forecast 17.6% growth 
during 2021, resulting in a market marginally above the level 
in 2019. Again, they note they have seen a strong rebound in 
sales as a sector which did not transition online as easily as 
others benefitted from strong pent-up demand as surveyors 
and fitters could re-enter customers’ homes, and customers 
had cash available for big-ticket purchases.

In a period in which online growth has been significant across 
retail, the latest market commentary highlights that although 
lockdowns have made customers more confident purchasing 
online, analysts believe the upholstery customer journey will 
continue to remain distinctly multichannel, with customers still 
wanting to test products in-store.

GlobalData’s latest quarterly home survey data highlighted 
that buying into a new look became a more important purchase 
motivator with customers when buying a new sofa in the early 
part of 2021, continuing from 2020, indicating that shoppers 
are looking to trade up to more design-led pieces. 

Following significant growth in the first half of 2021 as retail 
reopened, it is forecasted growth for both upholstery and 
floorcoverings in the second half of 2021 will moderate against 
tough comparatives. Shoppers are also starting to take last 
minute foreign holidays, diverting big ticket spend elsewhere. 
Further supply chain disruption, with manufacturers struggling 
to keep up with demand amid port disruption and localised 
COVID-19 outbreaks, could also prevent some pre-Christmas 
orders from being delivered before the end of the year.

Key drivers
Both of our core markets are heavily influenced by similar key 
factors:

Consumer confidence
Big ticket sales are usually heavily affected by consumer 
confidence, which reached new lows as COVID-19 impacted 
worldwide. GfK* reported that, following the significant hit 
to confidence experienced during the pandemic, current 
expectations for consumers’ personal financial situations for 
the coming 12 months are holding up and this positivity bodes 
well for the economy going forward. Consumer confidence as 
reported in the GfK Consumer Confidence Index recovered 
to -8 in August 2021, significantly above the low of -36 in 
June 2020, and only slightly behind the level seen in February 
2020, pre-pandemic. Positively, within the survey, the ‘Major 
Purchase Index’ was 22 points higher in August 2021 than it 
was in at the same point in the prior year. 

Housing market
A house move triggers the purchase of new flooring and 
furniture for many of our customers. Since a peak in 2016 
(the highest number since 2007), housing transactions have 
continued to fall each year, with the lockdown-impacted 
2020 hitting the lowest level since 2012, 15.7% down on 
the 2016 peak. Despite the lockdown in early 2021, pent-up 
demand for house moves supported by the extended stamp 
duty reduction, as well as wider behavioural shifts as people 
re-assess their housing needs, have encouraged a significant 
recovery in the market, with housing transactions to August 
2021 74.4% above the same point in the prior year. With 
the temporary stamp duty reduction being phased out in 
September 2021, and a high volume of Q4 2020 transactions,  
it is likely housing transactions will slow from these levels. 

Consumer credit
Although we have noted a slight decline in the use of finance post-
pandemic, with nearly half of our customers choosing to utilise 
our finance options to pay for their products, the availability of 
consumer credit helps facilitate sales, and provide opportunities 
for upselling. The impact of the pandemic has seen a significant 
impact on the net consumer credit lending to individuals, with a 
fall of 1.9% in 2020, the first fall since 2012. 2021 has continued, 
and accelerated, this trend, with a 5.9% fall in lending to date. The 
decrease noted appears to be consumer led, potentially linked to 
increased savings or a desire to avoid additional debt. The approval 
percentage of those requesting finance to purchase with us 
remains in line with prior years. 

+20.8% 

+17.6% 

Forecast 2021 market size: Furniture**

£3,263m

Forecast 2021 market size: Flooring**

£1,992m

*  GfK Consumer 

Confidence Index, 
August 2021.

**   Source: GlobalData  

(as of 1 Sept 2021).

18

1
2
0
2
t
r
o
p
e
R

l

a
u
n
n
A

c
l
p
p
u
o
r
G
S
c
S

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Consumer confidence

-14.4

YTD – 
Aug 2021

-25.9

2020

2019

2018

2017

2016

-14.4

-12.7

-9.5

-8.8

YTD – 
Aug 2021

2020

2019

2018

2017

Housing market

+74.4%

Net consumer credit lending

-5.9%

+74.4%

YTD – 
Jul 2021

-5.9%

£1.04m

-11.7%

2020

-1.9%

£1.18m

-1.1%

£1.19m

-2.8%

£1.22m

-0.8%

2019

2018

2017

2016

+6.5%

+9.2%

+10.3%

+10.1%

-3.3

2016

£1.23m

+0.5%

GfK Consumer Confidence Index – Average of individual 
scores for each year. Research carried out by GfK on 
behalf of the European Commission.

HMRC UK Property Transaction statistics – Total 
of number of residential property transactions 
completions with a value over £40,000 within the UK, 
seasonally adjusted.

Bank of England – Average 12 month growth rate for 
the calendar year of total (excluding the Student Loans 
Company) sterling net consumer credit lending to 
individuals (in percent), seasonally adjusted.

Our place  
in the market
Increasing market share
Following a strong year of recovery and continued 
positive trading, together with the loss of 
competitors during the lockdown period, we 
continue to grow market share in both upholstery 
and flooring. GlobalData estimate that our 
upholstery market share has increased from 7.9% 
in 2013 to 10.2%, and our flooring market share 
increased from 1.6% to 2.2%, over the same  
time frame.

Value retailer
We have a differentiated value-focused 
positioning in our markets and a continued 
reputation for providing our customers with 
products at a leading range of entry to middle 
price points. We have a clear view of our core 
customer demographic, which consists of a 
broad population of aspiring homemakers, 
families and retired couples.

Opportunities for further growth
We continue to grow our online business 
significantly, and our new growth plan includes 
increased digital investment to improve our 
omnichannel offering. Our core model has had 
continued success and we will continue to expand 
and modernise our ranges and brands. As the 
economic recovery continues, we will also invest 
in improving our brand perception, awareness and 
consideration to broaden our customer base.

2021 upholstery market share*

2021 floor coverings market share*

10.2%

2.2%

  ScS

  Other

  ScS

  Other

19

2020 market share: 9.8%

2020 market share: 2.1%

Retailer

DFS
ScS
Sofology
Furniture Village
Next
IKEA
John Lewis
Made.com
Argos
HSL

2020 (%)

2021e (%)

Retailer

2020 (%)

2021e (%)

25.4
9.8
6.9
6.6
5.4
4.7
2.2
2.2
2.0
1.9

28.1
10.2
8.4
6.5
5.1
4.6
2.6
2.3
2.1
1.9

Carpetright
Tapi
B&Q
Wickes
Dunelm
John Lewis
United Carpets
IKEA
Amazon
ScS (12th)

16.6
6.3
6.9
4.1
3.9
3.7
3.3
2.8
2.6
2.1

16.6
6.6
6.3
4.4
3.8
3.7
3.3
2.7
2.6
2.2

*  Market share data provided by GlobalData. 

Strategic ReportCorporate GovernanceFinancial StatementsChief Executive Officer Q&A

 “ In many ways it feels  
like a large business,  
but with a family culture.”

20

1
2
0
2
t
r
o
p
e
R

l

a
u
n
n
A

c
l
p
p
u
o
r
G
S
c
S

In January 2021 we welcomed Steve Carson as Chief Executive 
Officer. With a strong retail background he brings with him  
a wealth of knowledge and experience. 

 
 
 
 
 
Q
Tell us about your background and why you chose ScS?

I have spent my whole career in retail. I spent my first 16 years 
in various senior leadership roles at Sainsbury’s before joining 
Home Retail Group (HRG) where I spent time at both Argos and 
Homebase. My last six years at HRG was as Director of Retail 
and Customer Operations, helping lead the transformation 
of Argos into a digital business. Most recently, I was Managing 
Director of Holland & Barrett for three years.

I was attracted to ScS for lots of reasons: it has a great business 
model; the Group is in a strong financial position; and it has 
excellent potential for further growth. Ultimately, though, it was 
down to the fantastic people I met across the whole business, 
from showroom colleagues to Board members. There was 
a fantastic passion for delighting customers and seeing the 
business succeed.

Q
What have been your initial impressions of the business?

Having spent some time getting to know the business properly, 
I’m even more excited about the business and its future 
potential. Its value focus gives it a strongly differentiated 
customer offer in the furniture and flooring market. It has a  
well-managed, lean operating model to support this value offer. 
It also has a fantastic team, highlighted by the wonderful job 
they have done responding to the challenges that COVID-19 
has created. I’d like to thank our colleagues and suppliers for 
their ongoing support; in many ways it feels like a large business,  
but with a family culture.

I see a great opportunity to build on these core strengths and 
continue to grow the business going forward, through growing 
digitally, expanding our ranges and continuing to invest in  
our showrooms.

Q
Since joining the business, what has been your main areas 
of focus?

I have had three key priorities since joining the business:

 – As you might expect given the current pandemic, my first 
priority has been to ensure the business continues to 
trade well and successfully navigates the ever-changing 
challenges that COVID-19 has created, from closed 
showrooms, to servicing record levels of demand following 
reopening, to ongoing supply chain and raw material cost 
pressures. I have been endlessly grateful for the amazing 
job all the teams have done across the business in dealing 
with these challenges.

 – Secondly, I have been getting to know the business and 
working with the leadership team to build our plans for 
the future. I’ve spent lots of time out in our showrooms 
and distribution centres speaking to both colleagues and 
customers as well as meeting our major suppliers. I worked 
with all of our senior managers to build our plans for the next 
phase of growth, including conducting a comprehensive 
diagnostic of the existing business, identifying a long list of 
potential opportunities to accelerate growth and refining 
these into our growth plan for the next three years. 

 – Thirdly, I have been focused on strengthening the senior 
leadership team, recruiting a new People Director, Lucy 
Clough and promoting Gavin Vose, an existing member of 
the senior management team on to the Operating Board 
as our new Logistics Director. We have also recruited a 
number of senior hires into the digital and commercial 
teams to help drive our growth plan.

Q
How will the new purpose statement guide and  
strengthen ScS?

Our updated purpose is ‘Helping create the home you love’.  
We feel this perfectly encapsulates what ScS is all about.  
It is focused on the outcome for our customers, is human and 
relatable, and has a strong emotive connection that resonates 
for all our stakeholders: customers, colleagues, suppliers  
and shareholders.

We believe this will be a long-standing ‘North Star’ that 
guides the business as our strategy continues to evolve and 
as ScS keeps growing, keeping us focused on delighting our 
customers. It also helps create a sense of belonging and a 
source of pride for our colleagues, reminding them of what 
their roles ultimately mean for our customer.

Q
What is the greatest opportunity that you think ScS can 
benefit from?

The biggest single opportunity for us is to continue to develop 
and grow our digital channels, both increasing online sales 
but also sending even more customers into our showrooms 
to complete their omnichannel shopping journeys. We have 
already made some great strides in this space. Last year, we 
replatformed our website to create a faster, more responsive, 
better featured site, and in lockdown we launched an online 
virtual consultation service, MyScSLive. We have also invested 
in strengthening the leadership and size of the digital team. 
However, there is still lots more to come in this space.

Q
How do you see the business evolving over the next few 
years under your leadership?

A lot of what I will be concentrating on is ensuring the business 
stays focused on its existing, well-proven operating model, 
so this is about evolution, not revolution. Over the next few 
years, I plan for the business to still be highly penetrated at the 
value end of the market, but with a broader appeal across other 
segments. I expect the ScS brand to still shout value, but with  
a broader meaning around choice, quality and service as well.

I want our digital channels to offer a seamless omnichannel 
experience for customers who browse online and purchase 
in one of our showrooms, or vice versa. I expect us to have 
enhanced the breadth of our range, and I want us to have a 
strong employer brand which celebrates diversity, inclusion 
and equality. All of this resulting in a strong, growing business 
that continues to deliver attractive returns for its shareholders.

Steve Carson
Chief Executive Officer
4 October 2021

21

Strategic ReportCorporate GovernanceFinancial StatementsChief Executive Officer’s review

Overview
Since joining the business in January 2021, during the third 
national lockdown, I have been impressed by the team’s 
resilience and commitment as we have navigated the 
ongoing COVID-19 pandemic. I would, therefore, like to take 
this opportunity to express my personal thanks to all of our 
colleagues – I am very proud to work alongside each and every 
one of you. The dedication and commitment of the teams is a 
testament to David Knight, my predecessor, who welcomed 
me into the business and was a great support during the 
transition period before his retirement. I wish him all the best 
for the future and I look forward to continuing to grow the 
successful business that he has helped to build over the last 
three decades.

Throughout the year our priorities have been to support 
our colleagues, deliver for our customers and to protect the 
long-term success of our business. I would like to recognise 
the continued support we have received from our landlords, 
suppliers and the government to help achieve this. Although 
there remains continued uncertainty in the wider UK economy 
regarding the further impact of COVID-19, the Group is well 
positioned. Our new purpose, mission and strategy will guide 
the Group in achieving further growth and inspire our teams  
to provide an excellent experience for our customers.

2021 operational highlights
 – Launched our new website at the start of the year
 – Introduced ‘zero touch’ finance to enable customers  

to apply for finance online

 – Maintained our ‘Excellent’ Trustpilot score
 – Repaid the £3.0m Coronavirus Job Retention Scheme 
(CJRS) grants in relation to the current financial year

 – Recommenced our dividend payments
 – Supported local charities and made a difference in our 

22

communities, including donating 10,000 free school meals 
 – Launched our new and improved sofa protection package, 

Premium Sofa Guard

Results
Like-for-like order intake summary for the year:

Period

Weeks

Like-for like 
order intake* 

vs year ended 
July 2020

Like-for-like
order intake*
vs year ended 
July 2019

26 July to  
19 December 2020

20 December 2020  
to 3 April 2021

1 to 21

12.4%

6.6%

22 to 36

(73.6%)

(76.6%)

4 April to 31 July 2021

37 to 53

54.8%

59.9%

26 July 2020 to  
31 July 2021

1 to 53

(1.5%)

(6.5%)

The Group experienced strong order intake growth over 
the first 21 weeks of the financial year despite the impact 
of further temporary regional and national store closures 
across the UK as a result of COVID-19. The temporary store 
closures during our key winter sale period, through to early 
April, caused a decrease in like-for-like order intake*, although 
we were delighted with the encouraging trading following the 
reopening of our stores.

Despite our stores being closed for 17 weeks in FY21, like-for-
like order intake* was down just 6.5% on FY19 (being the last 
full financial year not impacted by the pandemic).

Unlike during the first national lockdown, our distribution 
centres remained operational throughout the year. This has 

1
2
0
2
t
r
o
p
e
R

l

a
u
n
n
A

c
l
p
p
u
o
r
G
S
c
S

enabled the Group to achieve gross sales* of £324.5m,  
a 21.0% increase from £268.1m in the prior year.

Gross profit increased to £147.0m (2020: £119.6m), with the 
gross margin percentage* increasing to 45.3% (2020: 44.6%). 
Underlying operating profit* increased to £22.5m (2020: 
£4.7m) and underlying profit before tax* increased to £18.4m 
(2020: £0.9m).

The year finished strongly with the Group’s closing order book 
of £103.5m (including VAT), £1.2m lower than at the same 
point in the prior year and £60.6m higher than at the same 
point in 2019.

COVID-19 response and moving forward
The Group’s response to the first national lockdown in FY20 
was excellent and we were well prepared for the further periods 
of lockdown seen in the current year. Progress in our digital 
offering meant we continued to trade strongly online whilst 
our stores were closed. Unlike the first national lockdown in 
FY20, government guidance allowed our distribution teams 
to continue to deliver goods to our customers’ homes, which 
meant we once again supported our suppliers across the year. 
The business also reacted quickly to our colleagues’ needs 
including providing financial and well-being support in these 
difficult times. We firmly believe that the responsible nature in 
which the Group has acted in this challenging period is one of 
the key reasons why we have been able to deliver the excellent 
results in FY21 and why we have seen strong performance 
following our stores reopening.

Safety first 
The safety of our colleagues and customers has remained 
paramount throughout. All of our colleagues were provided 
with personal protective equipment (PPE), mandatory 
COVID-19 training and access to lateral flow tests, and 
our one way systems, hand sanitiser stations and revised 
delivery processes ensured our customers were protected.

During the periods our stores were open, we continued to 
operate our VIP appointments system to give customers 
the option to book a convenient time with one of our team 
before arriving at one of our stores, further enhancing our 
customers’ safety and shopping experience.

We continue to stay up to date with the latest government 
guidelines and after the successful introduction of our VIP 
appointment system we will be continuing to offer this as  
an option for our customers. 

Colleague focus
The mental health and well-being of our colleagues continues 
to be a key priority. Since the onset of the pandemic, we have 
ensured that all our furloughed colleagues receive their full 
salary including topping up average commission payments 
where relevant. Our dedicated team of trained mental health 
first aiders are always on hand, and our weekly Company-wide 
internal communications ensures all our colleagues are up to 
date with the latest changes across the business.

In November, we carried out our employee survey, utilising the 
improved technology of a new partner. The survey was shorter, 
simpler and smarter than previous years, allowing us to obtain 
and interpret the views and opinions of all 1,572 respondents 
(83% of our team). It is of utmost importance to us that our 
colleagues are engaged and have a clear understanding 
of the Group’s strategy and their role in it. We were very 
encouraged to see that our employee satisfaction score was 
above the national average when benchmarked against similar 

*  This report includes Alternative performance measures (APMs) which are defined and reconciled to IFRS information, where applicable, on pages 134 to 135.

 
 
 
 
 
companies. Our employees felt particularly strongly that 
they ‘understand how their work contributes to ScS’ success’, 
‘understand how ScS plans to achieve its goals’ and that ScS 
‘does a good job of communicating with employees’. Most 
importantly, we recognise their key feedback areas, and we 
are currently developing appropriate action plans to further 
improve employee satisfaction.

Our mission statement
Our refreshed mission statement is ‘To be the UK’s best value 
home retailer. Delivering outstanding value, quality and choice 
with a seamless customer experience’. This encapsulates our 
focus on offering our customers a wide choice of products at 
outstanding value. Our customers are able to bring their vision 
to life with exciting brands, new designs and increased ranges. 

After over a year of successful remote working for our office-
based teams, we have committed to creating a flexible, hybrid 
way of working, whilst ensuring that our colleagues stay well 
connected and supported.

Digital refresh
During the year, we have seen online sales grow 146.0% to 
£46.9m when compared to the prior year.

As consumer trends continue to evolve, the online sales 
experience is more important than ever and we continue to 
invest in and improve our digital offering. Whilst this has driven 
increased online sales, the majority of our customers also 
enter our stores having already researched their choices on 
our website, making our online presence key to improving the 
quality of our store footfall and subsequently conversion.

The launch of our new website at the start of the year enabled 
us to improve our offering to customers moving online following 
the store closures. This period of online-only sales provided 
valuable insight that supported the business’ plans to push 
on with further web enhancements. The first of these was 
the launch of website exclusive products, which have proven 
very successful since their introduction. After welcoming 
customers back into our showrooms we have seen a reduction 
in online sales, which is to be expected as consumer shopping 
habits readjust. 

With video calls becoming increasingly popular and store 
closures preventing customers trying our product for 
themselves, we wanted to bring our customers into our stores 
from the comfort of their own homes. In January, we launched 
MyScSLive, a web-based solution that enables our customers 
to video call with a colleague based in-store, at a time convenient 
to them. Although we acknowledge that not all customers will 
want to utilise this technology instead of visiting a store, our 
experienced and knowledgeable retail professionals are able 
to give product demonstrations, review product options and 
explain product features to those customers who value this 
safe and convenient option.

Further enhancing our virtual offerings, we moved quickly to 
establish our flooring surveyor teams online. Appointments to 
measure rooms in customers’ homes were prevented under 
the government lockdown measures, but our surveyors carried 
out virtual appointments to guide and advise our customers 
through the measurement of their own homes. Following 
changes to government guidance the business has retained 
this additional service to our customers. 

During the year we have redefined the Group’s purpose, 
mission statement and strategy. The process engaged many 
colleagues across the business, and will help to guide us into 
the future.

Our purpose
The Group’s new purpose, ‘Helping create the home you love’, 
is focused on the outcome for our customers, is human and 
relatable, and has a strong emotive connection that resonates 
for all our stakeholders: customers, colleagues, suppliers  
and shareholders.

Our colleagues and our customers remain at the very heart of 
our mission, culture and values.

Our growth plan
During the year we have conducted a comprehensive diagnostic 
exercise to identify the Group’s key strengths and areas of 
opportunity. Whilst maintaining the Group’s core goals and 
objectives, the evolved strategy gives the Group clear direction 
and is more reflective of the post-pandemic world we find 
ourselves in with a strong focus on our omnichannel offering. 

Under this plan we aim to grow our market share, strengthen 
the expertise of our teams, improve our digital presence while 
leveraging our strong store network and improve the customer 
journey. The six key areas of focus identified are as follows:
 – Outstanding team – we will develop our leadership and 

invest in capabilities critical for future growth.

 – Customer driven – we will broaden our customer base  

and build deeper relationships with them.

 – Inspiring ranges – we will continue to update and expand 

our ranges.

 – Digitally optimised – we will grow our business digitally, 
both in channel and by encouraging customers into  
our stores.

 – Engaging showrooms – we will invest more in our 

showrooms to create more engaging experiences for  
our customers.

 – Strengthen the core – we will remain focused on trading 

the existing successful business model.

Further information on the new strategy can be found on 
pages 26 to 27.

Current trading and outlook
Trading since the start of the new financial year has remained 
strong, with two-year like-for-like order intake* growth of 
11.9% for the nine weeks to 2 October 2021. One-year like-
for-like orders* have fallen 21.0% as a result of the significant 
bounce following the lockdown in the prior year. We are 
delighted with the strong orders performance since the start 
of the new financial year. However, we are cognisant of the 
ongoing challenges we, and many other businesses, are facing 
with regards to the supply chain, including driver shortages,  
raw material increases and shipping costs and delays.

We have demonstrated throughout the pandemic that we 
have a flexible and resilient business model which is able 
to adapt to changes in the macro-environment whilst still 
delivering for our customers. We look forward to embedding 
the new purpose and mission statement into our operations 
and delivering on our refreshed strategy for future growth 
which we are setting out today. 

Steve Carson
Chief Executive Officer
4 October 2021

23

Strategic ReportCorporate GovernanceFinancial StatementsOur strategy

Progress in the year

With our previous strategy being launched in March 2018, the appointment of Steve Carson as the new CEO was an opportune moment to review the 
direction and focus of the Group. This has led to a refreshed strategy which was launched at the start of our new financial year. The new strategy is discussed 
in more detail on pages 26 and 27.

Whilst progress in the year in relation to the previous strategy was impacted by the pandemic, it was pleasing to see the following actions were completed:

Priority area

Progress in the year

Building and inspiring an  
outstanding team

 – All furloughed employees received full pay including topping up average commissions
 – Trained a number of colleagues to become mental health first aiders to support colleagues across  

How: by having the best team  
in our sector

the business

 – Continued investment in the development of managers and teams across the business, utilising remote 

learning during periods of lockdown

 – Increased communication and engagement activities across the business
 – Launched a new easier to use employee engagement survey with 83% completion
 – Continued provision of PPE and increased health and safety training across the business
 – Introduction of hybrid ways of working for support teams
 – Strengthened the team, including the recruitment of a People Director

Delivering an exceptional  
customer experience

How: by relentless focus on  
customer experience

 – Introduction of in-store VIP appointments
 – Implementation of MyScSLive, allowing customers to shop from home via video technology
 – Increased customer communication during periods of disruption in the supply chain
 – Developed inbound product inspection process to increase product quality and customer satisfaction
 – Increased options for customers to contact our customer experience team with the addition of online  

contact cards and webchat

 – Whilst our stores were closed our customer experience team continued to be fully operational to support  

our customers

 – Added technology to give store and distribution centre managers visibility of their own Trustpilot feedback

Optimising our product strategy

 – New ‘website exclusive’ products added to our range
 – Work commenced on increasing sustainability of products across the range including the recruitment  

How: by sourcing best value products

of a Supply Chain Sustainability Manager who will lead this area
 – Refresh of range and price points in light of changing market trends
 – Full supplier review of production capacity
 – Margins maintained despite raw material and transport cost pressures

24

Driving sales densities in our  
ScS network

How: by having modern stores  
in great locations

Creating a market-leading website  
and increasing digital awareness

How: by providing an excellent 
omnichannel offering

Accelerating our flooring growth

How: by having a market-leading 
flooring offer

Improving our profitability

 – Recruitment of temporary ‘meet and greet’ roles into our stores to ensure customer and colleague safety 

whilst COVID-19 restrictions were in place

 – Additional retail space added by removing store office space following centralisation of store administration
 – Introduction of our new performance management framework ‘Inspiring Great Performance’
 – Enhanced in-store visualisation including new point of sale materials

 – New ‘mobile first’ website launched at the start of the financial year
 – Range visualisation improved by adding 360-degree image technology
 – Introduction of ‘zero touch’ finance, where customers can complete the finance process online
 – Web to core system integration improvements
 – Delivered online sales increased 146.0%

 – Change to business processes to improve how we arrange flooring fitting appointments with our customers
 – Supplier rationalisation based on service and quality
 – Introduced virtual surveying appointments

 – Launch of new ‘Premium Sofa Guard’ enhancing our previous warranty offer 
 – Further roll-out of PowerBI across the business including distribution and further enhancements in product 

How: by running a lean and efficient 
business model

and store performance metrics

 – Demonstrated flexible cost base in periods of lockdown

1
2
0
2
t
r
o
p
e
R

l

a
u
n
n
A

c
l
p
p
u
o
r
G
S
c
S

 
 
 
 
 
“…a strong, growing 
business that 
continues to deliver 
attractive returns for 
its shareholders.”

25

Strategic ReportCorporate GovernanceFinancial StatementsOur strategy continued

Refreshed strategy

A review of the Group’s strategy was carried out in the year  
as a key area of focus for our new CEO, Steve Carson.

Our strategic review included a comprehensive diagnostic phase, which enabled a detailed assessment into what the Group’s 
key strengths are and where opportunities for improvement lie. The process engaged many colleagues across the business and 
led to a re-defined purpose and mission statement, and identified six key areas of focus. Our ‘growth plan’ leverages our existing 
strengths but also invests to ensure our continued success in an increasingly digital future.

Overview
 – Strengthen the team
 – Understand and improve our brand perception, awareness and 

consideration for our broad customer base

 – Expand and modernise our ranges and brands to increase market share

 – Increase digital investment to improve omnichannel offering
 – Refresh the look and feel of stores to make them more inspirational
 – Continue to do the basics brilliantly well

Purpose
Helping create the home you love

Mission
To be the UK’s best value home retailer.  
Delivering outstanding value, quality and  
choice with a seamless customer experience

Growth plan

I n spiring
R anges
g t h en the Co

r
e

n

Str e

Helping create the 
home you love

S

E

h

n

o

g

w

a

r

g

o

i

n
g

o

m
s

D

u

st
riv

o

en

mer

s t a n ding
e a m

T

t

O u

imised
gitally

i
D

t
p
O

C

26

1
2
0
2
t
r
o
p
e
R

l

a
u
n
n
A

c
l
p
p
u
o
r
G
S
c
S

 
 
 
 
 
Strategy 

Focus for FY22

Outstanding 
Team

We will develop our leadership  
and invest in capabilities critical  
for future growth

 – Improve our employee 

 – Proactively support our 

proposition to ensure we  
attract and retain great talent

 – Increase engagement,  

enhance our culture and 
empower our people

colleagues to make a difference  
in their local communities
 – Build capability and capacity 

across key functions

 – Continue to champion diversity 

and inclusion across the 
organisation

Customer  
Driven

We will broaden our customer  
base and build deeper relationships 
with them

Inspiring  
Ranges

We will continue to update  
and expand our ranges

 – Improve the use of customer 
data to continuously improve 
our proposition and service  
for our customers
 – Enhance the customer 

experience across all our 
touchpoints: stores, digital, 
delivery teams and support 
centre to maintain great 

customer satisfaction as 
evidenced by our market-leading 
Trustpilot scores

 – Continue to focus on quality 

across our ranges

 – Refresh the ScS brand for 
customers, to broaden its 
appeal, and to further reinforce 
the proposition and channel 
improvements we will make

 – Continue to provide broad 

 – Innovate in our sofa range and 

choice and outstanding value  
for money to our customers

introduce new design aesthetics 
and exciting new brands

 – Refine flooring range and 

optimise service proposition
 – Expand our dining range to  

gain share 

 – Maximise the opportunity with 
our broad customer base
 – Explore new supply options 
including faster delivery

Digitally 
Optimised

We will grow our business digitally, 
both in channel and by encouraging 
customers into our stores

 – Strengthen digital leadership 
and invest in growing the team
 – Enhanced breadth of range with 
a deeper, more personalised 
relationship with our customers
 – Offer a seamless omnichannel 
experience for customers who 
browse online and purchase in  

store or vice versa, underpinned 
by enhanced digital technology

 – Optimse relaunched website  
to improve conversion levels
 – Balanced marketing investment, 
which will be underpinned by 
improved analytical tools,  
ROI modelling and targeting

27

Engaging 
Showrooms

As the backbone of our business we 
will invest more in our showrooms to 
create more engaging experiences 
for our customers

 – In an omnichannel world,  

 – Refresh of showroom 

stores remain the backbone  
of the business

 – Review of white space 

opportunities across the 
country 

environments to create a simpler, 
more inspiring experience to 
showcase latest developments  
in range and brands

 – Continue to actively manage 

rent costs and relocate from less 
profitable locations

Strengthen  
the core

We will remain focused on  
trading the existing successful 
business model

 – Drive sales by continuing to offer 
customers outstanding value  
for money and great service
 – Optimise processes in core 
operational disciplines
 – Ongoing investment in 

technology

 – Use data and analytics to drive 
store and product performance

 – Maintain focus on cost 

efficiencies

Strategic ReportCorporate GovernanceFinancial Statements 
 
Key performance indicators

Delivery of the  
refreshed strategy will  
be key to future success

Key performance indicators (KPIs) are fundamental to understanding the 
progress we are making with our strategy, and to monitor the ongoing 
performance of the business over time. 

The KPIs set out in this summary are the most relevant measures monitored on an ongoing basis by the Board. The definition of these KPIs and our 
performance over the last three years is detailed below, as well as how each KPI links to our strategic priorities. Commentary on these KPIs is contained  
within the Financial review. Prior year KPIs have been restated to include continuing operations only.

28

Non-financial KPIs

Trustpilot customer satisfaction

4.7

Colleague survey score

73

CO2 emissions (tonnes)

6,527

2021

2020

2019

4.7

4.7

4.6

Why it’s important
Customers want confidence that their retailer of 
choice can deliver on their promises. We focus on our 
TrustScore to ensure we maintain our ‘Excellent’ rating.

What we measure
Our TrustScore, marked out of 5, is a measure provided 
by Trustpilot, an independent review platform used  
by our customers which asks them to rate our  
customer service.

2021

73

Why it’s important
Our colleagues play a pivotal role in the success of our 
business, and we aim to ensure they benefit as we do. It 
is of utmost importance to us to listen to our colleagues 
and to get their thoughts and opinions to ensure that our 
colleagues are engaged and have a clear understanding of 
their role. We take pride in being a place where colleagues 
can thrive and progress whilst feeling supported.

What we measure
Our ‘Colleague survey score’ KPI is new this year and 
measures the overall eSAT score of the annual survey 
sent to all colleagues for their feedback. The eSAT 
score is an aggregate of scores on statements related 
to discretionary effort, pride, recommend, inspire and 
career goals. 

2021

2020

2019

6,527t

6,461t

8,156t

Why it’s important
As a retailer we recognise that our operations will impact 
the environment, and we have a duty to ensure that both 
now and in the future we seek to minimise this impact.

What we measure
Scope 1, 2 and 3 emissions, see further detail on  
page 34.

Link to strategic priorities
Outstanding team 
Customer driven
Inspiring ranges

Link to strategic priorities
Outstanding team 
Strengthen the core

Link to strategic priorities
Inspiring ranges
Digitally optimised 

1
2
0
2
t
r
o
p
e
R

l

a
u
n
n
A

c
l
p
p
u
o
r
G
S
c
S

 
 
 
 
 
Financial KPIs

Revenue

£310.6m

Like-for-like order intake growth

-1.5%

Online sales

£46.9m

2021

2020

2019

£310.6m

2021

-1.5%

£255.5m

2020

-6.0%

2021

2020

£19.1m

£46.9m

£317.4m

2019

4.2%

2019

£16.8m

Why it’s important
Sustainable growth in delivered sales is key to our long-
term success, increasing market share and creating 
opportunities.

What we measure
Revenue is a measure taken directly from our primary 
statement of accounts, and is the combined total of all 
furniture and flooring delivered sales made, excluding 
VAT and the costs of interest-free credit, both online 
and across all of our showrooms.

Why it’s important
Whilst overall delivered sales growth is important, 
understanding how the same showrooms perform 
year-on-year provides a guide to underlying showroom 
performance. Due to lead times, order growth also gives 
a view as to future delivered sales performance.

What we measure
Like-for-like order intake growth compares year-on-year 
trading performance from comparable showrooms.  
It, therefore, excludes new and closed showrooms. 
Order value is a combined total of all furniture and 
flooring orders booked, including VAT, both online  
and across all of our showrooms.

Why it’s important
The Group needs to maximise its share of customers 
wanting to transact online.

What we measure
Online sales growth is the portion of the gross sales 
figure as defined above, attributable to our online 
website and telesales.

Link to strategic priorities
Outstanding team 
Customer driven
Inspiring ranges
Digitally optimised  
Engaging showrooms
Strengthen the core

Link to strategic priorities
Outstanding team 
Customer driven
Inspiring ranges
Digitally optimised  
Engaging showrooms
Strengthen the core

Link to strategic priorities
Digitally optimised 
Strengthen the core

29

Gross margin % of gross sales

45.3%

Profit/(loss) before tax (PBT/LBT)

£22.7m

Earnings per share (EPS)

50.4p

2021

2020

2019

45.3%

44.6%

45.0%

2021

2020

2019

-£3.1m

£14.3m

£22.7m

50.4p

2021

2020

2019

-5.8p

28.5p

Why it’s important
To grow profitably, the Group must ensure that sales 
growth is supported by maintaining or growing the  
gross margin.

What we measure
Gross margin % of gross sales is a measure taken 
directly from our primary statement of accounts and is 
the total margin made from sale of product, excluding 
VAT, as a proportion of total gross sales.

Why it’s important
Delivering profitable growth is essential as we aim to 
create value for all stakeholders over the long term.

Why it’s important
EPS is key to the business to understand the return 
being generated from profits to our shareholders.

What we measure
Profit before tax reflects the performance of the  
Group before taxation impacts. Following the adoption 
of IFRS 16 the Group has started using PBT as a KPI 
rather than underlying EBITDA as PBT includes the  
full cost of the Group’s property leases.

What we measure
EPS is calculated by dividing profit attributable  
to shareholders by the average number of  
outstanding shares. 

Link to strategic priorities
Inspiring ranges
Strengthen the core

Link to strategic priorities
Inspiring ranges
Digitally optimised  
Engaging showrooms
Strengthen the core

Link to strategic priorities
Inspiring ranges
Digitally optimised  
Engaging showrooms
Strengthen the core

Strategic ReportCorporate GovernanceFinancial StatementsResponsible business

Creating a business 
that we can be  
proud of

At ScS, we want to create a business that we can be proud of, 
with a reputable brand and products that our customers love, 
a company that our colleagues love to work for and a business 
that our partners love to work with. 

Achieving the above means offering our customers a wide 
range of quality products at great value that are sourced 
ethically whilst minimising our impact on the environment. 
Our colleagues value a culture of openness and honesty 
and a workplace that supports them in offering an excellent 
customer experience. Our suppliers want to build long lasting 
relationships built on trust and shared ethics.

30

Our Supply Chain Sustainability Manager and 
Commercial Director receive our Furniture Industry 
Sustainability Programme membership

During the year the Group has accelerated its thinking on 
developing a formal Environmental, Social and Corporate 
Governance (ESG) strategy that builds on our RIGHT values 
and integrates sustainability throughout all aspects of the 
business. Our recent recruitment of a specialist Supply Chain 
Sustainability Manager is a key part of that strategy. We have 
made positive steps in this area but acknowledge that there is 
still progress to be made over the coming months and years. 
In the coming year we aim to set out a sustainability roadmap, 
in line with the Task Force on Climate-related Financial 
Disclosures (TCFD) requirements, setting objectives and 
targets against which we can measure progress.

1
2
0
2
t
r
o
p
e
R

l

a
u
n
n
A

c
l
p
p
u
o
r
G
S
c
S

 
 
 
 
 
“The Group 
has accelerated 
its thinking on 
a formal ESG 
strategy.”

31

Strategic ReportCorporate GovernanceFinancial StatementsResponsible business continued

Our environment

Placing a greater emphasis on 
external independent assurance, 
to further demonstrate our 
commitment to the sustainability  
of our products

32

Chain of Custody Certification – timber
The Group uses timber in many of its products. During the 
year we have reviewed our timber sourcing policy, and have 
started to engage with suppliers to ensure that all our own 
branded products are able to be sourced from independently 
certified sources no later than July 2026. 

Chain of Custody certification provides credible confirmation 
that our products are from environmentally and socially 
responsible sources. Chain of Custody Certification  
verifies that certified material is used throughout the  
supply chain, from the forest to the factory. Collaborating  
with industry experts further strengthens our commitment  
to sustainable sourcing.

Leather Working Group membership
During the financial year the Group became a member of 
the Leather Working Group. The Leather Working Group is a 
not-for-profit organisation responsible for the world’s leading 
environmental certification for the leather manufacturing 
industry. As a responsible retailer of leather furniture,  
the Group wishes to demonstrate that all leather sourced  
by the Group does not contribute towards deforestation. 

Furniture Industry Sustainability Programme
The Group has successfully completed its first external 
sustainability audit and has met the requirements set out by 
the Furniture Industry Sustainability Programme (FISP). We are 
the first national upholstery and carpet retailer to achieve this 
certification. This is an independent certified sustainability 
programme specifically designed for the furniture industry 
supply chain. FISP helps the Group identify best practice to 
drive continual improvement of our social and environment 
impact, ensuring the sustainability of our operations.

1
2
0
2
t
r
o
p
e
R

l

a
u
n
n
A

c
l
p
p
u
o
r
G
S
c
S

Putting sustainability at the core  
of our product strategy

SpringBond flooring underlay
Following extensive testing and a successful trial, the Group  
is looking forward to launching an innovative SpringBond 
flooring underlay product range in Autumn 2021. 85% of the 
underlay is made from recycled PET plastic bottles and other 
single use plastics. Furthermore, SpringBond contains no 
harmful VOC’s and at the end of its life the product is 100% 
recyclable. SpringBond is trying to combat the eight million 
tonnes of plastic that fill our oceans every year while improving 
household air pollution at the same time, offering a cleaner 
living environment for everyone.

Eco-friendly carpet range
Our Delphin and Oceanus carpet ranges are made from 
regenerated nylon, a yarn made from recycled waste material 
such as old carpets and abandoned fishing nets collected 
from the bottom of the sea. 

Endurance laminate flooring 
During the year, the Group reviewed its laminate flooring 
range and we are proud to say that 100% of the range is 
certified by the Programme for the Endorsement of Forest 
Certification (PEFC) who are dedicated to promoting 
sustainable forest management.

Electricity now supplied as renewable 

100%

 
 
 
 
 
Managing our fleet and estates to 
minimise our environmental impact 

Improving our energy efficiency 

To ensure that our fleet vehicles are efficient, safe and meet 
the required emissions standards, all our trucks are on a five-
year replacement cycle. To help minimise our CO2 emissions, 
we utilise route optimisation software to reduce the miles 
that our trucks and vans travel. Using our fleet management 
system we are able to monitor our driver’s behaviour on the 
road to ensure that our high standards of safe and responsible 
driving are met. Each driver is assessed against a number of 
targets and both drivers and management are incentivised  
to improve.

During the year we have added our first fully electric vehicles 
to the company car fleet, and we continue to encourage their 
utilisation throughout the fleet.

33

During the year, we have continued to improve our energy 
efficiency with an ongoing programme of LED lighting 
installations and the replacement of outdated equipment  
with new energy efficient replacements. 

From April 2021 we have been supplied with 100% renewable 
electricity at all ScS sites. With electricity being one of the 
main contributors to the Group’s CO2 emissions, we are 
committed to further reducing our energy consumption,  
and thereby achieve a reduction in carbon emissions.

Throughout the year we obtained a clearer understanding of 
our energy usage across the Group. We use automatic meter 
readings to monitor and investigate usage of electricity, and 
smart loggers to monitor the usage of gas. We have embarked 
on a programme of replacing all gas fired appliances with  
a view to achieving this by the end of 2023. We will continue  
to work with the Carbon Trust and other advisors to reduce 
the amount of energy we use. 

We have worked with our facilities management partners  
to understand our impact on the environment, specifically 
water and waste management. We have continued to 
maintain a high percentage of diversion from landfill and 
continue to re-evaluate and look for ways to improve our 
waste management.

 “We are the first national upholstery 
and carpet retailer to achieve the 
Furniture Industry Sustainability 
Programme (FISP) certification.”

Strategic ReportCorporate GovernanceFinancial StatementsResponsible business continued

Streamlined Energy and Carbon Reporting statement

Emission type

Scope 1: combustion

Scope 2: purchased energy

Scope 3: indirect energy

Total

Greenhouse gas emissions intensity ratio

Turnover (£’000)

Intensity ratio (tCO2e/£100,000)

kWh

CO2e tonnes (Location based)

Current year 
(2020/2021)

Previous year 
(2019/2020)

Variance %

Current year 
(2020/2021)

Previous year 
(2019/2020)

Variance %

14,787,217

12,796,459

13,079,252

13,297,222

1,032,622

933,123

28,899,091

27,026,804

15.6

(1.6)

10.7

6.9

3,230

3,049

248

6,527

2,838

3,399

224

6,461

13.8

(10.3)

10.7

1.0

Total footprint (Scope 1, Scope 2 and Scope 3) – CO2e tonnes

Current year 
(2020/2021)

Previous year 
(2019/2020)

324,519

2.012

268,119

2.410

Variance %

21.0

16.5

The COVID-19 pandemic has had an impact on our turnover and carbon emissions. The relative impact on turnover is directly linked to reduced operations 
but we still have to produce some carbon emissions to maintain essential systems in our estate. This means that on a relative basis our performance is not 
directly comparable but is presented here for transparency and compliance with the Streamlined Energy and Carbon Reporting requirements.

Greenhouse Gas Protocol dual reporting

Emission type

Scope 1: combustion

Scope 2: purchased energy

Scope 3: indirect energy

Total

34

 – Our methodology has been based on the principles  
of the Greenhouse Gas Protocol, taking account of 
the 2015 amendment which sets out a ‘dual reporting’ 
methodology for the reporting of Scope 2 emissions.  
In the ‘Total Footprint’ summary above, purchased 
electricity is reported on a location-based method.

 – We have reported on all the measured emissions sources 
required under The Companies (Directors’ Report) and 
Limited Liability Partnerships (Energy and Carbon Report) 
Regulations 2018, except where stated.

 – The period of our report is 01/08/2020 – 31/07/2021.
 – This includes limited emissions under Scope 1 and 2 (gas  
& fuel used in transport; purchased electricity), except 
where stated, and limited emissions under Scope 3 (fuel 
used in personal/hire cars/vehicles for business purposes).

 – Energy use and emissions figures relate to our UK 

operation (including offshore energy and emissions)  
only, except where stated.

 – Conversion factors for UK electricity (location-based 
methodology), gas and other emissions are those 
published by the Department for Environment,  
Food and Rural Affairs for 2020.

 – Conversion factors for UK electricity (market-based 

methodology) are published on the fuel mix disclosures  
on each supplier’s website or based on specific tariffs in 
the case of the Bryt Energy electricity group contract. 

1
2
0
2
t
r
o
p
e
R

l

a
u
n
n
A

c
l
p
p
u
o
r
G
S
c
S

CO2e tonnes (dual reporting methodology)

Location based

Market based 
(supplier specific)

Variance %

3,230

3,049

248

6,527

3,230

2,222

248

5,700

0

(27.1)

0

(12.7)

 – Gas data has not been estimated where non-billed months 

of data were received. This is due to a combination of 
known issues, such as supplier overbilling followed by 
periods of zero (catch-up) billing, sites moving to electricity 
only and expected variation in consumption (due to both 
seasonality and the COVID-19 outbreak). This approach  
is consistent with previous reporting submissions.
 – During the compilation of the 2020-21 SECR report,  

two data discrepancies were found within the grey fleet 
(scope 3) data provided for the 2019-20 report, the first 
report the company has compiled on this information.  
The discrepancies related to incorrect hire vehicle 
mileages provided in the prior year, and the absence of 
data related to emissions from employee mileage claims. 
The 2019-20 period data has been restated to utilise the 
more robust fuel litres data, which have been converted to 
carbon regardless of vehicle type, resulting in a reduction 
of 351.4 tCO2e, and to include employee mileage claims, 
resulting in an increase of 88.6 tCO2e. This results in  
the final updated 2019-20 carbon footprint total of 
6,461.42 tCO2e with an updated intensity ratio of 2.410 
(from the originally reported 19-20 ratio of 2.508).

 – Processes regarding the collection and reporting of grey 
fleet data have been improved as a result of the above 
findings and we do not expect this issue to occur again  
in future reporting disclosures.

 
 
 
 
 
Statement of exclusions
 – There are three landlord supplied sites within the portfolio 
where electricity is recharged as part of the service charge, 
which have been excluded on the grounds of unavailable 
data. 

Energy efficiency action
During this reporting year, we have undertaken several energy 
efficiency actions across our estate. These include:
 – Retrofit of air heaters with improved efficiency and 

performance at multiple sites;

 – Replacement of gas fired air conditioning systems with  
all electric air conditioning systems at multiple sites;

 – Continued rollout of LED lighting; and
 – Energy generation from waste which has 100% diversion 

from landfill. 

In addition to the above, from 1 April 2021 we have been using 
100% renewable energy across all ScS site.

“We utilise route 
optimisation 
software to  
reduce the miles 
that our trucks  
and vans travel.”

35

Strategic ReportCorporate GovernanceFinancial StatementsResponsible business continued

Our colleagues

Our people are what makes our business successful and 
developing an outstanding team is at the forefront of our 
refreshed business strategy. We are focused on creating a 
great place to work, recognising the contribution individuals 
make and creating opportunities for progression and 
development. Creating a long-term sustainable business 
relies on attracting and retaining colleagues with the required 
skills and behaviours which are aligned with our RIGHT values. 

Training and development
During the year we launched our ‘Inspiring Great Performance’ 
conversational tool. This was rolled out initially to our retail 
teams and has since been extended across the business.  
The initiative enables our colleagues to engage in a structured 
monthly meeting with their line managers to discuss short- 
term and long-term objectives, any challenges they are facing 
and any opportunities for development and progression.  
This meeting also allows for managers to praise and recognise 
behaviours that are aligned with our RIGHT values.

Following the success in the prior year of the ‘Olympic 
Experience’ training programme, delivered by business 
coaches and former Olympians Steve Backley and Roger Black 
to our retail regional and branch manager roles, we rolled  
out a refreshed programme around goal setting, planning  
and preparation and encouraging a growth mindset. This has 
given our retail managers the tools to inspire the team around 
them and help to ensure that the business achieves its aims 
and targets.

36

Offering our colleagues opportunities to progress and 
develop is key to building the team of the future. Members of 
our distribution team have participated in our ‘Warehouse to 
Wheels’ programme which supports colleagues in obtaining 
their Category C HGV licence. Applications also opened 
in the year to our retail teams to participate in a year-long 
development programme ‘Moving On Up’ which aims to train 
future branch managers. 

A number of our learning and development specialists 
qualified as ‘Insights Discovery’ practitioners during the year 
which gives them the tools to build effective communication 
and leadership skills across the business. The team launched 
over 20 courses throughout the year including project 
management qualifications, health and safety courses and 

leadership coaching. Alongside this, they have also supported 
12 apprentices across the business with studying towards 
professional qualifications. 

Our colleagues receive mandatory online training throughout 
the year on a wide array of topics including Equality & Diversity, 
Data Protection and Anti-Bribery. 

Engaging with our colleagues
Our people are our greatest asset and key to our success 
and incorporating their views into Board decision making is 
essential to achieving our business objectives and creating a 
workplace which treats everyone equally. We are proud to say 
that we have retained our Investors in People standard which 
we have now held for 20 years.

Throughout the year we have engaged with our colleagues in 
a number of ways:
 – Our Non-Executive Workforce Engagement Director, 
George Adams, held regular discussion forums with 
members of the wider workforce to provide them with  
a direct route to raise issues or concerns with the Board;
 – We carried out our annual employee survey utilising the 
improved technology of a new partner. The survey was 
shorter, simpler and smarter than previous years, allowing 
us to obtain and interpret the views and opinions of all 
1,572 respondents;

 – We continued to utilise our online employee interactive 
forum. This gave our colleagues a convenient way to 
communicate with one another and share their opinions 
on important matters that affect them such as our re-
opening plans;

 – Our senior management kept the teams under their 
leadership informed on strategy and how their role 
contributes to ScS’ success; and

 – The company-wide weekly newsletter informed our 

colleagues of the Group’s performance and significant 
events taking place across the business.

As part of his induction and following the reopening of our 
stores, our new CEO has visited a large number of stores  
and distribution centres.

1
2
0
2
t
r
o
p
e
R

l

a
u
n
n
A

c
l
p
p
u
o
r
G
S
c
S

“ A number of our learning  
and development specialists 
qualified as ‘Insights Discovery’ 
practitioners during the year.”

 
 
 
 
 
Health, safety and wellbeing
As we continued to navigate the challenges of COVID-19, 
we made sure the health and safety of all our colleagues 
and customers was prioritised. We created and rolled out 
mandatory e-learning modules, ‘Covid-19 Safety First’ 
and ‘PPE – Personal Protective Equipment’, to ensure all 
colleagues remained up to date with the latest guidance.  
The one-way systems and deep cleaning procedures were 
kept in place in all locations throughout the year. We continued 
our checks performed prior to entering a customer’s home 
for our distribution crews, flooring surveyors and technicians. 
To further protect the health and safety of our colleagues 
and customers, we were able to offer free access to lateral 
flow testing to all our colleagues through participation in the 
government’s scheme.

The established health and safety team, which forms part of 
our wider Audit, Risk and Compliance team, have continued 
to monitor the impact of COVID-19 and requirements under 
the government guidance (for all three nations). They have 
worked closely with operational teams to ensure we are 
following guidance and best practice. The health and safety 
team also reviewed and maintained relevant risk assessments 
and ensured correct levels of PPE are available for all our 
colleagues throughout the business. 

During the year we have invested in formal ‘Institution of 
Occupational Safety and Health’ (IOSH) training for members 
of the distribution and internal audit teams. This has provided 
an additional level of assurance to complement the detailed 
reviews, inspections and reporting completed by the in-house 
health and safety team. We made further investment in 
formal training for the distribution team in manual handling 
techniques and each distribution centre now has at least two 
qualified trainers. 

To support the safety of our distribution teams our fleet 
of delivery vehicles have been installed with equipment to 
monitor driver and vehicle safety. This provides assurance 
that our teams are safe and customers get the best possible 
service.

The Group gives parity to physical and mental wellbeing.  
We have mental health first aiders working across the business 
and our colleagues have access to further support through  
a free, confidential employee assistance programme which is 
available 24/7. The weekly newsletter regularly includes advice 
on how our colleagues can help their mental wellbeing such as 
free mindfulness courses and links to meditation guides.

Our people team 
present at a workshop 
for our branch 
managers 

37

Strategic ReportCorporate GovernanceFinancial StatementsResponsible business continued

Our suppliers

We have 16 major furniture suppliers and 7 flooring suppliers 
who make and source products for us from within the UK, 
Europe and the Far East. 

Despite the ongoing impacts of the COVID-19 pandemic 
throughout the year, we worked with our suppliers to launch 
over 80 new products across our furniture and flooring ranges. 
We brought six new suppliers on board to make and source our 
products and we look forward to building our relationships with 
these suppliers and to see mutually beneficial volume growth. 

Engaging with our suppliers
Working closely with our suppliers ensures that we have the 
right product offerings for our customers. We engage with 
our suppliers through regular meetings to review product 
quality and performance to ensure that we are meeting our 
customers’ needs. Our purpose, ‘Helping create the home you 
love’, is at the core of what we do and we believe creating an 
atmosphere where suppliers embrace our purpose and values 
is essential to our continued success.

38

During the year we have remained in regular contact with our 
suppliers. Although our operations were once again impacted 
by the COVID-19 pandemic, our distribution activities were 
able to continue. We worked with our supply partners to 
manage the delivery of our large opening order book from 
pent up demand in June and July 2020 and this two way 
communication continued throughout the year, particularly 
regarding ongoing pressures on shipping and raw material 
shortages, which we have been working together to manage. 

Supplier terms
All our suppliers are required to comply with our supplier 
terms which sets out our expectations in relation to health 
and safety procedures, anti-bribery and corruption policies, 
product quality standards and much more. We are committed 
to providing assurance to our customers that our products 
are safe and sourced with integrity. Our products are 
tested regularly and at random to ensure they meet all the 
regulations and British standards set out in The Furniture and 
Furnishings (Fire Safety) Regulations 1988.

As a responsible business we work with our suppliers to 
promote responsible sourcing and ensure that all workers are 
treated equally with respect and are safe at work. As a member 
of Sedex we are able to monitor our suppliers adherence to 
modern slavery regulations and best practice within our  
supply chain. 

We are committed to the responsible stewardship of the 
environment and community by integrating sound and 
sustainable business practices into our daily business 
decisions. We collaborate with our suppliers to reduce our 
environmental impact by reducing the use of single use 
plastics and looking for more sustainable packaging options, 
for example, by offering a carpet made entirely from recycled 
plastics and using reusable packaging. 

We work closely with 
recognisable flooring 
partners

“ Working closely 

with our suppliers 
ensures that we 
have the right 
product offering  
for our customers.”

1
2
0
2
t
r
o
p
e
R

l

a
u
n
n
A

c
l
p
p
u
o
r
G
S
c
S

 
 
 
 
 
Our customers

We seek to offer our customers outstanding value, quality and 
choice for their homes. 

39

Our customers 
choose their new sofa

Our retail and centralised customer services team have 
worked tirelessly to help our customers.

We strive to provide an excellent customer experience and 
this focus is crucial to the Group’s strategy. Our customers 
are encouraged to rate their experience with us on Trustpilot 
and we are thrilled to have received over 299,000 reviews 
and maintained our ‘Excellent’ rating. We regularly review our 
customers’ feedback and use it to reward our staff, identify 
areas for improvement and discuss with suppliers to drive 
further product quality.

Going the extra mile for our customers

Lisa Price (Branch Manager at our Wigan store) has lived by our RIGHT values by going the 
extra mile for an elderly customer. After speaking to a customer about their order Lisa 
learned that they live alone with no family nearby. She also learned that they really enjoyed 
jigsaws so took it upon herself to get them a jigsaw to keep them entertained through 
lockdown. She also organised for a hamper of supplies to be delivered as well as more 
jigsaws and a jigsaw table. Lisa said: “I wanted our customer to know that they weren’t 
alone in lockdown and that they had support from people who cared. The food I collected 
was after the fourth call where I learned that they were finding it hard to get out because  
of bad weather. I wanted to do this for them and have a weekly chat as this winter lockdown 
is a long time for the vulnerable to be alone.” 

We carefully source our products and all of our sofas are 
covered by a 20-year warranty on frames and springs. Working 
with our suppliers, monitoring market trends and engaging 
with our customers through social media channels, helps us  
to develop product ranges and expand our customer base. 

During the year our stores experienced periods of temporary 
closures due to the COVID-19 pandemic. Having already 
navigated lockdowns in the previous year we were well 
prepared and continued to adapt our services to meet the 
needs of our customers during such challenging times. Our 
new website launched at the start of the year and in January 
2021, we introduced MyScSLive, a web-based solution that 
enables our customers to video call with a colleague based 
in one of our showrooms, at a time convenient to them. Our 
continued investment in improving our omnichannel offering 
coupled with a shift in customer shopping habits as a result 
of the pandemic has seen visits to our website increase 
significantly, driving online sales to record heights for the 
business. We will continue to monitor these trends and review 
our product ranges to meet customer demand.

Engaging with our customers
Throughout the year we have increased customer 
communication. Disruption from localised COVID-19 
outbreaks, raw material shortages and shipping issues meant 
we experienced delays beyond our control. In response,  
we kept in close communication with our customers.  

Strategic ReportCorporate GovernanceFinancial StatementsResponsible business continued

Our communities

During the year, the Group and its people continued to support 
many local and national great causes, close to the hearts and minds 
of the ScS family. 

The Foundation of Light
For over 10 years, ScS has supported the Foundation of Light, 
which is Sunderland AFC’s official charity. During the year 
we worked with the charity to support their ‘Wear Together’ 
programmes which aim to tackle loneliness and social 
isolation in the over 50’s, an important issue which has been 
heightened during the pandemic. A number of our colleagues 
have attended sessions on a range of topics, engaging in 
conversation and interacting with people from the local 
community. 

Free school meals
As a result of the government voting against extending 
free school meals for disadvantaged children, ScS donated 
£20,000 for local children in need during October 2020  
half term. Working with ‘Together for Children Sunderland’  
this money provided 10,000 free schools meals to some  
of Sunderland’s most underprivileged families.

Volunteers’ Week
The first week of June was Volunteers’ Week and our 
colleagues were encouraged to participate in their local 
communities. From helping to deliver guided walks to beach 
cleans, our teams rolled up their sleeves and headed out  
in their community to support some great causes. 

Supporting ‘Wear 
Together’ with the 
Foundation of Light

Our store network is spread across the UK and they play an 
active role in their local communities. As a socially responsible 
business it is important to us to contribute to society and  
the economy. 

Bowel cancer awareness
Working with ITV’s Lorraine on their ‘No Butts’ campaign, we 
helped to raise awareness of bowel cancer and its symptoms. 
We filled Sunderland’s Stadium of Light with 22 empty 
two-seater sofas to represent the 44 people who lose their 
lives every day due to bowel cancer, the UK’s second biggest 
cancer killer. We also added decals to our delivery fleet, 
displayed informational signs in all of our showrooms and 
featured the campaign in our TV ads. 

To help raise more funds, 250 of our colleagues walked, 
ran and cycled over 25,000 miles, which is greater than the 
number of miles around the earth! The Group donated £1 for 
every mile, and together with our colleagues own fundraising, 
we raised a total of £28,448 for this worthy cause.

40

Sometimes it’s the little things that  
mean the most

Travis Caster, a member of our delivery team at our Basildon 
distribution centre made the day of one of our customers. 
After our customer made a comment about not having left 
the house in a while, Travis continued the conversation and 
provided a listening ear. The pair soon realised that they had 
both recently been through a bereavement and our customer 
really appreciated the fact that Travis took the time to talk 
with her. 

Our customer decided to personally make Travis a bouquet 
of blue and yellow flowers, colours that Travis had mentioned 
were of great sentimental value to his family. Travis who 
prides himself on providing a great experience to our 
customers said that it is these sort of interactions that really 
make a difference and he’ll never forget the kind gesture  
from this customer!

1
2
0
2
t
r
o
p
e
R

l

a
u
n
n
A

c
l
p
p
u
o
r
G
S
c
S

 
 
 
 
 
Our shareholders

We have two main shareholder groups; institutional investors 
and individual shareholders. 

41

Store managers 
at our annual retail 
conference

The majority of our shareholders are institutional investors, 
with our retail investor base growing. 

The Company has just one class of share in issue and so all 
shareholders benefit from the same rights, as set out in the 
Company’s Articles of Association and the Companies Act 
2006. The Board recognises its legal and regulatory duties 
and does not take any decisions or actions, such as selectively 
disclosing confidential or inside information, that would 
provide any shareholder or group of shareholders with any 
unfair advantage or position compared to the shareholders  
as a whole.

Engaging with our shareholders
The Group’s purpose, mission and strategy have been built 
with the long-term success of the business in mind and for 
the benefit of our members as a whole. We engage with our 
shareholders through a range of channels including meetings, 
the Annual Report, our Annual General Meeting (AGM) and  
our financial and trading statements. During the year the CEO  
and CFO have also participated in retail investor presentations. 
Investors are able to keep up-to-date through our dedicated 

corporate website. We have continued to update our 
shareholders with regular trading updates throughout the 
year as events have unfolded. We held a live analyst meeting 
open to all shareholders, and a webcast of the meeting  
was published on our website for those unable to attend.  
Our CFO is on hand to speak to our shareholders and address  
any queries they have.

The Board receives investor views through the Group’s 
corporate brokers who provide feedback on market 
reaction and investor views after full and half year results 
announcements. Independent investment research analysts 
also have access to our Executive Directors as part of their 
investment advisory roles. The analysts’ research publications 
provide timely feedback on financial performance, strategy 
and share valuation.

Investors’ views were taken into consideration as part of the 
Board’s decision-making process throughout FY21 including 
repaying the CJRS grant received in relation to the current 
year, reinstating a dividend and our ESG strategy.

Strategic ReportCorporate GovernanceFinancial StatementsSection 172 statement

The Board recognises the 
importance of engaging  
with stakeholders

42

1
2
0
2
t
r
o
p
e
R

l

a
u
n
n
A

c
l
p
p
u
o
r
G
S
c
S

Section 172 Statement
The Board recognises the importance of engaging with 
stakeholders and taking their views into account when making 
decisions, although the Board acknowledges that not every 
decision it makes will necessarily result in a positive outcome 
for all of the Group’s stakeholders. Details on how the Board 
operates and the way in which it reaches decisions are set out 
on pages 65 to 98.

Section 172 of the Companies Act 2006 requires a director of 
a company to act in the way he or she considers, in good faith, 
would most likely promote the success of the company for  
the benefit of its members as a whole but having regard  
to a range of factors set out in section 172(1)(a)-(f) in the 
Companies Act 2006. This report is presented in compliance 
with The Companies (Miscellaneous Reporting) Regulations 
2018 and the UK Corporate Governance Code July 2018.

Details of our key stakeholders and engagement with these 
stakeholders are set out on pages 30 to 41. Examples of how 
the Directors have oversight of stakeholder matters and had 
regard for these matters when making decisions are included 
in the table opposite and discussed throughout the Strategic 
Report and in the Governance section on pages 2 to 98.

The table opposite identifies where, in the Annual Report, 
information on the issues, factors and stakeholders the Board 
has considered in respect of Section 172(1).

 
 
 
 
 
The Board recognises the 

importance of engaging  

with stakeholders

Section 172 duty

(a) The likely consequences of any decision in the long term
Example: the Board reviewed and updated the Group’s strategy during the year to support the  
long-term success of the Company. Decisions taken during the year are made in the context  
of the strategy and with regard to allocating the Group’s capital in the most beneficial way.

(b) The interests of the company’s employees
Example: our colleagues are at the heart of our business and their interests are taken into  
consideration by the Board when making decisions that impact them. Throughout the COVID-19 
pandemic the Group has topped up furloughed colleagues’ salaries to 100% and none of our people 
have been made redundant as a result of the pandemic. The internal team responsible for our 
colleagues has also been strengthened by welcoming a People Director to our Operating Board.

(c) The need to foster the company’s business relationships with suppliers, 
customers and others
Example: working closely with suppliers has been more important than ever during the COVID-19 
pandemic, and the Group continued to pay all suppliers in a timely manner despite uncertain periods 
of closure. Throughout the year customer communication has increased and our retail and centralised 
customer services team have worked tirelessly to help our customers.

(d) The impact of the company’s operations on the community and the environment
Example: as a responsible business, the Group is committed to acting in the best interests of our 
communities and in a sustainable manner. During the year the Group supported local charities and 
donated a total of £60k. The Group has accelerated its thinking on developing a formal ESG strategy 
that builds on our RIGHT values and integrates sustainability throughout all aspects of the business. 
The recent recruitment of a specialist Supply Chain Sustainability Manager is a key part of that strategy.

(e) The desirability of the company maintaining a reputation for high standards  
of business conduct
Example: our colleagues received mandatory online training throughout the year on a wide array of 
topics including Equality & Diversity, Data Protection and Anti-Bribery. All suppliers are required to 
comply with our Supplier Code of Conduct which sets out our expectations in relation to health and 
safety procedures, anti-bribery and corruption policies, product quality standards and much more.

(f) The need to act fairly as between members of the company
Example: the Board seeks to ensure that communications are clear and its actions promote the  
long-term success of the Company. During the course of the pandemic, the Group has successfully 
adapted the way in which it engages with shareholders and as a result, the Board have been able to  
take their views and interests into account when making decisions.

Key examples

Our business model 
Our strategy
Key performance indicators
Financial review
Principal risks and uncertainties
Viability statement
Corporate governance statement
Directors’ Remuneration report

Chair’s letter
Our business model
Chief Executive Officer’s review 
Our strategy
Key performance indicators
Responsible business
Principal risks and uncertainties
Corporate governance statement
Directors’ Remuneration report

Chair’s letter
Our business model
Chief Executive Officer’s review 
Our strategy
Responsible business
Corporate governance statement
Directors’ Remuneration report

Chair’s letter
Our business model
Chief Executive Officer’s review 
Our strategy
Responsible business
Principal risks and uncertainties
Corporate governance statement

Our business model 
Our strategy
Responsible business 
Corporate governance statement
Directors’ Remuneration report

Responsible business 
Corporate governance statement

Page

8-9
24-27
28-29
44-47
50-59
60
66-80
81-95

6-7
8-9 
22-23
24-27
28-29
30-41
50-59
66-80
81-95

6-7
8-9 
22-23
24-27 
30-41
66-80
81-95

6-7
8-9
22-23
24-27
30-41
50-59
66-80

8-9
24-27
30-41
66-80
81-95

30-41
66-80

43

Non-financial information statement
The table below sets out where stakeholders can find information in our Strategic Report that relates to non-financial matters, as required by the  
Non-Financial Reporting requirements as detailed in the Companies Act 2006.

Reporting requirement

Environmental matters

Employees

Social matters

Human rights

Anti-bribery and anti-corruption

Description of business model

Non-financial KPIs

Principal risks and uncertainties

Our policies

Where you can find out more

Regulatory and compliance
Responsible sourcing and supply chain
Sustainability
Monitoring our carbon footprint

Diversity and inclusion
Health and safety
Engagement
Code of Business conduct
Composition, succession and evaluation

COVID-19
Apprenticeship programmes
Supporting local communities and charities

Pages 54
Pages 32 to 33
Pages 32 to 33
Page 34

Page 69 to 74
Page 37
Page 36
Page 97
Pages 72 to 74

Pages 22 to 23
Page 36
Page 40

Responsible sourcing and supply chain
Modern Slavery policy

Page 56
Pages 38 and 56 and visit our website

Political donations
Whistle-blowing
Anti-bribery and corruption statement

Page 98
Page 69
Page 54

N/A

N/A

N/A

Pages 8 to 9

Page 28

Pages 50 to 59

Strategic ReportCorporate GovernanceFinancial StatementsFinancial review

 “ Strong post-lockdown 
sales order growth seen 
across the business.”

44

1
2
0
2
t
r
o
p
e
R

l

a
u
n
n
A

c
l
p
p
u
o
r
G
S
c
S

The financial results for the current and previous year were 
impacted by the COVID-19 pandemic. The year started strongly 
with first half sales benefiting from the large opening order book 
and continued strong order growth in quarter one. The second 
half of the year also saw significant revenue growth, despite 
further national lockdowns, as the business was permitted  
to continue to deliver goods.

 
 
 
 
 
Gross sales* 

Revenue

Gross profit

Distribution costs
Administration expenses before exceptionals and government support
Business rates relief
Coronavirus Job Retention Scheme (CJRS)

Total operating expenses

Underlying operating profit*
Operating exceptional items

Operating profit
Net finance expense

Profit/(loss) before tax
Tax

Profit/(loss) after tax

Underlying profit before tax*

Statutory earnings/(loss) per share

Underlying earnings per share*

EBITDA*

Underlying EBITDA* 

53 weeks ended 
31 July 2021
£m

52 weeks ended 
25 July 2020 
£m

324.5

310.6

147.0

(18.7)
(116.0)
10.2
–

(124.5)

22.5
4.3

26.8
(4.1)

22.7
(3.6)

19.1

18.4

50.4p

41.3p

52.8

48.5

268.1

255.5

119.6

(17.0)
(106.3)
3.4
5.0

(114.9)

4.7
(4.0)

0.7
(3.8)

(3.1)
0.9

(2.2)

0.9

(5.8p)

2.6p

29.0

33.0

Overview
The financial results for the current and previous year were 
impacted by the COVID-19 pandemic. The Group operates  
a special order business, where goods are built for customers 
in line with their order specifications. Gross sales, revenue 
and related profit is not recognised until orders are delivered. 
The disruption from the pandemic, including the restrictions 
on being able to deliver to our customers’ homes in the first 
lockdown coupled with the strong recovery in sales post the 
initial lockdown, meant the Group commenced the 2021 
financial year with a large opening order book.

Gross sales and revenue
Gross sales* increased by £56.4m (21.0%) to £324.5m  
(2020: £268.1m). The year started strongly with first half sales 
benefiting from the large opening order book and continued 
strong order growth in quarter one. The second half of the 
year also saw significant growth, despite further national 
lockdowns, as the business was permitted to continue to 
deliver goods unlike in the first lockdown which impacted  
sales in the second half of the 2020 financial year. 

Sales by channel were are follows:
 – An increase in furniture sales in stores of 13.6% to £248.9m 

(2020: £219.0m);

 – A decrease in flooring sales in stores of 4.1% to £28.7m 

(2020: £30.0m); and

 – An increase in online sales of 146.0% to £46.9m  

(2020: £19.1m).

Revenue, which represents gross sales* less charges relating 
to interest free credit sales (see note 3 to the financial 
statements – Segment information), also increased by 21.6% 
to £310.6m (2020: £255.5m). This is again reflective of the 
order growth and disruption to our distribution network in the 
second half of the prior year. 

The strong post-lockdown order intake recovery has resulted 
in the Group holding a large opening order book of £103.5m 
(including VAT), £1.2m lower than at the same point in the prior 
year but £60.6m higher than at the same point in 2019.

Gross profit
Gross margin* increased to 45.3% (2020: 44.6%). The increase 
of 69 basis points is largely due to the reduced take-up and cost 
of interest free finance together with store closures resulting in 
a reduction of lower margin stock sales. We expect stock sales 
and customer credit requirements to return to normal levels 
in the new financial year. This, coupled with the increased cost 
pressure from suppliers, means we expect gross margin in  
the coming year will return to levels achieved by the business  
in the previous years.

The increased volume and margin year on year resulted in an 
increase in gross profit of £27.4m (22.9%).

Distribution costs
Distribution costs comprise the total cost of the in-house 
distribution function and includes employment costs, vehicle 
running costs and utility costs for the nine distribution centres, 
as well as costs of third-party delivery services contracted to 
support peak delivery periods. 

Distribution costs increased to £18.7m (2020: £17.0m) as a 
consequence of the increase in delivered volumes. Additionally, 
property and staff-related costs increased, driven by cost 
pressures being seen in the logistics sector.

As a percentage of gross sales for the year, distribution costs 
were 5.8% (2020: 6.3%).

45

*   This report 

includes Alternative 
performance measures 
(APMs) which are defined 
and reconciled to IFRS 
information, where 
applicable, on pages  
134 to 135.

Strategic ReportCorporate GovernanceFinancial StatementsFinancial review continued

Administrative expenses before exceptional items 
and government support
Administrative expenses comprise:
 – Store operating costs, principally employment costs, 
property related costs (utilities, store repairs and 
depreciation);

 – Marketing expenditure; and
 – General administrative expenditure, which includes the 

employment costs for the Directors, senior management 
and all head office-based support functions and other 
central costs.

Administration costs for the year totalled £116.0m, compared 
to £106.3m in the prior year. Administrative costs were 35.7% 
of gross sales*, down from 39.6% in the prior year.

There was an overall increase in administrative costs of £9.7m, 
driven predominantly by the £8.6m increase in performance 
related pay following the Group’s strong full year result. Due 
to the impact of the pandemic, the prior year saw a significant 
reduction in the normal levels of bonus and commission 
paid to management and colleagues. The current year saw 
performance related pay increase to £16.8m (2020: £8.2m), 
with the current year cost being more in line with those seen 
pre-pandemic, where in FY19 performance related pay totalled 
£14.6m. The current year includes a £1.5m share-based 
payment charge in the year (2020: £0.8m credit) reflecting  
the improved actual and forecast performance of the Group. 
The Group also saw a £3.5m increase in underlying payroll 
costs driven by additional employees to support working 
practices during the pandemic and to meet increased demand 
in our stores coupled with wage inflation. 

46

Marketing costs decreased by £3.2m to £17.2m in the year 
(2020: £20.4m), as the business adjusted investment in 
advertising as a result of temporary store closures. We 
invested in a strong reopening launch campaign and this 
increased investment helped achieve the significant level of 
post-lockdown sales order growth. Other administrative costs 
increased £0.8m. 

Government support
The Group’s result for the year has benefited from £10.2m 
of retail business rates relief provided in response to the 
COVID-19 outbreak. Our retail property rates bill is a significant 
cost to the business, and the government’s initial response to 
the impact of COVID-19 to cut 100% of retail business rates 
bill for the 2020 to 2021 tax year (1 April 2020 to 31 March 2021) 
was followed with further savings on rates for the 2021 to 2022 
years. The Group expects to receive a further £2.6m benefit in 
the next financial year.

During the year the Group received £3.0m as part of 
the Coronavirus Job Retention Scheme (CJRS) claimed 
throughout the period of store closures. Following the strong 
trading on reopening of our stores, the Group took the 
decision to repay this in full.

In the prior year, the Group’s result benefitted from £8.4m 
of government support, being £3.4m of retail rates relief and 
£5.0m received from the CJRS.

Flexible costs
The nature of the Group’s business model, where almost all 
sales are made to order, results in the majority of costs being 
proportional to sales. This provides the Group with the ability to 
flex its cost base as revenue changes, protecting the business 
should there be wider economic pressures. As shown below, 
the proportion of cost variability remained relatively consistent 
year on year.

1
2
0
2
t
r
o
p
e
R

l

a
u
n
n
A

c
l
p
p
u
o
r
G
S
c
S

Excluding government support and exceptional items, total 
costs before tax for the year were £316.3m (2020: £275.6m). 
Total costs increased £40.7m, largely as a result of the 
movement in variable costs, which, as expected, increased in 
line with the increase in sales. As a consequence of the higher 
variable and total costs, semi-variable and fixed costs make up 
a slightly lower percentage of total costs when compared to 
previous years.

Of total costs, 73% (2020: 70%), or £230.2m (2020: £194.1m) 
are variable or discretionary, and are made up of:
 – £177.5m cost of goods sold, including finance and warranty 

costs (2020: £148.5m);

 – £18.7m distribution costs (2020: £17.0m);
 – £17.2m marketing costs (2020: £20.4m); and
 – £16.8m performance related payroll costs (2020: £8.2m).

Semi-variable costs totalled £44.2m, or 14% of total costs, 
for the year (2020: £38.5m; 14%) and are predominantly 
other non performance related payroll costs and store costs. 
Depreciation and interest (including on leased assets), rates, 
heating and lighting make up the remaining £41.9m (13%) of 
total costs (2020: £43.0m; 16%).

Underlying operating profit* 
The operating profit before exceptional costs was £22.5m for 
the year, compared to £4.7m last year, driven by the £27.4m 
increase in gross profit, partially offset by the increase in 
operating costs. Without the additional government support, 
the Group would have recorded an underlying operating profit 
of £12.3m (2020: loss of £3.7m).

Operating exceptional items
The £4.2m exceptional credit in the current year relates to the 
reversal of previous impairment to the Group’s stores – both the 
property, plant and equipment and right-of-use lease assets. 
The majority of the current year credit reverses the impairment 
taken in the prior year as a consequence of reduced forecasts 
following the impact of COVID-19, with an additional element 
reversing historic store impairment following stronger forecast 
store performance as a result of encouraging trading and 
increased opportunities in our markets.

Prior year exceptional costs relate to a £3.4m charge in 
recognition of impairment to the Group’s property, plant and 
equipment and right-of-use lease assets and £0.6m payable 
for redundancy costs incurred relating to the centralisation of 
administrative support from each of our individual stores to our 
head office in Sunderland.

Finance costs
The net finance expense has increased by £0.3m to £4.1m 
(2020: £3.8m) as a result of a decrease in interest earned on  
the Group’s cash balance.

Taxation
The tax charge for the financial year is lower (tax credit 2020: 
higher) than if the standard rate of corporation tax had been 
applied, mainly due to an increase in the deferred tax asset 
relating to share options outstanding but unexercised at year 
end and the increase in the rate used to measure the Group’s 
deferred tax asset.

Earnings/loss per share (EPS/LPS) 
Statutory basic EPS for the year ended 31 July 2021 was 50.4p 
compared to a LPS of 5.8p in the previous year. 

Basic underlying EPS for the year ended 31 July 2021, which 
excludes exceptional costs, was 41.3p compared to 2.6p in the 
previous year.

*   This report includes 

Alternative performance 
measures (APMs) which 
are defined and reconciled 
to IFRS information,  
where applicable, on 
pages 134 to 135.

 
 
 
 
 
A full reconciliation of EPS/(LPS) is shown in note 10 to the 
financial statements.

Cash and cash equivalents
The Group operates a negative working capital business  
model whereby:
 – For cash/card sales, customers pay deposits at the point  
of order and settle outstanding balances before delivery;

 – For consumer credit sales, the loan provider pays ScS  

within two working days of delivery; and

 – The majority of product suppliers are paid at the end  
of the month following the month of delivery into the 
distribution centres.

The Board considers this policy appropriate given the  
strength of the balance sheet, whilst ensuring the Group has 
sufficient resources to pursue potential future opportunities  
to deliver growth.

In light of the improved trading, the Group paid an interim 
dividend of 3.0p in July 2021 (2020: £nil). The Board is confident 
in the outlook for the Group and proposes a final dividend  
of 7.0p (2020: £nil). If approved, this would give a full-year 
dividend of 10.0p (2020: £nil). The final dividend, if approved,  
will be paid on 10 December 2021 to shareholders on the 
register on 12 November 2021. The ex-dividend date is 
11 November 2021.

Cash increased £5.4m in the year to £87.7m (2020: £82.3m).  
A summary of cash flows is shown below: 

The total dividend paid is in line with target earnings per share 
cover, and cash cover through the economic cycle.

Cash generated from 
operating activities
Payment of capital and  

interest elements of leases

Net capital expenditure
Net taxation and interest 

payments

Free cash flow
Dividends 
Purchase of own shares

Net cash generated

53 weeks ended
31 July 2021
£m

52 weeks ended
25 July 2020
£m

Chris Muir
Chief Financial Officer
4 October 2021

41.6

(26.4)
(4.5)

(3.8)

6.9
(1.1)
(0.4)

5.4

59.5

(20.0)
(3.9)

(1.5)

34.1
(4.3)
(5.2)

24.6

The Group continued to be cash generative in the year with 
a net cash inflow from operating activities of £41.6m (2020: 
£59.5m). 

The cash generated from operating activities has decreased by 
£17.9m. In the prior year, working capital inflow totalled £27.9m 
largely due to a significant increase in customer deposits as  
our stores reopened following the first government lockdown. 
The level of customer deposits in the current year has increased 
by £2.4m. However, this is offset by a working capital outflow as 
a result of the 53-week year capturing July month end payroll 
and supplier payments, together with a repayment of £3.4m 
VAT and PAYE/NI balances which were previously deferred 
in line with the government support offered as part of its 
response to COVID-19.

Customer deposit balances have increased by £2.4m in the 
year to £37.0m (2020: £34.6m), reflecting the strong post-
lockdown sales order growth seen across the business and 
higher closing order book. 

The payment of capital and interest elements of leases has 
increased by £6.4m, principally as a result of the benefit from 
rent deferrals negotiated with landlords in the prior year 
beginning to unwind. This will continue through the next 
financial year.

Dividend
The Board recognises the importance of a dividend to 
investors and, despite suspending the dividend temporarily,  
is keen to reinstate a progressive policy, with the intention to:
 – Keep earnings cover in the range of 1.25x to 2.00x;
 – Ensure cash cover remains in the range of 1.75x to 2.25x 

through the economic cycle; and 

 – Pay an interim dividend that will be approximately one third 

of the total dividend.

47

Strategic ReportCorporate GovernanceFinancial StatementsRisk and risk management

Our risk management 
framework

We have a robust risk management framework designed to manage and report 
on risks that could affect the achievement of our business strategy. 

Our approach to risk management
The Group has an established approach to risk management, 
which takes into account risks along with opportunities and 
manages them accordingly. We accept that the Group faces 
risks and uncertainties that could affect the achievement of 
its strategic objectives, and consequently, mitigating controls 
are in place to manage risk to an acceptable level. Management 
and the Board carry out regular reviews of existing and 
emerging risks along with the control systems and processes 
that govern them. 

Risk management framework
The Board has ultimate responsibility for managing risk. 
The Audit Committee is provided with an oversight of risk 
management and completes a robust assessment of principal 
and emerging risks. The established governance framework 
underpinning our approach to risk management is set out in 
detail below and on the following page.

Risk appetite
Managing risk effectively within the framework and in line with 
our defined risk appetite remains a high priority for the Board. 
The culture of the organisation ensures that all activities, 
from day-to-day operations to high-level strategic decisions, 
are performed in line with the framework. Management’s 
assessment of our principal risks is based on the potential 
impact, the likelihood of the risk materialising and any change 
in the risk from the prior year. The governance of risk is 
undertaken in the context of the Group’s overall risk appetite. 
On an annual basis, a calibration model of scoring one to five 
is used to define the level of risk appetite for each type of risk. 
The Group has a minimal risk appetite for areas of statutory 
compliance but is willing to accept greater risk to achieve  
its commercial objectives and drive the business forward.  
The Board’s appetite for each of the principal risks is set out in 
the table below and within the Principal risks and uncertainties 
section on the following pages.

Principal risk

Risk appetite levels 2021

Low

Low to medium

Balanced

Material

Aggressive

Strategic risks

Economic environment

Competition

Regulation and compliance

Key trading periods 

Infrastructure risks

Supply chain and product

Business systems infrastructure and product

Our people and culture

Reputational risks

Brand and reputation

Risk Appetite

Low

Definition

Control over processes is the most significant concern. Commercial considerations are secondary and should not influence decision 
making in this area.

Low to medium

Control over processes should be a strong concern. However, commercial impact should still be considered if significant.

Balanced

Material

Aggressive

Controls and commercial impacts should be given equal weight in this area.

Control over processes should be as strong as possible; however, if commercial impacts are too great then controls should be relaxed.

Commercial consideration is the primary concern. No controls should be implemented that impact on commercial aspects in this area.

48

1
2
0
2
t
r
o
p
e
R

l

a
u
n
n
A

c
l
p
p
u
o
r
G
S
c
S

 
 
 
 
 
Identification of risks
The Board, the Operating Board and the Group’s senior 
management team have a clearly defined responsibility for 
identifying the major business risks facing the Group and for 
developing systems to report, mitigate and manage those risks. 
The Group’s risk management practices have been enhanced 
through improved functional risk registers designed to identify 
and report on operational risks. 

Monitoring of risks
There is an ongoing process for identifying, evaluating, 
managing and reporting on the significant risks faced by the 
Group. This has been in place for the year under review and up 
to the date of approval of this Annual Report. The Board has 
also performed a robust assessment of the principal risks and 
mitigating controls.

Process for preparing consolidated  
financial statements 
The Group has established internal controls and risk 
management systems in relation to the process for preparing 
consolidated financial statements.
The key features of this are:
 – Management regularly monitors and considers developments 
in reporting regulation and, where appropriate, reflects 
developments in the consolidated financial statements. 
The external auditors and the Audit Committee also keep 
the Board appraised of these developments;

 – The consolidated financial statements are reviewed by 
the Audit Committee and the Board. This review takes 
into account reports from management and the external 
auditors on significant judgements, changes in accounting 
policies and disclosures, changes in accounting estimates 
and other relevant matters to the consolidated financial 
statements; and

 – The full-year financial statements are subject to external 
audit and the half-year financial statements are also 
reviewed by the external auditors.

Risk management processes and framework

Risk management policy, standards and guidelines

Principal risks and uncertainties

Board, Audit Committee, Operating Board, and Audit, Risk and Compliance

Top-down 
Group and 
corporate level 
risk oversight:

Identification
Assessment
Mitigation
Oversight
Reporting

Includes the
identification and
oversight of
emerging risks

5.
Progress is reviewed, 
monitored and  
reported to the Board  
and Audit Committee  
on an ongoing basis

1.
Key risks by  
area (and any 
changes since  
last review)

4.
Progress in  
executing  
agreed process  
improvement  
and implementing 
agreed risk  
mitigation

Risk  
management 
processes

3.
Identifying the 
required actions 
against each risk

2.
Risk ratings –  
by evaluating  
each risk  
and assigning  
a score

49

Bottom-up 
Functional 
and operational 
level risk:

Identification 
Assessment
Prioritisation
Management
Reporting

Includes the
identification and
management of
emerging risks

Functional operational risk registers and reporting

Key roles and delegated responsibilities

Board
Overall responsibility for the leadership of risk management, sets strategic objectives, risk appetite and monitors performance.

Executive Directors
Responsible for disseminating risk policies.  
They support and help the Operating Board 
assess risk. The Executive Directors also oversee 
risk management throughout the Group and 
encourage open communication on risk matters. 
The Executive Directors assess the materiality  
of risks in the context of the whole Group.

The Audit Committee
The Audit Committee oversees risk management 
and internal controls. The Committee reviews  
the Group’s internal controls, sets objectives  
and monitors the effectiveness of the internal  
audit team. The Committee also monitors  
the independence and expertise of the  
external auditors.

Audit, Risk and Compliance 
Responsible for the monitoring of the Group’s 
risk management approach and provides a link 
between the operational managers and the Audit 
Committee. The Head of Audit, Risk & Compliance 
reports formally to the Audit Committee and has 
direct access to the Chair of the Audit Committee. 
The audit, risk and compliance team takes a risk-
based approach to planning audit work.

Operating Board
Responsible for the identification and assessment of existing and emerging risks at an operational level.  
The Operating Board are responsible for the implementation of agreed mitigating controls.

Strategic ReportCorporate GovernanceFinancial StatementsPrincipal risks and uncertainties

We recognise  
the importance of  
having a strong risk 
management culture 

The Board has ultimate responsibility for the oversight of 
managing risk and ensuring that good governance policies are 
embedded across all levels of the business. 

The Board has carried out a robust assessment of emerging 
and principal risks and uncertainties facing the Group.  
Set out below are those which are considered to present the 
most significant threat to the Group’s future development  
or performance.

50

We have a number of processes and controls in place to 
mitigate these risks and they are periodically reviewed.  
The Audit Committee and the Board formally review the 
principal risks and uncertainties three times a year (including 
the consideration of the Viability statement). The Board  
also monitors key performance indicators through Board 
reports and has regular presentations on a number of the  
key risk areas.

On a monthly basis, principal risks and mitigating controls are 
reported to the Operating Board (which includes the Chief 
Executive Officer and Chief Financial Officer).

Two of the highest priority risks we have faced over the past 
two years are those presented by the COVID-19 pandemic and 
Brexit. The following updates highlight how we have responded 
positively and mitigated the risks effectively.

COVID-19
COVID-19 has had a wide ranging and significant impact on 
a number of the principal risks and uncertainties within our 
business. We implemented new controls, risk assessments and 
procedures to ensure that we followed government advice and 
industry best practice. The mitigating controls implemented 
cover a wide range of responses, which are set out below:
 – The senior management team and Operating Board 

discuss emerging issues in line with changes to government 
guidelines and communicate agreed actions to the  
wider teams;

 – The cash flow and profit impacts of different levels/lengths  
of lockdown were modelled prior to the temporary closure  
of our stores throughout the year; 

 – The closure and reopening of our stores was completed 

efficiently and in line with government timelines  
and guidelines;

1
2
0
2
t
r
o
p
e
R

l

a
u
n
n
A

c
l
p
p
u
o
r
G
S
c
S

 – Home working was implemented and, where possible,  

we will move to a hybrid way of working;

 – Communication channels have improved and continue to be 
in place with all external stakeholders including close support 
for our customers and key suppliers, along with dialogue with 
relevant regulatory authorities; 

 – A colleague forum was created to allow two-way 

communication of the latest developments, make 
suggestions and to raise concerns, including shared views 
related to the reopening processes;

 – Our communications team continued to produce detailed 
regular business bulletins that were sent to all colleagues, 
including those on furlough, to ensure everyone was kept up 
to date with the latest information; 

 – All non-essential costs were reduced and planned capital 
expenditure was deferred along with the suspension of  
the May 2020 interim dividend; dividends have since been 
re-introduced; 

 – Landlords were engaged to manage rent obligations and 

negotiate rent deferrals and rent-free periods; 

 – Operating processes were continually reviewed and updated 
to ensure that all best practice guidelines were followed, 
making ‘safety first’ our priority in all areas of the business;

 – We provided additional resource, both through new 

recruitment and from within our existing team to support 
additional demand experienced by our online sales channel;

 – Detailed cash modelling was carried out to assess various 
scenarios and to ensure that cash was preserved to allow 
the business to continue to operate. Severe but plausible 
downsides were also considered;

 – A three-year £20m facility under the Coronavirus Large 

Business Interruption Loan Scheme (CLBILS) was secured  
in August 2020;

 – Risk assessments were performed for our key operational 
areas and detailed working practices and training was 
provided to ensure the safety of our teams; 

 – We provided additional resource in our showrooms to  
help our customers understand our safety procedures  
and we also introduced a VIP appointments system within  
our showrooms to give customers the option to book  
a convenient time with one of our team before arriving;

 
 
 
 
 
 – All of our colleagues across the business were provided with 

personal protective equipment; and

 – In January 2021, we launched MyScSLive, a web-based 
solution that enables our customers to video call with a 
colleague based in a number of our showrooms.

Following the UK’s exit, we have not seen any significant delays 
or impacts due to this transition. We have seen a reduction  
in the availability of drivers within our distribution network.  
We have therefore implemented a plan to improve how we 
attract and retain drivers.

In this continually changing and challenging environment,  
we continue to monitor this risk and associated impacts to 
ensure we adhere to best practice and government advice. 
The business has responded well, quickly adapting to new ways 
of working, whist minimising the impact and risk to employees, 
customers, suppliers and the resilience of the Group. 

Brexit
Prior to the UK’s exit from the EU in December 2020,  
actions were taken to ensure appropriate measures were  
in place, including:
 – Operating Board monitored and reviewed the evolving 

impact of the post-transition trading relationship between 
the UK and the EU;

 – The Operating Board considered various scenarios 

depending on the outcome of trade negotiations and 
prepared plans for each scenario;

 – Working with our suppliers to ensure that they have made 

appropriate plans;

 – Ongoing monitoring of regulatory changes that may affect 

our operations post-transition period;

 – Reviews of impacts on staffing levels to ensure that staff 

retention is managed appropriately; and

 – Review of pricing strategy and changes in our cost base  

to ensure we can continue to offer the best value product 
in the market.

Risk categories
Each principal risk is grouped into an overarching risk category 
to enable better analysis of risk and improved risk reporting.

Strategic risks are those which affect the marketplace 
and the environment in which our business operates. The 
principal risks in this category are: ‘Economic environment’, 
‘Competition’, ‘Key trading periods’ and ‘Regulation and 
compliance’.

Infrastructure risks are those which affect the people  
and the resources that are required to operate our business.  
The principal risks in this category are: ‘Business systems  
and infrastructure’, ‘Supply chain infrastructure and product’ 
and ‘Our people and culture’.

Reputational risks are those which could damage the brand 
or perception of our business. The principal risk in this category 
is ‘Brand and reputation’. 

51

Strategic ReportCorporate GovernanceFinancial StatementsPrincipal risks and uncertainties continued

Economic environment

Risk category
Strategic

Risk appetite 
Balanced

Change in risk level
Risk stayed level

Risk profile after  
mitigating controls
Medium

Link to strategic priorities 
–  Customer driven 
–  Strengthen the core
–  Inspiring ranges
–  Engaging Showrooms 

Performance indicator 
Sales performance

Responsibility
Operating Board

Reports to 
Chief Executive Officer

Consumer confidence 
A downturn in consumer confidence, driven by political or economic concerns, including increased uncertainty in job security, could have a direct  
impact on consumer spending within our market, which could result in a decline in the performance of the Group. There is a further ongoing risk that  
the economic uncertainty the UK is currently facing due to the impact of COVID-19, means consumer confidence could be subdued.

Mitigation
The Group is focused on maintaining resilience, ensuring it is protected throughout the economic cycle. The balance sheet is managed carefully to hold 
sensible levels of cash, and has no debt.

We continue to operate a lean business model with a high proportion of flexible costs allowing us to adapt the cost base quickly, whilst remaining 
competitive.

We have established a diverse product offering, appealing to our core customers. We offer value-for-money market-leading upholstered furniture  
and flooring, which is complemented further by a range of dining furniture.

Progress and plans
During 2021, cash in the balance sheet increased from £82.3m at the end of July 2020 to £87.7m at the end of July 2021.

We constantly review our structure, ensuring we maintain our efficient business model. Our flexible costs in 2021 totalled 73%, meaning changes  
to trading conditions can be more easily navigated. 

52

Our focus on our pricing strategy has always been based on offering the best value, along with a wide range of price points and this continues to be  
our priority. 

We continue to review our showroom layout, and range planning is now embedded across the Group. Our focus on providing value to our core 
demographic and our significant investment in marketing continues, which ensures that our core customer knows who we are and what we offer.

A comprehensive review of improvements we can make to our customers journey has been completed to ensure customers can have even greater 
confidence when shopping with the Group.

Interest rates, currency rates and consumer credit
The Group’s access to, and cost of consumer credit, which provides interest free payments to customers, may be impacted by high default levels or 
interest rate increases. There are further risks that increased interest rates could reduce customers’ disposable income levels. The risk of interest rates 
and currency exchange rates fluctuating could lead to cost pressure on our suppliers which in turn could be passed on to the Group. 

Mitigation
The Group manages the cost of and access to consumer finance by having strong relationships with three finance houses. Further relationships are 
maintained with other finance houses enabling the Group to receive the right service at the right cost.

Our interest-free offering continues to facilitate a low cost option for our customers to purchase furniture for their home, with a range of prices suitable 
for all budgets. 

We purchase our products on a sterling basis minimising direct exposure to exchange rate movements. We work with our suppliers to manage any impact 
on the cost base of products and make selling price adjustments as necessary. 

Progress and plans
Over the year, underlying rates have remained low and interest-free credit charges have remained stable. Customer default levels have remained at 
previous levels. 

The volume of interest-free credit being taken by customers has reduced, resulting in a lower cost to the Group. We will continue to monitor rates and 
work with our finance providers to manage any changes. During the year, we have worked closely with our existing finance providers to ensure that  
we adhere to relevant legislation and guidance.

We have continued to work with our suppliers to manage any impact on their cost base due to interest or exchange rate movements. 

1
2
0
2
t
r
o
p
e
R

l

a
u
n
n
A

c
l
p
p
u
o
r
G
S
c
S

 
 
 
 
 
Competition

Risk category
Strategic

Risk appetite 
Balanced

Change in risk level
Risk stayed level

Risk profile after  
mitigating controls
Medium

Link to strategic priorities 
–  Strengthen the core 
–  Digitally optimised
–  Inspiring ranges

Performance indicator 
Sales performance

Responsibility
Operating Board

Reports to 
Chief Executive Officer

Competitive marketplace and changes to the marketplace
The Group operates in a highly competitive marketplace, increasing pressure on sales and margins. In particular new entrants to the online market 
present a threat to the ability to remain competitive and potentially reduce the Group’s market share. Failing to respond to key changes in the competitive 
environment is a risk to the Group’s strategic plans for growth and profitability.

Mitigation
The Group ensures it continues to respond to the changing needs of our customers, through providing a diverse product range, whilst remaining focused 
on our core market. 

We offer ranges that are exclusive to our Group.

All of our colleagues have continued to focus on the customer journey. We actively monitor and respond to feedback received from our customers  
on various platforms, such as Trustpilot and Google My Business reviews. 

We review product performance across our ranges and in our competitors to identify emerging trends. 

We continue to invest in our website to improve user experience, allowing customers to purchase online or to research products before visiting  
a showroom. We also operate a telesales service and a video appointment, offering customers a full omnichannel service. 

Our marketing strategies are constantly under review, ensuring we reach our target audience effectively.

Progress and plans
We have continued to assess the depth and breadth of our range and plan to respond to customers’ demands by introducing extended ranges that 
complement our existing products.

53

We continue to focus on our commitment to having the best customer service in our market and during the year have started a comprehensive review  
of our customer service functions. We have maintained the Group’s ‘Excellent’ Trustpilot TrustScore. 

Our market share in upholstered furniture continues to increase from 9.8% in 2020 to 10.2% in 2021.

Our review of marketing strategies has been under continuous review throughout 2021, ensuring our investment into relevant advertising channels 
maximises our opportunity to reach our customers.

At the end of July 2020, we launched our new website, making it even easier for our customers to browse our products on their phones and tablets,  
and have been making further improvements throughout the year. 

Continued progress has been made throughout the year with digital marketing and our Search Engine Optimisation (SEO) ranking, seeing more website 
traffic and online sales increasing by 146%.

During the year we introduced ‘zero touch’ finance, allowing customers to apply for finance as part of an integrated step in their online buying journey, 
receiving an immediate decision from the lender and completing their purchase independently from the comfort of their own home.

In January 2021, we launched MyScSLive, a web-based solution that enables our customers to video call with a colleague based in our showrooms, 
at a time convenient to them.

During 2021, we also established our flooring surveyor teams online, which allow our surveyors to carry out virtual appointments to guide and advise  
our customers through the measurement of their own homes.

Financial year 2022 will see continued investment in our digital platform, strengthening our digital leadership and growing our team. The use of enhanced 
data analytics during the year has increased the insight and speed of reviewing product performance.

Strategic ReportCorporate GovernanceFinancial StatementsPrincipal risks and uncertainties continued

Regulation and compliance

Risk category
Strategic

Risk appetite 
Low

Change in risk level
Risk stayed level

Risk profile after  
mitigating controls
Medium

Link to strategic priorities 
–  Strengthen the core
–  Outstanding team
–  Customer driven

Performance indicator 
Prosecution and regulatory 
action

Responsibility
Corporate Services Director

Reports to 
Chief Executive Officer

Key regulated activities
The Group’s operations are subject to a number of regulations, including:
 – Trading standards;
 – Advertising standards;
 – Product safety and quality; 
 – Health and safety;
 – Environmental;
 – Data protection (GDPR);
 – Bribery Act;
 – Financial Conduct Authority (FCA);
 – Modern Slavery; and
 – Task Force on Climate-related Financial Disclosures (TCFD)

Non-compliance with any of the above regulations could result in a financial cost and reputational damage. 

Mitigation
We provide team members with relevant training for regulated activities dependant on their role. Training compliance is monitored and reported monthly  
to the Operating Board. 

Our compliance with all obligations is monitored and reviewed and we update and re-issue internal policies and procedures as required. 

54

The audit, risk and compliance team investigate any complaints and report regularly to the Operating Board and the Audit Committee.

We have a number of internal guidelines in place including a Code of Conduct, which is published on our intranet. We have an anti-bribery and corruption policy 
and training in place for all employees dealing with third-party suppliers. We have controls in place to review gifts and hospitality registers along with updates to  
the policy.

An external confidential whistle-blower hotline has been in place for a number of years. Our policy is intended to ensure employees or third parties are aware 
that they should report any serious concerns or suspicions about any wrongdoing or malpractice on the part of any employee.

A due diligence product testing schedule is in place to regularly review and confirm that our products continue to comply with all relevant regulations.

We are a member of the Furniture Industry Research Associated (FIRA) compliance scheme and we have successfully achieved continued accreditation.

Our health and safety team visit all our retail operations and distribution centres and carry out inspections, ensuring the expected standards are being met.

Progress and plans
Monitoring and reporting processes are in place to confirm completion of our ‘Staple Six’ training programmes, which focuses on all regulated areas and, 
in particular, the requirements of the FCA.

The online training course, to help our retail colleagues introduce finance to customers, is required to be completed annually. This course accommodates 
increased levels of monitoring, compliance, reporting and support to colleagues.

GDPR continues to be an area of focus and we have enhanced our processes and systems to respond quickly to any subject access requests. 

Risk assessments have been under continual review and are updated following guidance issued by the UK government in relation to the COVID-19 pandemic.

During the year we provided formal Health and Safety training to IOSH level for our regional audit team and distribution centre managers. This provides  
an additional level of assurance to our assurance framework. 

We have commenced a comprehensive review of our obligations under TCFD reporting requirements and details of progress in this area are shown  
on pages 30 to 33.

The Government are proposing a policy to increase scrutiny over a number of areas of governance and internal controls. The Group has started to 
consider the proposals and will monitor updates and implement any changes if required under any future guidance or regulation.

1
2
0
2
t
r
o
p
e
R

l

a
u
n
n
A

c
l
p
p
u
o
r
G
S
c
S

 
 
 
 
 
Warranty regulation
The regulatory changes for reporting of product warranties came in to effect in July 2021. Further legislation changes may have a retrospective impact, 
effecting future profit levels.

Mitigation
Monitoring and responding to the updates provided by the FCA ensures that any relevant requirements are understood and appropriate action is planned 
and implemented.

Progress and plans
We have now implemented changes to our care package product. These change the pricing structure of our product and add value, thereby allowing us  
to restructure our pricing to bring the warranty element into line with the FCA guidelines.

Key trading periods

Risk category
Strategic

Risk appetite 
Balanced

Change in risk level
Risk reduced

Risk profile after  
mitigating controls
Medium

Link to strategic priorities 
–  Strengthen the core
–  Digitally optimised
–  Inspiring ranges

Performance indicator 
Sales performance

Responsibility
Commercial Director

Reports to 
Chief Executive Officer

Key trading periods 
Furniture retailing has historically relied on certain key trading days and periods, including bank holidays. Extreme weather conditions or showroom 
closures due to periods of lockdown over these key trading periods may reduce footfall in our showrooms, resulting in reduced sales and potentially 
adverse effects on profitability.

Mitigation
Our flexible approach to marketing has enabled us to react quickly to changes in the marketplace, including extreme weather events or periods of 
lockdown.

55

Our website, telesales service and video appointments offer customers an opportunity to purchase goods, without having to visit a showroom. 

Progress and plans
We adapted our planned marketing activity in line with external factors, including periods of lockdown, to reduce the impact on our historical key trading 
periods, and continually review our marketing strategies to ensure we reach our customers. 

Our website has enabled us to continue to trade successfully throughout adverse periods of weather or closures due to the pandemic. We also 
introduced ‘zero touch’ finance allowing our customers to complete their purchase and finance application all online. 

The launch of MyScSLive early in 2021 enabled our customers to video call from the comfort of their home with a colleague based in a showroom and 
discuss their purchase and seamlessly complete the order.

Allowing customers to apply for finance as part of an integrated step in their online buying journey and complete their purchase independently has further 
improved our customers options to select and place an order with us.

Strategic ReportCorporate GovernanceFinancial StatementsPrincipal risks and uncertainties continued

Supply chain and product

Risk category
Infrastructure

Change in risk level
Risk increased

Risk appetite 
Low to medium

Risk profile after  
mitigating controls
Medium

Link to strategic priorities 
–  Strengthen the core
–  Inspiring ranges
–  Digitally optimised

Responsibility
Logistics Director
Commercial Director
Chief Financial Officer

Performance indicator
Sales performance
Customer feedback
Delivery optimisation

Reports to 
Chief Executive Officer

Supplier resilience and capacity
We rely on a small number of key suppliers, predominantly based in the UK, to provide our product for resale. If one of these suppliers was unable to meet 
demand or ceases to trade, this would disrupt supply to customers. The supply chain could be affected by the ongoing impact of COVID-19-related 
issues with our suppliers, such as staff shortages or COVID-19 issues disrupting production, quality and logistics. 

Mitigation
We have a system in place that monitors on time delivery and product quality is monitored and reported to the Board on a regular basis. Our review of supplier 
financial stability ensures that any early signs of failure are addressed. We have worked closely with our suppliers throughout the year and we have ensured 
that customers are informed of any changes to anticipated delivery time lines. 

Progress and plans
During the year, we have continued to closely monitor production capacity and the financial stability of our suppliers. We continued to work closely with 
our suppliers to ensure they are paid regularly and on time. We are continually reviewing our supply chain and are looking to expand our suppler base 
where appropriate. 

Ethical practices
Our supply chain includes products supplied from the Far East, which increases the risk of non-compliance to our expected ethical practices. 

Mitigation
We work with our suppliers to encourage membership of Sedex and we expect all our suppliers to comply with the relevant legislation and best practices. 

Progress and plans
We have continued to develop our use of the Sedex platform and promote the membership with our suppliers to monitor risks of modern slavery within  
our supply chain. We are reviewing other opportunities to enhance our oversight of ethical trading within the supply chain. We have appointed a new role  
to work with our suppliers and merchandise team to promote sustainability within our supply chain.

Product quality and safety
Our reputation relies on the supply of good quality and safe products, any failure to ensure the highest standard could result in loss of customer 
confidence and reduction in demand.

Mitigation
Our suppliers provide us with assurances over quality and standards, which is complemented by a programme of regular independent testing on our 
products, providing further assurance on compliance to current regulations. Our commercial and customer service teams have access to detailed 
product performance data and hold regular meetings with suppliers to monitor quality and agree any action for continuous improvement.

Progress and plans
In 2021, we were re-audited against the FIRA Compliance Scheme, and we have maintained our certified accreditation. We are proud that ScS was  
the first UK company to achieve this and we continue to support and promote this accreditation with our suppliers. We have introduced quality checks  
at the point of receipt into our distribution centres, ensuring any minor quality issues are resolved prior to being delivered to the customer. 

Supplier credit 
The availability of supplier credit and the ability of suppliers to obtain credit insurance could have a significant impact on our suppliers’ working capital 
requirements, which may have a material impact on the Group’s cash position and overall financial position.

Mitigation
We have developed strong relationships and credibility with credit insurers through regular communication, information, ongoing trading performance 
and the Group’s resilience levels. We have robust forecasting facilities in place that enable early discussion of risks, which improves the chances of positive 
solutions for all stakeholders.

Progress and plans
The Group has continued to have regular dialogue in the year with credit insurers. Suppliers provided regular updates on their credit insurance 
arrangements. None of our manufacturing suppliers saw a reduction in their credit insurance levels.

56

1
2
0
2
t
r
o
p
e
R

l

a
u
n
n
A

c
l
p
p
u
o
r
G
S
c
S

 
 
 
 
 
Cost of raw materials and production
An increase in the costs of raw materials, production of goods or of transport costs may result in a reduction in margin or an increase in our retail pricing.
Risk of availability of raw materials or of shipping space may lead to a cost increase. 

Mitigation
We work closely with our suppliers to review and understand any increase in costs of materials, production or shipping.

Progress and plans
Throughout 2021, the Group has continued to manage cost increases with our supplier base. This has led to the Group’s margin being at a similar level  
to prior years. This will continue into the new financial year.

Business systems and infrastructure

Risk category
Infrastructure

Change in risk level
Risk stayed level

Risk appetite 
Low to medium

Risk profile after  
mitigating controls
Medium

Link to strategic priorities 
–  Customer driven
–  Digitally optimised
–  Strengthen the core

Performance indicator 
Number of major incidents
System performance

Responsibility
Chief Financial Officer

Reports to 
Chief Executive Officer 

System availability 
The Group’s performance is heavily reliant on the continuous operation of our IT systems. Sustained outages or disruption could result in a decrease  
in sales performance and could adversely affect our delivery service.

Mitigation
A 24-hour system is in place for monitoring performance of our business-critical systems. There is also a 24-hour third-party support contract in place 
for all critical systems.

A business continuity plan is in place. A disaster recovery plan is also in place, with all operating systems being replicated at a different site to the primary 
instance. Arrangements are reviewed annually and updates made accordingly. 

57

Progress and plans
During the past year, we implemented a working from home strategy that allowed our processes and services to continue without any disruption. We are 
now working on a permanent hybrid solution, which will allow more flexible working and the opportunity for staff to work from a location that suits them 
and the business.

We have engaged with a third-party specialist to review our technology estate and enable a ‘technology roadmap’ to be created. This will allow the Group 
to plan for ongoing investment in the right technology for future growth. 

We have updated our business continuity planning to reflect our new ways of working.

Cyber and information security 
There is a risk that our data and systems are exposed to external threats, such as cyber-attacks, which could result in data breaches or disruptions  
to our business. There is a risk of malicious or accidental disclosure, loss, amendment or corruption of data, which could have a significant adverse 
reputational impact. 

Mitigation
We use third-party experts to monitor our network and systems against cyber-attacks, including penetration testing, to understand what weaknesses 
the latest cyber security tools can identify.

We have policies, processes and systems in place to ensure access to networks and systems is appropriately controlled and access to sensitive data  
is restricted. 

Network, applications and data are protected and all relevant software and hardware updates are installed on a regular basis.

Progress and plans
During the past year, we have continued to invest in IT, in particular where this related to cyber security improvements. We continue to consult with  
third-party security consultants to ensure ongoing best practice.

Strategic ReportCorporate GovernanceFinancial StatementsPrincipal risks and uncertainties continued

Our people and culture

Risk category
Infrastructure

Change in risk level
Risk increased

Risk appetite 
Low to medium

Risk profile after  
mitigating controls
Medium

Link to strategic priorities 
–  Outstanding team
–  Customer driven
–  Strengthen the core

Performance indicator 
Colleague retention
Team engagement surveys

Responsibility
People Director

Reports to 
Chief Executive Officer

Team retention
The Group relies upon the quality, experience and commitment from all of our colleagues across the business to enable the delivery of a high standard  
of customer service. Failure to recruit, develop and retain colleagues will increase the risk of loss of knowledge and increase the cost of recruitment  
and retraining, impacting on the customer experience. The demand for certain roles, such as drivers, could result in increased costs in order to recruit  
and retain.

Mitigation
Our terms and conditions of employment, including salary packages, are subject to regular review, to ensure they remain competitive and fair within  
the sector. 

We have succession plans in place, covering strategic and contingency measures in the event that key individuals are not available. 

The Group offers attractive incentives and benefit packages to reward our teams and to retain staff. Our incentives focus on rewarding performance  
as well as recognising the need to retain the experience of our senior managers.

We perform periodic reviews of retention rates and further insight is gained through an exit interview process.

We carry out an annual employee survey to ensure our colleagues are engaged and have a clear understanding of the Group’s strategy and their role in it. 

The Group is accredited with Investors in People status and forms part of a wider strategy for ‘Building and inspiring an outstanding team’.

58

Progress and plans
Staff turnover has increased 4.6% during the financial year; however, when compared to financial year 2019, pre-COVID-19, the turnover rate has 
reduced by 4.1%.

During the year, we have recruited a new CEO, People Director and Logistics Director.

Our ‘Inspiring Great Performance’ programme is established for our retail branch and senior management teams. This programme will be extended  
to distribution teams and support functions during the next financial year.

We have continued to develop and improve our training programmes and introduced the ‘Moving On Up’ programme in August 2021, to further 
encourage career progression within the Group.

Our recruitment process has been enhanced through strengthening the team, and with improvements to the application process, we have made  
it easier for potential candidates to apply for advertised roles.

Following on from our employee survey, we identified our colleagues key feedback areas and are currently developing appropriate action plans to  
further improve employee satisfaction.

1
2
0
2
t
r
o
p
e
R

l

a
u
n
n
A

c
l
p
p
u
o
r
G
S
c
S

 
 
 
 
 
Brand and reputation

Risk category
Reputation

Risk appetite 
Low

Change in risk level
Risk stayed level

Risk profile after  
mitigating controls
Low

Link to strategic priorities 
–  Outstanding team
–  Customer driven
–  Strengthen the core

Performance indicator 
Sales performance
Customer feedback

Responsibility
Operating Board

Reports to 
Chief Executive Officer

Brand and reputation
The Group recognises that failure to effectively protect its strong brand could result in a loss of confidence by customers, colleagues and other  
key stakeholders.

Mitigation
Using feedback from Trustpilot, social media and any other customer contact, we identify where we have opportunities for improvements and action  
is taken accordingly.

Product quality and the integrity of our product sourcing is regularly monitored and reviewed with our suppliers. As well as assurance being provided 
by our suppliers in relation to quality and standards, we also complete regular independent testing on our products, providing further assurance on 
compliance to current regulations.

Regular meetings are held between our commercial and customer service teams to monitor quality and agree any action for continuous improvement.

We review colleague engagement through staff surveys, and we continue to engage with staff through forums to gather feedback. 

All our teams that interact or monitor compliance have policies and processes in place to monitor and adhere to relevant standards, ensuring our 
reputation for a high quality product and service is maintained.

We continue to promote our established Code of Conduct, equality and diversity policies, and all staff and suppliers have access to a confidential  
whistle-blowing helpline.

Progress and plans
During 2021, customer experience has been elevated as a key focus throughout the Group, with an extensive external review completed to help identify 
areas to improve our processes across all departments to improve the customer journey.

59

We have further promoted our values throughout the business, ensuring our focus is maintained on making ScS a great place to work and shop.

Our ‘Excellent’ Trustpilot score continues to recognise our ability to provide an excellent customer experience, with our TrustScore remaining high at  
4.7 out of 5.

We continued to work closely with our suppliers and have established an improvement programme for product quality. Data from customer services  
and audit results help us to guide suppliers through areas of focus to drive improvements. 

As part of the new care package introduced in 2021, we have technicians on site at each distribution centre to inspect products received and enable  
any issues to be resolved immediately on site or be reported directly to the supplier.

Strategic ReportCorporate GovernanceFinancial StatementsViability statement

The UK Corporate Governance Code requires the Group to 
issue a ‘viability statement’ declaring whether we believe the 
Group can continue to operate and meet its liabilities, taking into 
account its current position and principal risks in the longer term.

specifically stress tested against the key risks identified within 
the plan, with attention to the principal risks and uncertainties 
highlighted on pages 50 to 59. This included the modelling of:
 – A further nationwide lockdown;
 – Various severities of downturn in revenue;
 – Various severities of downturns in gross margin;
 – The withdrawal of supplier credit insurance (inclusive of  

the above downturns); and

 – A combination of all of the above.

Due primarily to the flexible nature of the cost structure of 
the Group, and additionally to the significant cash reserves 
held currently, the outcome of this stress testing satisfied 
the Directors with respect to the ongoing liquidity and 
solvency of the Group over the three year period under review. 
Approximately 73% of total Group costs are either variable or 
discretionary and as such, even in difficult trading conditions, 
these costs would also reduce. The Group has also excluded 
any potential further assistance from the UK Government. 
These reductions, together with relevant mitigating actions 
and significant cash reserves, would ensure the Group could 
continue to meet its liabilities. Further to the above examples, 
the Directors are comfortable that the work done to minimise 
the risk to the supply chain, chiefly ensuring the use of a  
variety of suppliers, and ensuring multiple factories are able  
to produce similar product ranges, would be sufficient to  
limit the effect on the Group should that risk occur. 

The Strategic Plan makes certain assumptions about the 
normal level of capital recycling likely to occur and, therefore 
considers whether additional financing will be required. The 
Group continues to hold a significant cash balance and the new 
undrawn £20.0m CLBILS committed revolving credit facility. 
The facility was entered into in August 2020 and extends 
to August 2023. This facility has never been drawn and the 
modelling indicated it would not be required. The Strategic Plan 
also encompasses the projected cash flows and headroom 
against financial covenants under the Group’s facility.

Conclusion
Based upon this assessment, the Directors have a reasonable 
expectation that the Company will be able to continue in 
operation and meet its liabilities as they fall due over the period 
to 27 July 2024. In making this statement, the Directors have 
considered the resilience of the Group, taking into account its 
current position and the principal risks facing the business.

This Strategic Report, which has been prepared in accordance 
with the requirements of the Companies Act 2006, has been 
approved and signed on behalf of the Board.

Steve Carson
Chief Executive Officer
4 October 2021

Variable or discretionary total Group costs

73%

Undrawn CLBILS committed revolving credit facility

£20.0m

Cash balance as at 31 July 2021

£87.7m

60

Due to the inherent pace of change in the retail environment, 
and the wider economic environment, the Group tends to 
ensure focus is on delivery of short to medium-term goals. The 
refreshed strategy, our ‘Growth Plan’ and associated principal 
risks underpin the Group’s three-year strategic planning 
process (‘the Strategic Plan’), which is updated annually.  
This process takes into account the current and prospective 
macro-economic conditions in the UK and the competitive 
tension that exists within the markets that we trade. The 
period of three years, as set out within the Strategic Plan,  
is considered appropriate for business planning, measuring 
performance and aligns with the payback requirements of  
any significant capital investment (new stores).

Capital allocation
We aim to allocate capital, subject to strict returns criteria, to 
meet the strategic needs of the business. Our target is gross 
capital expenditure of under 3.0% of total sales per annum, 
on average. During the year we invested significantly in our 
distribution centres and store network. The Group’s objectives 
when managing capital are to safeguard the Group’s ability 
to continue as a going concern and retain financial flexibility, 
invest in the business where economic returns are attractive 
and provide attractive returns to shareholders. Considering 
these objectives, the Board reinstated a dividend this year and 
is pleased to propose a final dividend of 7.0p which if approved 
would give a full year dividend of 10.0p.

As explained in the Strategic Report, the Group’s business 
model provides customers with quality, competitively priced 
upholstered furniture, flooring and related products. The 
Directors are confident that consumer demand for these 
products will continue to remain in the longer term, and that 
our refreshed strategy (see pages 26 and 27) will ensure our 
business model will continue to bring long-term sustainable 
success to the Group.

Assessment of viability
The Strategic Plan is stress tested for severe but plausible 
scenarios and the effectiveness of any mitigating actions 
that would reasonably be taken. Given the current political 
and economic uncertainty, in particular surrounding potential 
further impact of COVID-19, together with the changes 
across the retail sector, it is reasonable to expect further 
volatility in the short term. The Strategic Plan was, therefore, 

1
2
0
2
t
r
o
p
e
R

l

a
u
n
n
A

c
l
p
p
u
o
r
G
S
c
S

 
 
 
 
 
“…our business model 
will continue to bring 
long-term sustainable 
success to the Group.”

61

Strategic ReportCorporate GovernanceFinancial StatementsBoard of Directors

4

6

1

62

1
2
0
2
t
r
o
p
e
R

l

a
u
n
n
A

c
l
p
p
u
o
r
G
S
c
S

1  Alan Smith 
Non-Executive Chairman

Date of appointment

22 October 2014

Committee membership

N   R
Biography

Alan has held a number of roles for retail companies across 
the private equity and quoted sector previously, including 
Chairman and Chief Executive Officer of Robert Dyas, 
Chief Executive Officer of Somerfield, CEO of Evans 
Halshaw plc, and Group and Managing Director of B&Q.

2  Steve Carson 
Chief Executive Officer

3  Chris Muir 
Chief Financial Officer

4  Ron McMillan 

Non-Executive Director

5  George Adams 

Non-Executive Director

6  Angela Luger

Non-Executive Director

6 January 2021

4 April 2016

22 October 2014

9 July 2015

A   R   N

R   A   N

16 May 2019

A   N   R

Steve brings deep knowledge and experience in retail 
and leadership after an extensive career in the sector, 
most recently as Group Managing Director of Holland 
& Barrett. Prior to this, Steve held a number of roles at 
Home Retail Group plc (HRG), which owned a number of 
well-known brands such as Argos, Homebase and Habitat. 
Steve latterly served as Director of Retail and Customer 
Operations and a Board member from 2014-2018, during 
which time HRG was acquired by Sainsbury’s plc, where 
Steve had also begun his career.

Chris joined ScS as Chief Financial Officer in April 2016. 
He is a chartered accountant, qualifying in 1999 whilst 
working at Deloitte. In 2003, he joined Northgate plc, 
Europe’s leading specialist in light commercial vehicle hire, 
as the Group Accountant and held a number of senior UK 
and group roles, including UK Finance Director and acting 
group CEO in the summer of 2014. Prior to joining ScS he 
was Group Finance Director of Northgate. 

Key strengths

Retail, finance, strategy, marketing

Retail, strategy, digital, marketing

External appointments

The Navy, Army and Air Force Institutes
The Royal Air Force Charitable Trust Enterprises
Scampton Airshow Limited

Marie Curie
CJC HR Consultancy Ltd

Financial and risk management, investor  
and banking experience, restructuring,  
change management

risk management

N Brown Group plc

B&M European Value Retail S.A.

Homeserve plc

Ron is the Chairman of N Brown Group plc and a Non-

George has a strong commercial and management 

Angela is the Chair of The Paint Shed Ltd, she is also 

Executive Director and Audit Committee Chair of ScS 

background, with over 30 years of international experience 

Non-Executive Director for New Look Ltd and Portmerion 

Group plc, HomeServe plc and B&M European Value Retail 

across Europe and Asia. George is the Chair of Bradford 

Group plc. Angela began her career in FMCG marketing 

S.A. Previously, Ron worked in PwC’s assurance business 

and Sons Limited, he is also Non-Executive Director for 

with Cadbury’s, Coca Cola and Mars, prior to moving into 

for 38 years and has deep knowledge and experience  

Nobia AB and Stiga SA.

of auditing, financial reporting issues and governance.  

retail. She spent 10 years at Asda, holding a variety of 

positions including Trading Director and Global Managing 

As the Northern Regional Chairman of PwC in the UK and 

George spent 16 years with Kingfisher plc, in roles which 

Director for George. She was MD of Debenhams, CEO of 

Deputy Chairman of PwC in the Middle East, he acted as 

included CEO of Europe Development, Group Commercial 

The Original Factory Shop and most recently was the CEO 

engagement leader to a number of major listed companies, 

Director and Commercial Managing Director for B&Q.  

of N Brown Group plc, where she led the business through 

including many in the retail sector.

He has also held CEO positions at Spicers Group and 

a significant digital transformation. Angela has significant 

Maxeda DIY Group and has both plc and private equity 

experience in marketing, e-commerce and retail, including 

experience in the retail and consumer goods sector.

leveraging technology to optimise a value retail offering.

Finance, financial reporting, governance,  

Retail, strategy, marketing, supply chain

Retail, marketing, digital, strategy

FFX Ltd (resigned 23 January 2021)

Nobia AB

Stiga S.A.

Bradford and Sons Limited

Portmerion Group plc

The Paint Shed Holdings Limited

New Look Retailers Limited

The Hiring Hub Holdings Limited

Majelan Limited

 
 
 
 
 
Committee membership key
A   Audit Committee Chair
A   Audit Committee Member
R   Remuneration Committee Chair
R   Remuneration Committee Member

N   Nomination Committee Chair
N   Nomination Committee Member

5

2

3

63

1  Alan Smith 

Non-Executive Chairman

Date of appointment

22 October 2014

Committee membership

N   R

Biography

2  Steve Carson 

Chief Executive Officer

3  Chris Muir 

Chief Financial Officer

4  Ron McMillan 
Non-Executive Director

5  George Adams 
Non-Executive Director

6  Angela Luger
Non-Executive Director

6 January 2021

4 April 2016

22 October 2014

9 July 2015

A   R   N

R   A   N

16 May 2019

A   N   R

Alan has held a number of roles for retail companies across 

Steve brings deep knowledge and experience in retail 

Chris joined ScS as Chief Financial Officer in April 2016. 

the private equity and quoted sector previously, including 

and leadership after an extensive career in the sector, 

He is a chartered accountant, qualifying in 1999 whilst 

Chairman and Chief Executive Officer of Robert Dyas, 

most recently as Group Managing Director of Holland 

working at Deloitte. In 2003, he joined Northgate plc, 

Chief Executive Officer of Somerfield, CEO of Evans 

& Barrett. Prior to this, Steve held a number of roles at 

Europe’s leading specialist in light commercial vehicle hire, 

Halshaw plc, and Group and Managing Director of B&Q.

Home Retail Group plc (HRG), which owned a number of 

as the Group Accountant and held a number of senior UK 

well-known brands such as Argos, Homebase and Habitat. 

and group roles, including UK Finance Director and acting 

Steve latterly served as Director of Retail and Customer 

group CEO in the summer of 2014. Prior to joining ScS he 

Operations and a Board member from 2014-2018, during 

was Group Finance Director of Northgate. 

which time HRG was acquired by Sainsbury’s plc, where 

Steve had also begun his career.

Ron is the Chairman of N Brown Group plc and a Non-
Executive Director and Audit Committee Chair of ScS 
Group plc, HomeServe plc and B&M European Value Retail 
S.A. Previously, Ron worked in PwC’s assurance business 
for 38 years and has deep knowledge and experience  
of auditing, financial reporting issues and governance.  
As the Northern Regional Chairman of PwC in the UK and 
Deputy Chairman of PwC in the Middle East, he acted as 
engagement leader to a number of major listed companies, 
including many in the retail sector.

George has a strong commercial and management 
background, with over 30 years of international experience 
across Europe and Asia. George is the Chair of Bradford 
and Sons Limited, he is also Non-Executive Director for 
Nobia AB and Stiga SA.

George spent 16 years with Kingfisher plc, in roles which 
included CEO of Europe Development, Group Commercial 
Director and Commercial Managing Director for B&Q.  
He has also held CEO positions at Spicers Group and 
Maxeda DIY Group and has both plc and private equity 
experience in the retail and consumer goods sector.

Angela is the Chair of The Paint Shed Ltd, she is also 
Non-Executive Director for New Look Ltd and Portmerion 
Group plc. Angela began her career in FMCG marketing 
with Cadbury’s, Coca Cola and Mars, prior to moving into 
retail. She spent 10 years at Asda, holding a variety of 
positions including Trading Director and Global Managing 
Director for George. She was MD of Debenhams, CEO of 
The Original Factory Shop and most recently was the CEO 
of N Brown Group plc, where she led the business through 
a significant digital transformation. Angela has significant 
experience in marketing, e-commerce and retail, including 
leveraging technology to optimise a value retail offering.

Retail, finance, strategy, marketing

Retail, strategy, digital, marketing

Financial and risk management, investor  

and banking experience, restructuring,  

change management

Finance, financial reporting, governance,  
risk management

Retail, strategy, marketing, supply chain

Retail, marketing, digital, strategy

N Brown Group plc
B&M European Value Retail S.A.
Homeserve plc

FFX Ltd (resigned 23 January 2021)
Nobia AB
Stiga S.A.
Bradford and Sons Limited

Portmerion Group plc
The Paint Shed Holdings Limited
New Look Retailers Limited
The Hiring Hub Holdings Limited
Majelan Limited

Key strengths

External appointments

The Navy, Army and Air Force Institutes

Marie Curie

The Royal Air Force Charitable Trust Enterprises

CJC HR Consultancy Ltd

Scampton Airshow Limited

Strategic ReportCorporate GovernanceFinancial StatementsCorporate governance statement

64

1
2
0
2
t
r
o
p
e
R

l

a
u
n
n
A

c
l
p
p
u
o
r
G
S
c
S

 
 
 
 
 
Introduction  
from the Chair

65

As a Board we continue to recognise the vital role of good 
corporate governance in building stakeholder relations and in 
promoting the long-term success of the Group. Our compliance 
with the 2018 UK Corporate Governance Code (‘the Code’)  
is set out on pages 66 to 67. 

Although we are a relatively small Board, we have a wide range of 
skills and expertise to provide strategic guidance and effectively 
lead the Group. The Board critically assessed itself this year and 
I am satisfied that the Board and its Committees have a good 
balance of knowledge and experience and that no concerns  
with performance were identified. Further detail on the review  
is provided on page 73.

During the year the Board has continued to work together to 
navigate the Group through the ongoing COVID-19 pandemic 
and ensure that our stakeholders remain our top priority. 
Maintaining active engagement with our various stakeholders 
is of utmost importance to the Board to ensure that we 
understand their interests and take them into account when 
making decisions on behalf of the Group. Our Section 172 
statement on pages 42 to 43 details the Board’s engagement 
with stakeholders throughout the year.

In January 2021, we welcomed our new CEO, Steve Carson, 
who brings with him a wealth of retail experience and shares the 
Board’s commitment in leading by example to create an open 
and honest culture. As a Board, we strive to build an outstanding 
team to ensure we can deliver our plans and continue to develop 
a Group we can be proud of.

A key theme throughout this year’s Annual Report is our purpose 
– ‘Helping create the home you love’. During the last year the 
Board have been focused on evolving our purpose and strategy. 
In turn this has helped to further focus the operations of the 
Group and aid decision making. 

We will be holding our Annual General Meeting on 26 November 
2021 and I will be available to answer any questions you may have 
on this report.

Alan Smith
Chair
4 October 2021

Strategic ReportCorporate GovernanceFinancial StatementsCorporate governance statement continued

Compliance with the UK Corporate Governance Code
The Board is committed to high standards of corporate governance and is responsible for ensuring the Group’s compliance with the requirements of the 
2018 UK Corporate Governance Code, a copy of the Code is available on the FRC’s website: www.frc.org.uk. The Board believes that throughout FY21,  
the Group has complied with all the Code’s provisions.

The following pages provide a high-level overview of how the Board applies the Principles of the Code.

Board leadership and company purpose

Principle A
A successful company is led by an effective and entrepreneurial Board, whose role is to promote 
the long-term sustainable success of the company, generating value for shareholders and 
contributing to wider society.

Principle B
The Board should establish the company’s purpose, values and strategy, and satisfy itself that 
these and its culture are aligned. All directors must act with integrity, lead by example and promote 
the desired culture.

Principle C
The Board should ensure that the necessary resources are in place for the company to meet its 
objectives and measure performance against them. The Board should also establish a framework 
of prudent and effective controls, which enable risk to be assessed and managed.

Strategic report pages 1 to 60
Board leadership and company purpose pages 68 to 69

Strategic report pages 1 to 60
Board leadership and company purpose pages 68 to 69
Division of responsibilities pages 70 to 71

Section 172 statement pages 42 to 43
Principal risks and uncertainties pages 50 to 59
Audit Committee report pages 75 to 80

Principle D
In order for the company to meet its responsibilities to shareholders and stakeholders, the Board 
should ensure effective engagement with, and encourage participation from, these parties.

Responsible business 30 to 41
Section 172 statement pages 42 to 43

Principle E
The Board should ensure that workforce policies and practices are consistent with the company’s 
values and support its long-term sustainable success. The workforce should be able to raise any 
matters of concern.

Section 172 statement pages 42 to 43
Board leadership and company purpose pages 68 to 69

Division of responsibilities 

66

Principle F
The Chair leads the Board and is responsible for its overall effectiveness in directing the company. 
They should demonstrate objective judgement throughout their tenure and promote a culture 
of openness and debate. In addition, the Chair facilitates constructive Board relations and the 
effective contribution of all non-executive directors, and ensures that direct or receive accurate, 
timely and clear information.

Principle G
The Board should include an appropriate combination of executive and non-executive  
(and, in particular, independent non-executive) directors, such that no one individual or small 
group of individuals dominates the Board’s decision-making. There should be a clear division 
of responsibilities between the leadership of the Board and the executive leadership of the 
company’s business.

Principle H
Non-executive directors should have sufficient time to meet their Board responsibilities.  
They should provide constructive challenge, strategic guidance, offer specialist advice and  
hold management to account.

Board leadership and company purpose pages 68 to 69
Division of responsibilities pages 70 to 71

Board of Directors pages 62 to 63
Division of responsibilities pages 70 to 71

Board leadership and company purpose pages 68 to 69
Division of responsibilities pages 70 to 71
Audit Committee report pages 75 to 80

Principle I
The Board, supported by the company secretary, should ensure that it has the policies, processes, 
information, time and resources it needs in order to function effectively and efficiently.

Board leadership and company purpose pages 68 to 69
Division of responsibilities pages 70 to 71

1
2
0
2
t
r
o
p
e
R

l

a
u
n
n
A

c
l
p
p
u
o
r
G
S
c
S

 
 
 
 
 
Composition, succession and evaluation

Principle J
Appointments to the Board should be subject to a formal, rigorous and transparent procedure, 
and an effective succession plan should be maintained for Board and senior management.  
Both appointments and succession plans should be based on merit and objective criteria and, 
within this context, should promote diversity of gender, social and ethnic backgrounds, cognitive 
and personal strengths.

Principle K
The Board and its committees should have a combination of skills, experience and knowledge. 
Consideration should be given to the length of service of the Board as a whole and membership 
regularly refreshed.

Principle L
Annual evaluation of the Board should consider its composition, diversity and how effectively 
members work together to achieve objectives. Individual evaluation should demonstrate whether 
each director continues to contribute effectively.

Audit, risk and internal control

Principle M
The Board should establish formal and transparent policies and procedures to ensure the 
independence and effectiveness of internal and external audit functions and satisfy itself  
on the integrity of financial and narrative statements.

Nomination Committee report pages 73 to 74
Composition, succession and evaluation pages 72 to 74

Board of Directors pages 62 to 63

Nomination Committee report pages 73 to 74
Composition, succession and evaluation pages 72 to 74

Audit Committee report pages 75 to 80

Principle N
The Board should present a fair, balanced and understandable assessment of the company’s 
position and prospects.

Strategic report pages 1 to 60
Audit Committee report pages 75 to 80
Financial statements pages 100 to 133

Principle O
The Board should establish procedures to manage risk, oversee the internal control framework, 
and determine the nature and extent of the principal risks the company is willing to take in order  
to achieve its long-term strategic objectives.

Viability statement page 60
Principal risks and uncertainties pages 50 to 59
Audit Committee report pages 75 to 80

67

Remuneration

Principle P
Remuneration policies and practices should be designed to support strategy and promote  
long-term sustainable success. Executive remuneration should be aligned to company purpose 
and values, and be clearly linked to the successful delivery of the company’s long-term strategy.

Principle Q
A formal and transparent procedure for developing policy on executive remuneration and 
determining director and senior management remuneration should be established. No director 
should be involved in deciding their own remuneration outcome.

Principle R
Directors should exercise independent judgement and discretion when authorising remuneration 
outcomes, taking account of company and individual performance, and wider circumstances.

Strategic report pages 1 to 60
Board leadership and company purpose pages 68 to 69
Directors’ Remuneration report pages 81 to 95

Directors’ Remuneration report pages 91 to 95

Directors’ Remuneration report pages 91 to 95

Strategic ReportCorporate GovernanceFinancial StatementsCorporate governance statement continued

Board leadership and company purpose
Role of the Board
The Group is led and controlled by the Board which is 
collectively responsible for the long-term sustainable 
success of the Group, generating value for shareholders 
and contributing to wider society. The Board establishes the 
Group’s purpose, values and strategy and satisfies itself that 
these are aligned with its culture. All Directors have access  
to the Group Secretary, whose appointment and removal  
is one of the matters reserved for the Board.

Governance and legal
 – Received and reviewed updates on corporate  

governance developments;

 – Reviewed the matters reserved for the Board and the  

terms of reference of its Committees;

 – Conducted an evaluation of the Board’s effectiveness  

and reviewed the outcome;

 – Reviewed reports on the Group’s key stakeholders  

and reviewed engagement mechanisms; and
 – Appointed the Group’s professional advisors.

Board activity in the year
The following summarises some of the Board’s key activities 
over the past year:

Performance, strategy and finance
 – Received regular updates from the executives on  

trading performance;

 – Reviewed the Group’s performance against its strategic 

priorities and KPIs;

 – Monitored and assessed the impact of the COVID-19 

pandemic on the business; 

 – Provided oversight and ultimate approval of a number of key 
assessments: the Group’s purpose, mission and strategy;

 – Review of the customer journey and digital roadmap;
 – Approved the FY20 Annual Report and the FY21  

Interim Results;

Committees
The Board has delegated certain responsibilities to 
Committees to assist in discharging its duties and the 
implementation of matters approved by the Board. Further 
detail on the work of the Committees is provided later in the 
Annual Report. 

Detailed implementation of matters approved by the Board 
and Committees, and operational day-to-day matters, 
are delegated to the Executive Directors. The Executive 
Directors are also supported by an experienced and able senior 
management team. All Directors have access to the Group 
Secretary, whose appointment and removal is one of the 
matters reserved for the Board.

 – Approved the dividend policy and declaration;
 – Reviewed and confirmed the Group’s Viability statement 

and going concern status;

 – Reviewed and approved the Group’s FY22 budget; and 
 – Assessed capital allocations and capital expenditure  

in respect of the Group’s growth strategy.

Board administration
There is a rolling programme of Board meetings throughout 
the year and there are six Board meetings presently scheduled 
for 2022. In 2021, meetings were held between the six 
scheduled meetings, as circumstances required. The Board will 
continue to meet on this basis, when circumstances require. 

68

Leadership, stakeholders and culture
 – Appointed a new CEO; 
 – Reviewed the succession plan for Directors and senior 

management team;

 – Recruited a specific People Director within the  

Operating Board;

 – Reviewed recruitment and how diversity could be improved;
 – Continued prioritisation of colleague health and wellbeing 

during the COVID-19 pandemic;

 – Recruited a supply chain sustainability manager to review 

and enhance our product sourcing; 

 – Received and reviewed updates on ESG activity; 
 – Reviewed the annual employee survey results;
 – Reviewed wider workforce remuneration and related 
policies and the alignment of incentives and rewards  
with culture;

 – Received updates on ESG activity; and
 – Held discussion groups with colleagues across  

the business.

Risk management and internal control
 – Reviewed the Group’s risk registers and monitored  
the key risks and appropriate mitigating actions;
 – Carried out a robust assessment of the principal and 

emerging risks facing the Group; 

 – Reviewed the effectiveness of the risk management  

and internal controls during the year;
 – Discussed environmental initiatives; and 
 – Received updates on ESG activity.

1
2
0
2
t
r
o
p
e
R

l

a
u
n
n
A

c
l
p
p
u
o
r
G
S
c
S

All Board and Committee members receive sets of Board 
packs in advance of the Board and Committee meetings. For 
scheduled Board meetings this includes progress on strategy, 
current trading, stakeholder KPIs, management accounts 
and detailed papers on other matters where Board approval 
is required. The CEO and CFO present reports to the Board 
at each scheduled meeting on trading, financial performance 
and operational matters, along with updates on any significant 
health and safety, litigation or regulatory matters. For Board 
meetings which are held as circumstances require, the Board 
packs reflect the agenda of the meeting, although generally 
the CEO and CFO will still present reports to the Board on 
trading, financial performance and operational matters,  
as well as in respect of the other matters for the consideration 
of the Board at the meeting.

“ The Board recognises 
the importance of 
ensuring a healthy  
and supportive culture 
within the Group.”

 
 
 
 
 
Values, culture and purpose
The Board considers and monitors how the Group’s values of 
being a responsive, inclusive, getting it right, hard working and 
trusted retailer of sofas and carpets are reflected in the way 
in which the Group operates. The Group’s purpose is ‘Helping 
create the home you love’. Our values and purpose reflect how 
the Group operates culturally as a business and how we engage 
with our stakeholders.

The Board recognises the importance of ensuring a healthy 
and supportive culture within the Group. The Board monitors 
culture and values in a number of ways, including undertaking 
an annual survey of all employees, undertaking pulse surveys 
throughout the year on specific topics, reviewing feedback 
through Director discussion groups, as well as reviewing 
feedback provided by our customers through forums such as 
Trustpilot and Google My Business. There are formal policies in 
place in relation to anti-bribery, corruption and whistle-blowing, 
in relation to the reporting of any suspected malpractice  
or wrongdoing. 

We also have a dedicated, free to use employee assistance 
programme, where employees can gain access to help and 
support on a whole range of personal issues including mental 
health and financial worries. The Group works with Sedex  
to improve working conditions for employees of the Group’s 
suppliers and responsibly source its supplies.

Whistle-blowing
All employees are able to access a confidential helpline 
operated by Safecall should they want to report any 
wrongdoing anonymously. All reports are formally investigated 
by the Head of Audit, Risk & Compliance with support from 
relevant functions. Incidents and their outcomes are reported 
to the Audit Committee and the Board. A number of calls were 
made to the external hotline during the year and management 
action was taken where appropriate. No issues were raised  
that required any direct action from the Board.

Diversity 
The Group is satisfied overall with its record on diversity, and 
is aware of the need to monitor and review its level of diversity. 
Whilst the Group would have preferred to have a more diverse 
Board, appointments will always be made on merit and 
objective criteria as opposed to on the basis of gender targets, 
and this is considered in the best interests of the Group and 
its shareholders. See the Nomination Committee report on 
pages 73 to 74 for further details.

Stakeholder engagement
The Board appreciates the importance of engaging with the 
Group’s stakeholders and having regard to their interests in 
its decision-making process. The welfare and interests of our 
colleagues and customers during the COVID-19 pandemic 
have been of paramount importance. At each scheduled 
meeting, the Board reviews key performance indicators 
relating to suppliers, employees and customers as well as 
movements in the Group’s shareholders. Regular update 
reports are provided to the Board by the designated Non-
Executive Workforce Engagement Director, George Adams, 
who holds regular discussion forums with members of the 
wider workforce to ensure that the Board is engaging with 
colleagues and to provide them with a direct route to raise 
issues or concerns with the Board.

During the year, members of the Board, including the Chair, 
have attended regular meetings with the Group’s suppliers, 
shareholders and employees. Members of the Board regularly 
visit the Group’s showrooms and distribution centres to assess 
operations and engage with colleagues and report on their 

Executive/Non-Executive

Board tenure

  Chairman (1)

  Chief Executive (1)

 Chief Financial  
Officer (1)

  Non-Executives (3)

  1-5 years (2)

  5-15 years (4)

  15 years+ (0)

visits at Board meetings. This year, in particular, there have 
been a large number of showroom and distribution centre 
visits as part of the induction of the new CEO, and following  
the reopening of showrooms under COVID-19 restrictions. 
Details of the stakeholder interests, which the Board has 
considered are set out in the Section 172 statement on  
pages 42 to 43, the Responsible business pages on 30 to 41, 
and the Risk and risk management section on pages 48 to 49.

Shareholder relations
The Board recognises that good communication is key 
to maintaining shareholder relations, and as such we will 
endeavour to explain our actions and financial results on a 
regular basis and to respond to investor inquiries and feedback.

Meetings and calls are regularly made with institutional and 
retail investors and analysts in order to provide the best quality 
information to the market. During the year George Adams, 
Chair of the Remuneration Committee, met with our largest  
20 shareholders to canvas their views on a range of topics, 
further detail can be found on page 82.

In addition, the Group will communicate with its shareholders 
through the Annual General Meeting, at which the Chair will 
give an account of the progress of the business over the past 
year, and will provide the opportunity for shareholders to 
raise questions with the Chair and the Chairs of each of the 
Committees of the Board.

The Group also runs a corporate website at scsplc.co.uk, which 
is regularly updated with our releases to the market and other 
information and which includes a copy of this Annual Report. 

Conflicts of interest
There are no potential conflicts of interest between any of the 
Directors or senior management within the Group and their 
private interests.

There is an established process of the Board for regularly 
reviewing actual or potential conflicts of interest. In particular, 
there is a process for reviewing transactions proposed to be 
entered into by related parties of Directors with any entities 
in the Group, including professional advice and consideration 
of it by the Board and the Group’s corporate brokers on 
the application of the Listing Rules, the applicability and 
the appropriateness of any exemptions in respect of any 
transactions in the ordinary course of business and reporting 
to general meetings of shareholders under England and Wales 
Company Law. This process also includes consideration of  
the extent to which the Board may require external and any 
other reports and evaluations to be presented to it on any 
proposed transactions.

69

Strategic ReportCorporate GovernanceFinancial Statements 
Corporate governance statement continued

Division of responsibilities
Group Board
The Board is responsible for the overall leadership of the Group and setting its objectives and standards. All Directors act with integrity and understand the 
importance of leading by example to promote the desired culture throughout the organisation. It is the Board’s responsibility to ensure that the Group has 
the necessary resources to meet its objectives and measure performance against them. The Board also establishes effective internal control procedures 
which enable risk to be assessed and managed. The formal list of matters reserved for the Board can be found at scsplc.co.uk. 

Committees
The Board has delegated authority to a number of Committees to assist with and supervise specific matters. The key responsibilities of each Committee  
is outlined on the following page. The terms of reference of each of the Board’s Committees are available on our website scsplc.co.uk. 

Key roles
The positions of Chair and CEO are occupied by different individuals. There is a clear division of roles and responsibilities between the Chair and the CEO and 
no individual has unrestricted powers of decision making. Effective communication between Directors is vital for the long-term success of the Group with  
all Directors bringing their own views to the table and each providing constructive challenge to ensure decision making is informed.

Chair

Chief Executive Officer

Senior Independent Director

Responsible for leading the Board, setting its agenda 
and overseeing its effectiveness in directing the Group

Responsible for the day-to day management  
of the Group 

Leads the assessment of the Chair’s 
performance

Responsible for directing and focusing the Group, 
ensuring there is a clear strategy and business model

Reviews and devises the Group strategy for 
discussion and approval by the Board

Acts as a sounding Board for the Chair and 
a trusted intermediary for other Directors

Ensures Directors receive accurate, timely and  
clear information

Facilitates the effective contribution of the Non-
Executive Directors, promoting a culture of openness 
and creating a forum for constructive challenge

Responsible for implementing Board decisions

Leads the succession process for the role 
of Chair

Leads by example and creates a culture centred 
around the Group’s values

Available to shareholders to resolve 
significant issues should they arise

Responsible for fostering good relationships between 
Executive and Non-Executive Directors

Responsible for ensuring effective communication 
with shareholders and other key stakeholders

70

1
2
0
2
t
r
o
p
e
R

l

a
u
n
n
A

c
l
p
p
u
o
r
G
S
c
S

 
 
 
 
 
Governance framework

Shareholders

Chair

The Board

Board Committees

Nomination Committee
 – Reviews the structure, size and 

composition of the Board, including the 
balance of Executive and Non-Executive 
Directors;

 – Considers succession planning for 
Directors and senior management 
positions;

 – Oversees the development of a diverse 
pipeline for succession, having regard 
to diversity of gender, social and ethnic 
backgrounds, cognitive and personal 
strengths; and

 – Identifies and nominates candidates for 
the approval of the Board, to fill Board 
vacancies when they arise.

See Committee report on pages 73 to 74

Audit Committee
 – Monitors the quality and effectiveness  
of the external and internal auditors;
 – Reviews and monitors the integrity of 

the financial statements and any formal 
announcements relating to financial 
performance;

 – Assists the Board with the development 
and execution of a risk management 
strategy, risk policies and current and 
emerging risk exposures, including the 
maintenance of the Group’s risk register; 
and

 – Monitors the adequacy and effectiveness 
of the Group’s internal financial controls 
and internal control and risk management 
systems.

See Committee report on pages 75 to 80

Remuneration Committee 
 – Determines the policy for the Group 
on executive remuneration and sets 
remuneration for the Chair, the Executive 
Directors and senior management;
 – Reviews workforce remuneration and 
related policies and the alignment of 
incentives and rewards with culture, 
and taking these into account when 
setting the policy for Executive Director 
remuneration; 

 – Reviews the design of all share incentive 
plans for approval by the Board and/or 
shareholders; and

 – Determines and monitors any share 

ownership requirements for the Executive 
Directors and senior management 
including post-employment requirements.

See Committee report on pages 81 to 90

Time commitment 
As part of the recruitment process the expected time 
commitment is discussed with both Non-Executive Directors 
and Executive Directors. The time commitments of the new 
CEO were evaluated and the Board was satisfied that he has 
sufficient time for his role. Subsequent external appointments 
for all Directors would not be undertaken without prior approval 
of the Board.

At the time of writing, where Directors have external 
appointments, the Board is satisfied that they do not impact 
on the time they need to devote to the Group. 

Directors’ attendance
The Board held ten meetings during the 2021 financial year and 
attendance at the meetings was as follows:

71

Total no. of meetings

David Knight

Steve Carson*

Chris Muir

Alan Smith

Ron McMillan

George Adams

Angela Luger

PLC

Audit 
Committee

Remuneration 
Committee

Nomination 
Committee

10

10

6

10

10

10

10

10

3

–

–

–

–

3

3

3

5

–

–

–

5

5

5

5

8

–

–

–

7

7

7

8

*  Appointed as a Director on 6 January 2021.

Further meetings of the Board and Audit, Remuneration and 
Nomination Committees have also been held since the  
year end. 

Strategic ReportCorporate GovernanceFinancial StatementsCorporate governance statement continued

Composition, succession and evaluation
Composition of the Board
The Board currently comprises of the Non-Executive Chair, 
two Executive Directors and three independent Non-
Executive Directors. During the period of induction of the 
Group’s new CEO, the Board temporarily included both the 
outgoing CEO and his successor.

Board gender diversity

  Male (83%)

  Female (17%)

The Board’s composition is compliant with the 2018 Corporate 
Governance Code.

The 2018 UK Corporate Governance Code recommends 
that at least half of the Board, excluding the Chair, should 
be Non-Executive Directors whom the Board considers to 
be independent. The Group has met this requirement and 
Ron McMillan (Senior Independent Director), appointed 
22 October 2014, George Adams, appointed 9 July 2015, and 
Angela Luger, appointed 16 May 2019, are all considered by 
the Group to meet the definition of an independent Director. 
Each of them is considered by the Board to be independent 
in character and judgement and free from relationships or 
circumstances which may affect, or could appear to affect, 
their judgement. Independence is determined by ensuring 
that the Non-Executive Directors do not have any material 
business relationships or arrangements (apart from their fees 
for acting as Non-Executive Directors) with the Group or its 
Directors which in the opinion of the Board could affect their 
independent judgement.

All Directors have service agreements or letters of 
appointment in place and the details of the terms of these  
are set out in the Directors’ Remuneration report on pages 94 
to 95.

72

The Chair has met with each of the Non-Executive Directors 
during the year on a one-to-one basis, without the Executive 
Directors being present, to discuss matters relating to  
the Board, its balance and the monitoring powers of the 
Executive Directors. 

Board development
The Chair believes the current Board and its Committees have 
an appropriate balance of skills and experience to enable them 
to discharge their responsibilities effectively. The development 
of the Group’s Directors is regularly reviewed and the Chair 
discusses training requirements with each Director.

Operating Board gender diversity

  Male (75%)

  Female (25%)

Operating Board and senior management team 
gender diversity 

  Male (69%)

  Female (31%)

All employees gender diversity

  Male (69%)

  Female (31%)

1
2
0
2
t
r
o
p
e
R

l

a
u
n
n
A

c
l
p
p
u
o
r
G
S
c
S

 
 
 
 
 
Nomination Committee report
Dear Shareholder,

I am pleased to present the 2021 report of the Nomination 
Committee.

The primary purpose of the Committee is to lead the process 
for Board appointments, ensure plans are in place for orderly 
succession for both the Board and senior management and 
oversee the development of a diverse pipeline for succession.

The responsibilities of the Committee, as delegated by the 
Board, are set out in the terms of reference which are published 
on the Group’s corporate website, which in summary include:
 – Reviewing the structure, size and composition of the Board, 
including the balance of Executive and Non-Executive 
Directors;

 – Putting in place plans for the orderly succession of 

appointments to the Board and to senior management 
positions;

 – Overseeing the development of a diverse pipeline for 

succession, having regard to diversity of gender, social  
and ethnic backgrounds, cognitive and personal strengths;

 – Identifying and nominating candidates for the approval  
of the Board, to fill Board vacancies when they arise; and

 – Formally and rigorously reviewing and evaluating the 
performance of the Board, each Board Committee,  
the Chair of the Board and each individual Director.

Member and meetings attended in 2021

Member 
since

Meetings 
attended

Committee activities in 2021
Chief Executive Officer appointment
As announced in January 2021, David Knight notified the 
Board of his intention to retire as Group CEO and agreed not to 
retire before the end of July 2021. Shortly after this, Sam Allen 
Associates Limited were appointed to assist with identifying 
suitable candidates for the role. The Board supports the 
provisions of the Voluntary Code of Conduct for Executive 
Search Firms and only engages executive search firms who  
are signatories to this code. Sam Allen Associates Limited has 
no other connection with the Group or individual Directors.

A comprehensive role specification was agreed which was 
aligned to the desired Board composition with reference to 
diversity and the Board skills matrix. A longlist of potential 
candidates was then produced and three candidates were 
shortlisted and interviewed by the Board members.

Taking into account feedback from the Board members, the 
role specification and the key skills, knowledge and experience 
of the shortlisted candidates, the Committee recommended 
the appointment of Steve Carson as the new Chief Executive 
Officer. This recommendation was approved by the Board, 
noting Steve’s deep knowledge and experience in retail and 
leadership after an extensive career across a number of 
national household brands, and his key expertise in managing 
and optimising all areas of a showroom network, leading 
national teams and driving digital innovation.

Alan Smith (Chair)

Ron McMillan 

George Adams

Angela Luger

2014

2014

2015

2019

7

7

7

8

Board effectiveness evaluation
In 2019, the Board took part in an externally facilitated 
evaluation by Fiseq Limited. In accordance with the 2018 
UK Corporate Governance Code, the Group will continue to 
undertake annual evaluations and at least once every three 
years with an external consultant facilitating the evaluation.  
An external evaluation will be undertaken during 2022.

The Executive Directors also attend Committee meetings 
by invitation. The Committee is supported by the Company 
Secretary.

There are two scheduled Committee meetings annually, with 
additional meetings or calls held on an as required basis. During 
the year, there were an additional six Committee meetings and 
a number of informal calls and discussions, largely reflective of 
the recruitment process for the new Chief Executive Officer. 
Only two of the meetings were able to be held in person.

As part of the Board’s performance evaluation conducted 
during the year, the Committee also reviewed its own 
performance. The review concluded that the Committee 
continues to operate effectively.

The 2021 evaluation of the performance of the Board, its 
Committees, the Chair and the individual Directors was 
facilitated by the Group’s Internal Audit team. The evaluation 
included a review of the time commitment required by each 
of the Company’s Non-Executive Directors and the size, 
structure and composition of the Board and its Committees.

The evaluation process took place in the third quarter of 
the year. Each of the Directors and the Company Secretary 
completed a questionnaire, on an anonymised basis, which was 
prepared to elicit their views on all aspects of the effectiveness 
of the Board and its Committees, including its composition, 
diversity and how effectively members work together to 
achieve objectives. 

The key areas of focus were: 
 – Purpose and strategy;
 – Setting and monitoring objectives;
 – Knowledge and skills; and
 – Stakeholder engagement.

The results of the evaluation were assessed by the full Board. 
The evaluation confirmed that the Board and its Committees 
have a good balance of knowledge and experience and 
did not identify any concerns with performance, although 
opportunities were identified for improvement, including: 
 – Shaping a purpose-driven culture;
 – Board skill gap analysis and succession planning;
 – Improving diversity; and 
 – Increased stakeholder interaction.

73

Strategic ReportCorporate GovernanceFinancial StatementsCorporate governance statement continued

Composition, succession and evaluation continued 
Nomination Committee report continued
Succession planning
During the year, the Committee considered the succession 
arrangements for the Board and the Operating Board, 
comprising the operational directors below Board level.  
We reviewed immediate, mid-term and long-term succession 
planning and arrangements, and the Board skills matrix. 

Employment positions throughout the Company are filled 
with the candidates who possess the most appropriate skills 
and competencies relevant for the particular job role. We have 
a policy to treat all employees fairly and equally regardless 
of gender, sexual orientation, marital status, race, colour, 
nationality, religion, ethnic or national origin, age, disability  
or union membership status. 

This process informs the Company’s framework for the  
skills we wish to focus on when preparing role specifications 
and evaluating potential new candidates and developing  
a diverse pipeline. 

Re-election of Directors
Based on the performance review by the Nomination 
Committee of the size, structure and composition of the Board 
with regard to the experience and skills represented on it, the 
Nomination Committee has recommended that each of the 
Directors be re-elected to the Board, as they each continue 
to be effective members of the Board and demonstrate 
commitment to their roles.

Diversity
The Committee recognises the need to monitor and review 
diversity of gender, social and ethnic backgrounds and 
cognitive and personal strengths in relation to how the Group  
is led and represented. 

Appointments to the Board, as with other positions within 
the Group, will always be made on merit and objective criteria. 
Executive external resourcing and strong internal succession 
plans play a critical role in enabling and accelerating our ability 
to improve our diversity. 

Our people are our greatest asset and key to our success, 
incorporating their views into Board decision making is 
essential to achieving our business objectives and creating  
a workplace which treats everyone equally. Across the  
business we will continue to work to create a more diverse  
and inclusive culture.

Alan Smith
Chair of the Nomination Committee
4 October 2021

74

1
2
0
2
t
r
o
p
e
R

l

a
u
n
n
A

c
l
p
p
u
o
r
G
S
c
S

 
 
 
 
 
Audit Committee report

 “The Audit Committee 
is integral to the Group’s 
governance framework.”

75

The Audit Committee monitors risks and risk 
mitigation. It advises the Board on financial reporting, 
viability and going concern and whether the Annual 
Report provides shareholders with the information 
necessary to assess the Group’s performance. 

Strategic ReportCorporate GovernanceFinancial StatementsAudit Committee report continued

Dear Shareholder,

Member and meetings attended in 2021

Member since

Meetings attended

The Audit Committee is integral to the Group’s governance 
framework and continues to keep its activities under review to 
reflect regulatory developments and best practice. The Audit 
Committee advises the Board on financial reporting, viability  
and going concern and whether the Annual Report provides  
the shareholders with the information necessary to assess  
the Group’s performance. It also monitors risks, risk mitigation 
and internal control.

In so doing, the Committee exercises oversight of the Group’s 
financial policies and reporting, monitors the integrity of the 
financial statements and reviews and considers significant 
financial and accounting estimates and judgements. 
The Committee satisfies itself that the disclosures in the 
financial statements about these estimates and judgements 
are appropriate and obtains from the external auditor an 
independent view of the key disclosure issues and risks.

Ron McMillan (Chairman)

George Adams

Angela Luger

2014

2015

2019

3

3

3

Going forward, I shall ensure that the Committee continues to 
acknowledge and embrace its role of protecting the interests 
of shareholders in regards to the integrity of published financial 
information and the effectiveness of audit. I am available to 
speak with shareholders at any time and shall be available at the 
Annual General Meeting in November to answer any questions 
you may have on this report. I would like to thank my colleagues 
on the Committee for their help and support during the year.

The Audit Committee 
met three times during 
the year. Details of the 
Committee members’ 
attendance are noted 
above.

Ron McMillan
Chair of the Audit Committee
4 October 2021

Whilst risk management is a Board responsibility, the Committee 
has continued to work closely with the Board and Group 
management to ensure that all significant risks, including 
those which have arisen from COVID-19, are considered on an 
ongoing basis and that all communications with shareholders 
are properly considered. In relation to risks and controls, the 
Committee ensures that these have been identified and that 
appropriate responsibilities and accountabilities have been set.

A key responsibility of the Committee is to review the scope  
of work undertaken by the internal and external auditors and  
to consider their effectiveness.

Committee composition
The Committee comprises three members, all of whom 
are independent Non-Executive Directors. Two members 
constitute a quorum and the Committee must include one 
financially qualified member with recent and relevant financial 
experience. The Committee Chair fulfils this requirement.  
All members are expected to have an understanding of 
financial reporting, the Group’s internal control environment, 
relevant corporate legislation, the roles and functions of 
internal audit and external audit and the regulatory framework 
of the business. 

During the year, the Committee again oversaw the process 
used by the Board to assess the viability of the Group, the stress 
testing of key trading assumptions and the preparation of  
the Viability statement which is set out on page 60 of the 
Strategic Report. 

76

The Committee has considered the narrative in the Strategic 
Report and whether the 2021 Annual Report is fair, balanced 
and understandable and whether it provides the necessary 
information to shareholders to assess the Group’s performance, 
business model and strategy. The Committee considered 
management’s assessment of items included in the financial 
statements and the prominence given to them. The 
Committee, and subsequently the Board, were satisfied that, 
taken as a whole, the 2021 Annual Report and Accounts is fair, 
balanced and understandable.

The Committee reviewed, on behalf of the Board, the Group’s 
compliance with the Modern Slavery Act and its policies in 
relation to money laundering and anti-bribery. The Committee 
has also given consideration to the development of climate-
related reporting to ensure that the Group is ready to report in 
line with the Task Force on Climate-related Financial Disclosures 
(TCFD) requirements in the next financial year. The outcome of 
the consultation on the government proposals to restore trust 
in audit and corporate governance has recently been published 
and the Committee will monitor the progress of the proposals 
over the coming months and years.

1
2
0
2
t
r
o
p
e
R

l

a
u
n
n
A

c
l
p
p
u
o
r
G
S
c
S

The members of the Committee during the year were 
Ron McMillan, George Adams and Angela Luger. Details 
of Committee meetings and attendance are set out in the 
Corporate governance statement on page 71. The timing  
of Committee meetings is set to accommodate the dates  
of releases of financial information and the approval of the 
scope of and outputs from work programmes executed  
by the internal and external auditors. The biographies of the 
members of the Committee can be found on pages 62 to 63 
and reflect the significant experience that the Committee 
members have of working in or with companies in the retail  
and consumer goods sectors.

Although not members of the Committee, Alan Smith,  
as Group Chairman, Steve Carson, as CEO, and Chris Muir,  
as CFO, attend meetings, together with representatives  
from the internal audit function and the external auditors. 
David Knight, who retired as CEO during the year, also attended 
all three of the meetings.

In addition to scheduled meetings, the Committee Chairman 
met virtually with the Head of Audit, Risk & Compliance,  
the external auditors and the CFO during the year, and the 
Head of Audit, Risk & Compliance and the external auditors are 
provided with the opportunity to raise any matters of concern 
that they may have in the absence of the Executive Directors 
whether at the Committee meetings, or more informally, 
outside of them.

The Committee critically evaluates its own performance on an 
annual basis and considers where improvements can be made.

 
 
 
 
 
Board reporting
The Committee provides an update of matters discussed  
to the Board and the minutes of Audit Committee meetings 
are circulated to the Board.

Responsibilities
The responsibilities of the Committee, as delegated by the 
Board, are set out in the terms of reference which are published 
on the Group’s corporate website. They include the following: 
 – Reviewing the integrity of the financial statements and 
other price sensitive financial releases of the Group and 
the significant financial judgements and estimates related 
thereto;

 – Monitoring the quality, effectiveness and independence  

of the external auditors;

Activities
In discharging its oversight of the matters referred to above 
and in the introductory letter to this report, the Committee 
was assisted by management and both the internal and 
external auditors. 

The recurring work of the Committee comprised:
 – Review of the Annual Report and financial statements  

of the Group;

 – Review and approval of the statements to be included in  
the Group’s Annual Report concerning internal controls  
and risk management;

 – Review of the Interim Results report and non-statutory 
financial statements of the Group for the half year;
 – Consideration of the significant areas of accounting 

 – Monitoring the independence and activities of the Internal 

estimation or judgement;

Audit function;

 – Consideration of the principal risks included in the  

 – Assisting the Board with the development and execution  
of a risk management strategy, risk policies and current  
risk exposures, including the maintenance of the Group’s 
risk register; 

 – Keeping under review the adequacy and effectiveness of 
the Group’s internal financial controls and internal control 
and risk management and compliance system; and
 – Making recommendations to the Board in relation to the 
appointment of the external auditors and their fees.

Annual Report;

 – Consideration of going concern and viability issues and  

the related disclosures; 

 – Approval of the external auditors’ terms of reference,  

audit plan and fees; and

 – Approval of the Internal Audit Plan.

The meetings at which the above and certain other matters 
were discussed were as follows:

September 2020 

March 2021

July 2021

77

Review of Interim Results

Review of Annual Report; approval of Audit Committee report, consideration of significant areas of 

accounting estimation or judgement and whether the Annual Report is fair, balance and understandable

Review of management representations

Review and approval of Internal Audit Plan, reports and updates

Approval of the external audit strategy and fees

Update on the provision of any non-audit services and fees provided by the external auditors

Effectiveness of the Internal Audit function

Effectiveness of the external audit 

Risk management update and review of related disclosures, including warranty risk and COVID-19

Review of internal control processes and related disclosures

Review of disaster recovery practices

Review of Group IT systems 

Update on the Group Data Protection compliance including policy review 

Reviewed and agreed the structure and annual plan for compliance function 

Effectiveness of procedures for detecting fraud

Update on Modern Slavery matters

Consideration of the 2018 UK Corporate Governance Code and disclosure regulations

Year-end final review of related party transactions

Accounting policies and disclosures in relation to:

–  IFRS 16

–  Corporation tax and VAT

–  Supplier rebates

–  Stock and related provisions

–  Impairment assessment for loss making stores

–  Dilapidations

Going concern and viability issues and disclosures, including the impact of COVID-19

Considered TCFD reporting requirements

Strategic ReportCorporate GovernanceFinancial StatementsAudit Committee report continued

Significant issues and judgements relating to the financial statements
The Committee monitors the integrity of the annual and interim reports, including a review of the key accounting issues, areas of judgement and related 
disclosures contained in them.

The Committee reviewed papers prepared by management setting out the basis for the assumptions used in relation to accounting judgements and these 
reports are then discussed and challenged by the Committee. The Committee also considered a paper prepared by the external auditor, which included 
significant reporting and accounting matters, and their views were taken into account. 

Area of focus

Committees response

Impairment
Management reviews the carrying amount of property, plant and equipment 
and right-of-use assets every year to determine if there are any indications of 
impairment. The estimate of the recoverable amount is based on value in use 
calculations which requires management to estimate future cash flows and an 
appropriate discount rate. The prior year impairment assessment is also taken 
into consideration and where it is identified that the impairment has reduced,  
a reversal of the impairment is recorded. 

As a result of the COVID-19 pandemic, all showrooms have experienced 
periods of closure during the year and uncertainty remains over the rate and 
extent of recovery. The impact of COVID-19 has triggered the requirement  
for an impairment assessment and as a result all showrooms have been tested 
for impairment.

An impairment review was carried out using the assumptions set out in 
note 2 to the financial statements. As a result of this review an impairment 
reversal of £4,242,000 has been recognised. The sensitivities of the 
assumptions on this amount are also set out in note 5 to the financial 
statements.

IFRS 16 discount rate
In calculating the present value of lease payments, the Group’s policy is to 
use its incremental borrowing rate. However, currently, the Group has no 
borrowings. It, therefore, uses an approximation based on UK government gilt 
rates of an appropriate duration, adjusted by an indicative credit premium. 

The Committee discussed with management and the external auditors the 
validity of cash flow projections and the significant financial assumptions used, 
including the selection of appropriate discount and growth rates used over 
the remaining lease period. The Committee satisfied itself that the principles 
and judgements applied were appropriate as well as the presentation of the 
impairment reversal within the financial statements.

The Committee discussed with management and the external auditors how 
an approximate rate had been derived. The Committee considers that the 
judgements made are appropriate to the Group’s particular circumstances.

78

Warranty risk
The Group has continued to monitor the FCA’s proposal to enforce statistical 
reporting of this type of insurance product, and the risk that the product may 
become regulated by changes to future legislation.

The Committee has continued to discuss the risk to warranty sales, and has 
reviewed the changes made to the Group’s warranty sales stream during the 
year. The Committee believes the changes are appropriate and will continue 
to monitor any further developments in this area.

During the year, the Group implemented changes to its warranty product, 
which is now sold as part of a complete ‘Premium Sofa Guard’ care package, 
minimising the impact on sales and profit that any changes may make. 

Supplier rebates
The Group receives volume rebates from suppliers which are pre-negotiated 
and split between suppliers with rebate ‘hurdle’ rates dependent on spend and 
those that have a flat rate. Where rebate arrangements were not coterminous 
with the year end, judgements were required but the amounts involved were 
not material. 

Stock provisions
The Group’s policy in relation to stock provisioning is to provide for obsolete, 
slow moving and defective stock. 

Dilapidation provision
The Group’s policy is to ensure a suitable dilapidations provision is in place to 
utilise to cover costs when a site is exited at the end of a lease. Historical data is 
used to estimate future liabilities; therefore, a degree of judgement is required.

The Committee gained an understanding of these arrangements, discussed 
them with management and the external auditors and satisfied itself with the 
controls that are in place to ensure that amounts received and receivable from 
suppliers are properly accounted for on a monthly basis and that the related 
judgements are limited.

The Committee has discussed with management and the external auditors 
how the policy has been applied in practice so as to ensure that stock is held 
at the most appropriate estimate of net realisable value. The Committee 
satisfied itself that stock was not materially misstated.

The Committee has reviewed management’s dilapidations calculation and 
assumptions, and satisfied itself that an appropriate provision is in place.

COVID-19
The Group has continued to monitor the impact of the COVID-19 pandemic 
on all aspects of the business.

The Committee discussed with management the uncertainties and impact of 
COVID-19 and considered various sensitivity scenarios and cash flow models 
to satisfy itself that the Group was as well positioned as it could be.

Climate change and risk reporting
External consultants will be helping the Group to set climate change targets 
and carry out a climate change risk assessment. Metrics will be agreed upon 
and their measurement and progress monitored. 

The Board and the Committee are aware of the increased focus from 
investors on climate change risk and we are committed to report against the 
mandatory recommendations of the Task Force on Climate-related Financial 
Disclosures by 2022.

1
2
0
2
t
r
o
p
e
R

l

a
u
n
n
A

c
l
p
p
u
o
r
G
S
c
S

 
 
 
 
 
Going concern
Going concern matters have been a focus of attention by 
management, the Board and the Audit Committee and 
the external auditors since the beginning of the COVID-19 
pandemic. Significant time and energy has been applied 
to developing financial models and continually assessing 
forecasts, sensitivities and mitigating actions available to 
management. The Board and the Committee have discussed 
going concern issues on a number of occasions and have 
satisfied themselves that the underlying assumptions 
continue to be reasonable and support the conclusion that 
the Group has adequate resources to continue to operate 
for a period of at least 12 months from the date on which the 
financial statements are signed. Accordingly, they continue 
to adopt the going concern basis in preparing the financial 
statements (see ‘Basis of preparation’ within note 2 to the 
financial statements on page 110).

Viability statement
The Board is required to consider whether the Group can 
continue to operate and meet its liabilities, taking into 
account its current position and principal risks in the longer 
term, having considered severe but plausible risks and 
risk combinations. The Committee reviewed the process 
undertaken by management and considered management’s 
scenario modelling and the stress testing of these models. 
The Committee reviewed and challenged the assumptions 
used and concluded that the Board is able to make the Viability 
statement on page 60 of the Strategic Report.

Fair, balanced and understandable
The Committee considered whether the 2021 Annual Report 
is fair, balanced and understandable and whether it provides 
the necessary information to shareholders to assess the 
Group’s performance, business model and strategy. Also 
considered was management’s assessment of items included 
in the financial statements and the prominence given to them. 
The Committee and subsequently the Board were satisfied 
that, taken as a whole, the 2021 Annual Report and Accounts  
is fair, balanced and understandable. 

Risk management and internal control
The Board has overall responsibility for ensuring that the Group 
maintains a sound system of internal control. There are inherent 
limitations in any system of internal control and no system can 
provide absolute assurance against material misstatements, 
loss or failure. Equally, no system can guarantee elimination 
of the risk of failure to meet the objectives of the business. 
Against that background, the Committee has helped the Board 
develop and maintain an approach to risk management which 
incorporates risk appetite, the framework within which risk is 
managed and the responsibilities and procedures pertaining  
to the application of the policy.

The Group is proactive in ensuring that corporate and 
operational risks are identified and managed. A corporate  
risk register is maintained which details:

1.  The risks and the impact they may have;
2.  Actions to mitigate risks;
3.  Risk scores to highlight the implications of occurrence;
4.  Ownership of risks; and
5.  Target dates for actions to mitigate risks.

A description of the principal risks is set out on pages 50 to 59.

The Board has confirmed that it has carried out a robust 
assessment of the principal risks facing the Group, including 
those which threaten its business model, future performance, 
solvency or liquidity.

The Board considers that the processes undertaken by 
the Committee are appropriately robust and effective and 
in compliance with the guidelines issued by the Financial 
Reporting Council (FRC). During the year, the Board has not 
been advised by the Committee nor has it identified itself,  
any failings, frauds or weaknesses in internal control which  
it has determined to be material in the context of the  
financial statements.

The Committee continues to believe that appropriate controls 
are in place throughout the Group, and that the Group has 
a well-defined organisational structure with clear lines of 
responsibility and a comprehensive financial reporting system. 
The Committee also believes that the Company complies with 
the FRC guidance on risk management, internal control and 
related financial business reporting.

Internal Audit
The Head of Audit, Risk & Compliance has a direct reporting line 
to the Committee and attends every Committee meeting to 
present internal audit and risk management reports. During the 
financial year, Internal Audit has undertaken a programme of 
work which was discussed and agreed with both management 
and the Committee and which was designed to address both 
risk management and areas of potential financial loss. Despite 
a number of lockdown periods during the year, all of the agreed 
work has been performed and the Committee is comfortable 
that all key areas of risk have been covered. Internal Audit has 
also established procedures within the business to ensure 
that new risks are identified, evaluated and managed and that 
necessary changes are made to the risk register.

During the year, the Committee reviewed reports from Internal 
Audit in relation to:
 – Fraud risk and related internal controls; 
 – Anti-money laundering; 
 – Anti-bribery and corporate crime;
 – Compliance with the Modern Slavery Act;
 – Compliance with data protection; 
 – Compliance assessments of the Group’s operating 

processes in relation to retail outlets and distribution 
centres;

 – Risk management, including the effectiveness of mitigating 
actions in relation to the Group’s principal risks, including  
IT systems, business continuity and cyber-risk;

 – E-commerce processes; 
 – Compliance processes; 
 – Payroll processes;
 – Cash and banking processes;
 – Marketing processes;
 – Processes within the business performance  

reporting team;

 – Central customer experience processes;
 – Management accounts; 
 – Purchase ledger and accounts payable processes; 
 – Human Resources;
 – Training team processes;
 – Information technology processes; and
 – Health and safety including response to COVID-19. 

In relation to each of the above, Internal Audit made 
recommendations for improvement, the vast majority of which 
were agreed by management and either have been or are being 
implemented.

The Committee has evaluated the performance of Internal 
Audit during the year and concluded it is a function which has a 
strategic plan developed in collaboration with the Committee, 
and which provides constructive challenge and demonstrates 
a realistic and commercial view of the business.

79

Strategic ReportCorporate GovernanceFinancial StatementsAudit Committee report continued

External auditors
Following a tender process in 2019, PricewaterhouseCoopers 
LLP (PwC) were re-appointed by shareholders. As reported last 
year, the audit partner from the 2020/21 audit onwards is Andy 
Ward, who is a partner in PwC’s Leeds office. PwC have been 
the Group’s auditors for 11 years. 

The Committee has established policies in relation to the 
provision of non-audit services by the auditors. The external 
auditors are not permitted to perform any work that they 
may be later required to audit or which might affect their 
objectivity and independence or create a conflict of interest. 
Furthermore, the external auditors may not perform any work 
prohibited by the Ethical Standards published by the FRC. 

All fees for non-audit work require pre-authorisation by the 
Chief Financial Officer and the Audit Committee, and non-
audit fees paid to the auditors are not permitted to exceed 
70% of average audit fees over a three-year period. During 
the year we paid PwC £20,000 for their review of the interim 
financial statements (considered to be a non-audit service).  
No other non-audit services were provided by the external 
auditor. Fees paid to PwC for audit work were £207,000.

In accordance with International Standards on Auditing  
(UK & Ireland) 260 and Ethical Statement 1 issued by the 
Accounting Practices Board, and as a matter of best practice, 
the external auditors have confirmed their independence  
as auditors of the Group.

The Committee is responsible for assessing the effectiveness 
of the external audit process and does so in a number of ways:
(1)  The Committee, together with the CFO and Financial 
Controller, met with the senior members of PwC, prior 
to both the interim review and year end audit, as they 
presented their plan for discussion;

(2)  The Committee, together with the CFO and Financial 

Controller and other members of the Board, met with PwC 
to assess the execution of the review/audit and reporting  
of their findings; and

(3)  The Committee considered the matters set out in PwC’s 
2020 Transparency Report dealing with audit quality 
monitoring and remediation. It considered the results of 
internal and external engagement reviews and the steps 
taken by PwC to address findings. Within PwC, audit quality 
is monitored at a global level and at an engagement level, 
with all engagement partners being reviewed at least once 
in a three year cycle.

In reviewing PwC’s 2020 Transparency Report, the Committee 
noted the firm’s commitment to quality and risk management. 
The Committee also discussed with PwC the results of the 
FRC Audit Quality Inspection of the UK firm. During PwC’s 
attendance at Committee meetings, the Committee also  
met privately with the auditors and, as Chair of the Committee, 
I had regular dialogue with the audit partner.

The Committee considered in detail PwC’s audit planning 
documentation and satisfied itself that the audit work to 
be carried out by PwC covered all significant aspects of the 
Annual Report and Accounts and, therefore, did not feel it 
was necessary to ask PwC to look at any additional areas 
specifically. PwC’s report to the Audit Committee at the 
conclusion of the audit confirmed that the audit had been 
carried out in accordance with the planning documentation 
and the Audit Committee considered the findings of PwC  
as reflected in their audit opinion and their year end report  
to the Board. PwC’s audit opinion set out the key matters  
that, in their opinion were of most significance in this audit. 
These were consistent with the key matters considered and 
agreed with the Audit Committee when the audit was planned. 
PwC’s report describes how these matters were addressed  
in the audit and the scope and nature of their work reflects  
the thoroughness of their approach and the degree of 
scepticism applied.

The Committee reviews the performance of PwC annually  
with feedback from management, the Group’s finance team, 
the Internal Audit function and the Board. The review takes into 
consideration their understanding of the Group and the retail 
sector, the extent of challenge to management on areas which 
required judgement, the quality of audit work, reporting and 
advice given, and the overall audit process. The conclusions 
reached were that PwC has continued to perform the audit 
in a professional and efficient manner with the necessary 
objectivity and challenge to demonstrate independence  
and it is, therefore, the Committee’s recommendation to 
the Board that PwC be re-appointed auditors at the Annual 
General Meeting on 26 November. The Board has no present 
plans to consider an audit tender process.

The Committee reviewed the reports prepared by PwC on key 
audit findings as well as the recommendations made by PwC to 
improve processes and controls together with managements’ 
responses to those recommendations. PwC did not highlight 
any material internal control weaknesses and management has 
committed to making appropriate changes in controls in the 
areas highlighted by PwC. 

Ron McMillan
Chair of the Audit Committee
4 October 2021

80

1
2
0
2
t
r
o
p
e
R

l

a
u
n
n
A

c
l
p
p
u
o
r
G
S
c
S

 
 
 
 
 
Directors’ Remuneration report

 “I’d like to thank our 
shareholders for their 
thoughtful input.”

81

As a small company we try to keep things simple,  
with clear performance linkages and line of sight  
from showroom to boardroom and vice versa.

Strategic ReportCorporate GovernanceFinancial StatementsDirectors’ Remuneration report continued

Dear Shareholder,

The ScS Group plc Remuneration Committee has had a busy year in FY21, in part due to the pandemic. At the beginning of the year (August 2020) we 
considered how to apply the Remuneration Policy at a time of considerable uncertainty and deliberated on fair remuneration for the Executive Directors, 
with an incoming CEO following the retirement of David Knight, and a wider role for the CFO. These considerations were in addition to an ever wider remit  
for the Committee in terms of general workforce remuneration and wellbeing. 

As a small Group, and member of the FTSE Fledgling Index, we try to keep things simple and maintain clear performance linkages and line of sight from 
showroom to boardroom and vice versa. Approximately 82% of our colleagues are eligible for either a sales commission or bonus and these are based 
broadly on the same metrics of sales and profit as the Executive Directors. 

Our July year end has meant that we have been effectively five months ahead of many of the larger FTSE companies in having to consider the impact of the 
COVID-19 pandemic on remuneration and the Investment Association updated guidance relating to these matters which was released in November 2020,  
a quarter of the way through our new financial year. As a consequence, we have been required to consider our approach before many other companies.  
In the previous financial year ended 25 July 2020, no executive bonus was paid, nor were there any vesting of LTIP arrangements as the scheme vesting  
fell short of its target. The Group looked after all furloughed colleagues by topping up their pay to 100% including average sales commission during all  
periods of lockdown. 

Steve Carson joined the business on 6 January 2021, and to ensure a smooth transition, David Knight remained actively in the role of CEO until 30 April 2021. 
At this point in time, Steve took on responsibility for the business, with David remaining to provide advice and support. For the purposes of reporting,  
David Knight’s remuneration has been utilised for the CEO comparatives used throughout the report as it provides a full year of compensation for comparison.

With this in mind, I reached out to our largest 20 shareholders to canvas their views on what we should do in these extraordinary times; 12 shareholders 
shared their views, accounting for over 63% of total voting rights during August to early October, and we covered:
1.  Considerations for the FY21 bonus scheme, including government money paid, such as furlough, and the relief of taxes, such as rates relief;
2.  Whether we should make any changes to long-term incentive plans ‘in flight’ to reflect the changed circumstances;
3.  Whether we should move from a LTIP arrangement to a restricted share scheme; and
4.  Any changes given that our CEO, David Knight, was retiring after 33 years of service.

I would like to thank our shareholders for their thoughtful input which I believe the Remuneration Committee has reflected in its decisions in the past year. 

FY21 incentives 
Bonuses that reflect performance are a key part of the remuneration package. Shareholder feedback was clear on the contentious issues of government 
support and on dividend reinstatement. Almost unanimously shareholders viewed that direct government money such as furlough should be excluded  
from any bonus targets, but that relief from payments that would otherwise be paid, such as rates, should be included. Most shareholders also felt that  
the payment of a modest bonus should be independent of whether the dividend be reinstated and that to tie the two things together would be to confuse 
the separate decisions. 

82

The Remuneration Committee, therefore, set targets for the FY21 scheme where on-target bonus payments would be paid at a level where the dividend 
could be reinstated, with a minimum threshold significantly below this to reflect the general uncertainty. We then set hurdle levels above target with a 
wider stretch than usual, with the highest target level being above the FY19 profit level. These targets were set including rates relief but excluding furlough 
payments (notwithstanding, the Group repaid all FY21 furlough payments in May 2021). 

Despite the stores being closed for 17 weeks the Group has met the highest of the targets set, and therefore, the Remuneration Committee has granted a 
bonus payout of 140% salary to both David Knight and Chris Muir; Steve Carson’s 140% payout is pro-rated for the seven months since he joined the Group. 

Long-term incentives
Shareholder feedback was again unanimous that there should be no changes to the performance targets set for the LTIP schemes already ‘in flight’,  
that is, those due to end this year and next. Shareholders also confirmed that furlough and other direct payments should be excluded, consistent with  
their guidance on the bonus scheme. The Remuneration Committee agrees with this approach. 

Shareholders did, however, regard a long-term incentive plan as important. Given the extreme level of uncertainty, they guided that the scheme should  
have a much wider span than before, with upper levels to be in excess of FY19 EPS. Shareholders were unanimously against a restrictive share scheme,  
and while there was some discussion around whether the targets should be TSR-based or not, most were in favour of continuing to keep the targets simple 
and understandable. The Remuneration Committee took these views into account in setting the targets for 2023. 

Despite the uncertainty and the various lockdowns, the Group performed strongly as stores re-opened. The LTIP targets for FY21 were met, and the LTIP  
will pay out at 89.3% level. 

Executive remuneration
Almost all shareholders consulted inputted on the importance of a smooth handover from the retiring CEO to the new CEO. There was unanimity that we 
should take our time to get the right person, that the package should be attractive for whoever that might be (we were mid-way in the process of selection), 
and that we should attend to the wider executive team at the same time. Shareholders were keen to see the direct remit of the incoming CEO reduced with 
the scope of the CFO role widened, with specific positive reference to Chris Muir taking on additional responsibilities for technology and distribution in the 
move towards omnichannel. Shareholders strongly approved of the Board’s desire for executive stability on the change of the CEO. The Remuneration 
Committee took advice from our remuneration consultants, Mercer Limited, to benchmark both the CEO role and a wider role for Chris Muir, CFO. 

Steve Carson has joined on a salary of £400,000, higher than the outgoing CEO but with a pension level of 5%, in line with the wider workforce. This salary 
level was in line with the benchmarking undertaken and below his previous salary. The Remuneration Committee raised Chris Muir’s salary from £240,000 to 
£320,000 to reflect both a current salary at below CFO benchmark and his wider role, while at the same time pension was reduced to the 5% wider workforce 
rate. We fully acknowledge that this increase is exceptional but it reflects both the input from shareholders and our desire to set appropriate benchmarked 
levels of remuneration. 

1
2
0
2
t
r
o
p
e
R

l

a
u
n
n
A

c
l
p
p
u
o
r
G
S
c
S

 
 
 
 
 
In keeping with rewards given to other very long serving members of the senior team on retirement; the Committee agreed to recognise David Knight’s 
exceptional contribution by awarding him £5,000 in holiday vouchers to mark his retirement.

Review of Remuneration Policy
We will be seeking approval for the Remuneration Policy at the AGM this year. We continue to be guided by a few simple principles:
 – to pay fairly for an individual’s role and responsibilities;
 – to reward for performance;
 – to focus on long-term value creation; and
 – to align executives with shareholders through share ownership.

We believe our Policy is fit for purpose and understood throughout the organisation, with alignment from shop floor to Board, and does not require major 
overhaul. We have reviewed our Policy with our remuneration consultants and also in light of the updated UK Corporate Governance Code. We have made  
an adjustment to remove any flexibility on pension arrangements for any future hires. We are aware that we have no deferral for the annual bonus above 
100% of salary and at this stage we do not intend to implement one but will review this over the year ahead. Finally, we are actively reviewing whether there 
are robust and strategically aligned ESG metrics that could be included in the bonus in the future.

I hope that you will support the new Policy and the Annual Report on Remuneration.

Colleague input
I am the Non-Executive Director responsible for consulting with and gaining the views of our wider colleagues in the business. In a normal year I would  
hold six discussion groups in person; however, due to the pandemic, I have held four by video conference this year. It is gratifying to get feedback that the 
Group has gone above and beyond in both ensuring colleagues are safe and well, and also well looked after in these times, with specific reference paid  
to the topping up of salaries and commissions for furloughed staff during lockdowns. 

Colleagues in these groups were positive about working at ScS, and the opportunities open to all, in a diverse workforce. I will be reinstating physical  
groups when possible and we will be gaining extra feedback on diversity and gender which will feedback into the Remuneration Committee agenda for  
the year ahead. 

Remuneration Committee agenda for FY22
The scope for the Remuneration Committee has been widened, reflecting the changes to the UK Corporate Governance Code, and we will be looking at  
a few specific areas in particular in the coming year, particularly since the appointment of a new People Director to our Operating Board. We will continue  
our work addressing diversity at ScS, both in terms of gender and ethnicity. We will also be beginning to look at how our remuneration principles apply across  
our workforce in a business that is pivoting from almost completely store-based to one operating in an omnichannel world. Finally, we will be considering 
whether there should be a role for ESG metrics in our incentive plans and will determine whether there are robust and strategically-aligned metrics that  
we could include. We will update shareholders on our progress in next year’s report.

Communication with shareholders
The Remuneration Committee has found the input from shareholders extremely valuable in deciding what to do in the uncertainty of the pandemic.  
I am available to speak with shareholders at any time and shall be available at the Annual General Meeting in November to answer any questions you may have  
on this report, and will continue to reach out proactively when faced with uncertainty. 

83

I would like to thank my colleagues on the Committee for their help and support over the last year. 

George Adams
Chair of the Remuneration Committee
4 October 2021

Strategic ReportCorporate GovernanceFinancial StatementsDirectors’ Remuneration report continued

Member and meetings attended in 2021

George Adams (Chairman)

Alan Smith

Ron McMillan

Angela Luger

Member since

Meetings attended

2015

2014

2014

2019

5

5

5

5

Remuneration principles
The key aims of the Remuneration Policy are to:
 – Attract, retain and motivate high-calibre senior management;
 – Focus senior management on the delivery of the Group’s business objectives;
 – Promote a strong and sustainable performance culture;
 – Incentivise profitable growth; and 
 – Align the interests of the Executive Directors and senior management with those of the shareholders. 

In promoting these objectives, the Committee’s aims are to implement the Remuneration Policy in a simple, transparent and understandable way, 
supporting the principles set out in Provision 40 of the 2018 UK Corporate Governance Code (‘the Code’):

Clarity

Simplicity

Risk

The Remuneration Policy is closely aligned to the business, purpose and strategy and has a clear link between performance  
and reward. 

The Policy has operated largely unchanged since IPO. 

Performance targets are set to ensure the delivery of sustainable profitable growth and appropriate safeguards are in place  
to ensure that overall outcomes are aligned with underlying business performance and the stakeholder experience. 

Predictability

Maximum limits for variable pay are set and disclosed. 

Proportionality

Remuneration levels are periodically benchmarked against other similar sized companies and actual rewards closely linked to the 
performance outcomes delivered. 

Alignment to culture

The incentive schemes are focused on our strategy of sustainable profitable growth and are designed to encourage behaviours 
that are consistent with ScS’ purpose, culture and values. 

84

1
2
0
2
t
r
o
p
e
R

l

a
u
n
n
A

c
l
p
p
u
o
r
G
S
c
S

 
 
 
 
 
Annual Remuneration report
Single figure table of total remuneration Executive Directors – audited
The audited table below shows the aggregate remuneration of the Directors of the Group during 2021 and 2020:

Steve Carson

2021

David Knight

2021

2020

Chris Muir

2021

2020

Salary1  
£

Benefits2 
£

Bonus 
£

LTIP3 
£

Pension4 
£

Total 
£

Total fixed 
remuneration 
£

Total variable 
remuneration 
£

227,692

11,718

326,667

–

11,384

577,461

250,794

326,667

306,000

306,000

286,667

240,000

24,444

20,827

19,035

19,035

428,400

588,733

61,200

1,408,777

391,644

1,017,133

–

–

61,200

388,027

388,027

–

401,334

461,752

29,335

1,198,123

–

–

48,000

307,035

335,037

307,035

863,086

–

1.  Salary increase for Chris Muir effective from 1 January 2021. Steve Carson’s appointment effective from 6 January 2021.
2.  Benefits of the Directors are discussed in detail below. The value for David Knight includes a one off benefit of £5,000 in holiday vouchers, gifted to him from the business, as a retirement 

gift marking his 33 years’ service. 

3.  Estimated value of the 2019 LTIP award, being the average of the closing mid-market share price in the three-month period ending 31 July 2021. 
4.  Steve Carson, David Knight and Chris Muir opt to receive part of their pension contributions as a cash allowance.

Elements of remuneration 
Salary
David Knight, CEO, retired from the Group on 31 July 2021; there was no change to his basic salary during the year. Steve Carson joined the Group as CEO 
on 6 January 2021 on a basic salary of £400,000. Whilst this basic salary is higher than that of David Knight it is reflective of the benchmarking that was 
undertaken prior to appointment and is lower than his previous basic earnings. The basic salary of Chris Muir, CFO, was also reviewed and increased to 
£320,000 from £240,000. 

When consulting with shareholders, they were keen to stress the importance of a smooth handover from the retiring CEO to the new CEO. In addition, 
shareholders were also keen to see the direct remit of the incoming CEO reduced with the scope of the CFO role widened, with specific positive references 
to Chris Muir taking on a wider remit. As such, a benchmarking exercise was undertaken to position the salaries for the incoming CEO and incumbent CFO 
with widened responsibilities and remit. The CFO’s increase is considered both to be exceptional and necessary by the Committee and it is anticipated that 
any further increases will be aligned to that of the wider workforce. 

85

The salaries of the senior management team were also considered by the Committee, where it was felt appropriate due to changes in roles and 
responsibilities, and a small number of moderate increases were awarded. Details of the average increase given to other employees is detailed on page 89.

The current basic salaries as at 4 October 2021 are:
 – Steve Carson: £400,000
 – Chris Muir: £320,000

Pension and other benefits – audited
Having reviewed our pension arrangements, Executive Directors are eligible to pension benefits equating to 5% of their basic salary, which are non-
contributory. This change aligns to the pension rate applicable to the wider workforce. David Knight, CEO, retained his legacy pension of 20% of basic salary 
during his final year with the Group and received £10,000 of pension benefits into his pension fund. The balance was paid as a cash allowance. 

Steve Carson, CEO, received £6,051 of pension benefits into his pensions fund and Chris Muir, CFO, received £8,335. The balance was paid as a cash allowance. 

Any new Executive Director appointments will have a pension contribution in line with that provided to the broader workforce. 

The Executive Directors received a car allowance which were as follows:
 – Steve Carson, CEO: £11,384
 – David Knight, CEO: £18,642
 – Chris Muir, CFO: £17,000

The Executive Directors are also provided with private medical insurance and life assurance that provides cover of up to four times taxable earnings. 

Strategic ReportCorporate GovernanceFinancial StatementsDirectors’ Remuneration report continued

Annual bonus
The Executive Directors were eligible to receive annual bonuses in 2021. The annual bonus is solely based on underlying EBITDA* performance, which is 
adjusted for exceptional items. A pre-bonus EBITDA of £51.9m was above the maximum target set for the year; as a result, 100% of the bonus was paid.  
The Committee considers that this fairly reflects the results for the year. The details of the targets and how the bonus was calculated are set out below:

Pre-bonus EBITDA

% maximum

Steve Carson

David Knight

Chris Muir

£39,100,000

£44,100,000

£46,500,000

£48,400,000

25%

£81,677

£107,100

£100,333

50%

£163,334

£214,200

£200,667

75%

£245,000

£321,300

£301,000

100%

£326,667

£428,400

£401,334

*  Underlying EBITDA is defined in the Alternative performance measures section in the appendices on pages 134 to 135.

For 2022, the maximum bonus opportunity is unchanged at 140% of base salary for both the CEO and CFO. The bonus is based on the achievement of 
stretching EBITDA targets. The Committee does not disclose the targets in advance as they are commercially sensitive. Retrospective disclosure of the 
EBITDA targets will be included in next year’s report. 

Long-term incentives
The LTIP granted on 15 October 2018, which vests in 2021, has exceeded the minimum performance conditions set (a minimum EPS of 28.9p) and will result 
in an award of 89.3%. The initial award provided vesting conditions on a straight-line basis between 25% and 100% based on an EPS in 2021 from 28.9p to 
37.0p. The underlying EPS as reported under IFRS 16 for the year is 41.3p, which would result in 100% award under the terms of the LTIP. The Remuneration 
Committee are, however, conscious that the award was granted before transition to IFRS 16, at a time when there were 40,009,109 shares in issue, and that 
the Group has benefited during the year from an effective tax rate lower than the statutory rate. As a consequence, the Remuneration Committee have 
recalculated EPS using the same accounting basis, number of shares and statutory tax rate as at the date of the award and based the vesting calculation  
on the adjusted EPS of 35.9p.

During the year, the Executive Directors were granted a Long-Term Incentive Plan award with a face value of 150% of salary each. The awards were made in 
the form of nil-cost options and were for 230,248 and 180,587 shares respectively for David Knight, CEO, and Chris Muir, CFO. The awards have a three-year 
vesting period, plus a two-year hold period. The average share price on the date of grant, 12 October 2020, was 200.0p. As disclosed in last year’s Annual 
Report, the following EPS targets were applied:

EPS figure (in 2023) 

Less than 18.3p

86

18.3p

Percentage of award that vests

Nil

25%

Greater than 18.3p but less than 31.0p

Straight-line basis between 25% and 100%

31.0p

100%

The Committee has engaged directly with a number of shareholders to discuss the current and future LTIP arrangements. No changes are intended for 
‘in-flight’ awards. As with the LTIP vesting this year, the 2020 and 2021 LTIP EPS targets were set before taking into account the impact of IFRS 16 or changes 
in effective tax rate. Whilst we have all the data we require with regards to property and vehicle leases, the final impact of IFRS 16 will not be known until we 
reach the relevant year. Furthermore specific differences between the effective and statutory tax rates would impact EPS, and can only be adjusted when 
they are known. The Committee, therefore, intends to adjust future EPS targets when these items have crystallised. The adjustment will purely be to reflect 
the technical changes created as a result of IFRS 16, and differences in the effective and statutory tax rate and are not an amendment to the agreed targets 
per se.

The Committee has agreed to award a Long-Term Incentive Plan in 2022. Steve Carson, CEO, and Chris Muir, CFO, will be awarded nil cost options subject  
to EPS targets being met. The awards have a three-year vesting period, plus a two-year holding period, and are subject to the following targets:

EPS figure (in 2024) 

Less than 19.0p

19.0p

Percentage of award that vests

Nil

25%

Greater than 19.0p but less than 33.2p

Straight-line basis between 25% and 100%

33.2p

100%

The Committee considers that the targets are stretching and will ensure that significant reward is only available for delivery of a strong performance. 

The Remuneration Committee determined that the 2022 grants would be maintained at the normal levels (150% of base salary for the Executive Directors). 
However, the Committee has full discretion, under the plan rules, to ensure that the final vesting outcomes are justified based on the performance of the 
Group, including consideration of any windfall gains.

All-employee share plans
The Group offers an all-employee UK Share Incentive Plan (SIP). All employees on completion of six months service become eligible to join. Under the SIP 
employees may elect to acquire up to £150 worth of shares in the Group every month or pay a maximum one-off lump sum of up to £1,800 in a tax year. 

The Executive Directors are eligible to participate in the SIP on the same basis as other employees.

1
2
0
2
t
r
o
p
e
R

l

a
u
n
n
A

c
l
p
p
u
o
r
G
S
c
S

 
 
 
 
 
Payments to past Directors – audited
There were no payments to past directors in the year ended 31 July 2021 (2020: none).

Payments for loss of office – audited
David Knight left the Board on his retirement on 31 July 2021. He retired with the agreement of the Board and worked his full 12-month notice period.  
As such the Committee determined that he should be treated as a good leaver with the following implications:
 – His salary payments and eligibility for benefits ceased on the date of his retirement;
 – He was gifted £5,000 of holiday vouchers as retirement gift from the Group;
 – He was eligible for a bonus for 2021 as described above. No further bonus payments will be made;
 – He was eligible for vesting of the 2018 LTIP awards on the same basis as the other Executive Directors; and
 – His 2019 and 2020 LTIP awards will vest on their third anniversary, subject to performance and pro-rata to the period worked. No award will be made in 2021.

Fees retained for external non-executive directorships
Executives may hold external non-executive directorships in non-competing businesses with the express consent of the Board. Fees may be retained for 
those roles with Board consent. There are no remunerated non-executive roles currently held by either the CEO or CFO.

Remuneration of the Chairman and Non-Executive Directors – audited
The structure of Non-Executive Directors fees, and their levels, were set by the Board on admission. No review is expected during 2022. 

The fees of the Non-Executive Directors are set by the Board and take account of the chairmanship of Board Committees and the time and responsibility  
of the roles of each Director. 

The fees paid during 2021 to the Non-Executive Directors were as follows:

Alan Smith

Ron McMillan

George Adams

Angela Luger

2021 
£ 

2020 
£

125,000

125,000

60,000

60,000

50,000

60,000

60,000

50,000

Our Non-Executive Directors (excluding the Chairman) have a base fee of £50,000. Ron McMillan and George Adams each receive an additional £10,000  
per annum for chairing the Audit and Remuneration Committees respectively.

There were no other amounts disclosable for the Non-Executive Directors for the year. 

87

Directors’ shareholding and share interests – audited
The table below sets out the number of shares held or potentially held by Directors (including connected persons or related parties where relevant) as at the 
financial year end 2021. 

Director

Alan Smith 

Ron McMillan

George Adams

Angela Luger

Steve Carson

Number

Value at year end

David Knight 

Number 

Value at year end

Chris Muir

Number 

Value at year end

Shares held beneficially

Unvested 

18,096

–

2,000

–

Shares 
held beneficially

Nil cost options subject 
to performance*

Option awards vested 
but unexercised** 

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

Total

–

–

1,528,615

£4,318,337

425,567

£1,202,227

50,474

£142,589

333,778

£942,923

231,173

£613,213

163,452

£461,752

2,185,355

£6,133,777

547,704

£1,547,264

*  Awards vest subject to EPS performance over a three-year period. This relates to awards granted in 2020 and 2021.
**  Option awards vested (but unexercised) is inclusive of the 2021 EPS LTIP award and dividend equivalents. David Knight also holds a further 22,772 options at an exercise price of 175p.

There were no shares exercised by Directors in the year.

The value of share interests at the year-end is based on the average share price in the three months ending on 31 July 2021 of 282.5p. There have been no 
changes to share interests as at the date of this report.

Strategic ReportCorporate GovernanceFinancial StatementsDirectors’ Remuneration report continued

The Executive Directors are required to build and maintain a shareholding equivalent to 200% of base salary. The shareholding for David Knight was 
significantly in excess of this level at the year end. The beneficial shareholding for Chris Muir is currently 50,474, but he is required to continue to build up a 
shareholding, which will be achieved by the retention of share options awarded under the LTIP. Steve Carson has no shareholding currently and will, therefore, 
also build a shareholding by the retention of share options awarded under the LTIP.

Performance graph and pay table
The chart below illustrates the Group’s Total Shareholder Return (TSR) performance against the performance of the FTSE Fledgling Index, from the date  
of the IPO of the Group. This index was selected as it represents a broad equity market index which includes companies of a comparable size. 

)
d
e
s
a
b
e
R

(
n
r
u
t
e
R
r
e
d
o
h
e
r
a
h
S

l

l

a
t
o
T

260
240
220
200
180
160

140
120
100
80
60

ScS

FTSE Fledgling Index

27 Jan 2015

27 A pr 2015

27Jul 2015

27 O ct 2015

27Jan 2016

27 A pr 2016

27Jul 2016

27 O ct 2016

27Jan 2017

27 A pr 2017

27Jul 2017

27 O ct 2017

27Jan 2018

27 A pr 2018

27Jul 2018

27 O ct 2018

27Jan 2019

27 A pr 2019

27Jul 2019

27 O ct 2019

27Jan 2020

27 A pr 2020

31 Jul 2020

27 O ct 2020

27Jan 2021

Source: Datastream (Thomson Reuters).

This graph shows the value, by 31 July 2021, of £100 invested in ScS Group plc on 26 January 2015 compared with the value of £100 invested in the  
FTSE Fledgling Index.

Changes in the remuneration of the CEO
Total remuneration of the CEO in each of the past 10 years is as follows: 

Steve Carson

88

2021*

David Knight

2021

2020

2019

2018

2017

2016

2015

2014

2013

2012

Salary  
£

Bonus 
£

Benefits 
£

LTIP 
£

Pension 
£

Total 
£

227,692

326,667

11,718

–

11,384

577,461

306,000

306,000

306,000

306,000

306,000

300,000

300,000

300,000

247,500

247,500

428,400

–

425,187

427,372 

203,418

420,000

–

177,450

274,073

199,635

24,444

20,827

20,798

20,836 

20,685

21,290

20,183

20,336

16,302

13,929

588,733

–

281,787

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

61,200

61,200

61,200

61,200

61,200

60,000

60,000

60,000

49,500

71,625

1,408,777

388,027

1,094,972

815,408 

591,303

801,290

380,183

557,786

587,375

532,689

*  Remuneration relates to seven months of employment. Shown for illustration only. As described in the opening letter, comparisons in this report are made against David Knight’s  

full year remuneration. 

1
2
0
2
t
r
o
p
e
R

l

a
u
n
n
A

c
l
p
p
u
o
r
G
S
c
S

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Changes in the remuneration of the Directors
The table below shows the percentage changes in the Executive and Non-Executive Directors’ remuneration between the financial year ended 31 July 2021 
and the year ended 25 July 2020 compared to the amounts for full-time employees of the Group for each of the following elements of pay: 

Executive Directors

Steve Carson

David Knight

Chris Muir

Non-Executive Directors

Alan Smith

Ron McMillan

George Adams

Angela Luger

Percentage change from 2020

Percentage change from 2019

Salary

Benefits

Bonus

Salary

Benefits

Bonus

n/a

–

19.4%

n/a

17.4%

–

n/a

100%

100%

–

–

–

–

n/a

n/a

n/a

n/a

n/a

n/a

n/a

n/a

n/a

–

–

–

–

–

–

n/a

0.1%

2.3%

n/a

(100)%

(100)%

n/a

n/a

n/a

n/a

n/a

n/a

n/a

n/a

Average per employee (excluding Directors)

1.6% (10.6)% 221.0%

1.2%

7.3% (56.3)%

Relative importance of the spend on pay
The table below shows the movement in spend on pay for all employees compared with the distributions to shareholders.

Total pay for employees

Distributions to shareholders

2021 
£’000

65,602

1,133

2020 
£’000

52,230

4,336

% Change

(25.6)%

(73.9)% 

CEO pay ratio
The table below shows the ratio of CEO pay for 2021 comparing the sum of the single total figures of remuneration for David Knight to the full-time 
equivalent total reward of those colleagues whose pay is ranked at the 25th, 50th and 75th percentile in our UK workforce. 

We have adopted Methodology Option A to calculate the ratio, as we believe it provides the best comparison of colleague pay with that of our CEO by using a 
consistent methodology to value remuneration and identify our employees ranked at the 25th, 50th and 75th percentiles. Employee pay was calculated based 
on actual pay and benefits for the 12 monthly payrolls in respect of the full financial year to 31 July 2020. We can confirm that none of the three individuals 
received additional or exceptional pay within the year and no adjustments were made to the calculation of the total remuneration for these employees from 
the methodology set out for the CEO’s single total figure remuneration. The ratios as set out below: 

89

Year

2021 – David Knight

2020 – David Knight

Method

25th percentile

50th percentile

75th percentile

Option A

Option A

72:1

21:1

56:1

16:1

44:1

12:1

The difference in ratios from 2020 to 2021 reflects an increase in the variable remuneration of the CEO following the improved performance of the business. 

The table below provides the individual remuneration information in relation to our employees ranked at the 25th, 50th and 75th percentiles: 

Year

2021

2020

Method

25th percentile

50th percentile

75th percentile

Salary

Total pay and benefits

Salary

Total pay and benefits

£17,213

£19,641

£17,601

£18,190

£24,483

£25,095

£24,259

£24,259

£27,898

£32,190

£19,727

£31,412

Gender pay gap
Information on our gender pay gap can be found on scsplc.co.uk. 

Remuneration Committee
The members of the Committee for the 2021 financial year were George Adams (Committee Chairman), Alan Smith, Ron McMillan and Angela Luger.  
All of the current members are independent Non-Executive Directors. 

The responsibilities of the Committee are set out in the Corporate Governance section of the Annual Report on page 71.

The Committee may invite the Executive Directors or other members of the senior management team to attend meetings and assist the Committee  
in its deliberations as appropriate. No person is present during any deliberations relating to their own remuneration or involved in determining their  
own remuneration. During the course of the year, Steve Carson, David Knight, Chris Muir, Marie Liston, Corporate Services Director, and Lucy Cough,  
People Director, were in attendance as required.

Strategic ReportCorporate GovernanceFinancial StatementsDirectors’ Remuneration report continued

The attendance of members of the Committee at meetings was as follows:

Name

George Adams

Alan Smith

Ron McMillan

Angela Luger

Attendance

5

5

5

5

Advisors to the Committee
During the year, the Committee received independent advice on executive remuneration matters from Mercer Ltd.

Mercer Ltd are members of the Remuneration Consultants Group and, as such, voluntarily operate under the code of conduct in relation to executive 
remuneration consulting in the UK. The Committee has received advice provided by Mercer Limited during the year and is comfortable that they have been 
objective and independent. Total fees received by Mercer Limited in relation to remuneration advice provided to the Committee during 2021 amounted  
to £27,878, excluding VAT, based on the required time commitment. 

Shareholder voting
At the Annual General Meeting on 25 November 2020, the total number of shares issued with voting rights was 38,012,655. The resolution to approve the 
Annual Remuneration report from the 2020 AGM and the resolution to approve the Remuneration Policy from the 2018 AGM received the following votes 
from shareholders.

Resolution

Votes for

favour Votes against

To approve the Annual Remuneration report (2020 AGM)

27,114,538

95.83% 1,180,024

To approve the Remuneration Policy (2018 AGM)

30,408,893

99.96%

13,626

Percentage of 
votes cast in 

Percentage 
of votes cast 
against

4.17%

0.04%

Votes 
withheld

Total votes 
cast

Percentage of 
issued share 
capital voted 

500

28,295,062

–

30,422,519

74.44%

76.04%

This report has been approved by the Board of Directors of the Group and signed on behalf of the Board by:

George Adams
Chair of the Remuneration Committee
4 October 2021

90

1
2
0
2
t
r
o
p
e
R

l

a
u
n
n
A

c
l
p
p
u
o
r
G
S
c
S

 
 
 
 
 
Remuneration Policy report 

Remuneration Policy overview
Total remuneration packages for the Executive Directors established at the time of the IPO will provide the basis for the structure of Director remuneration 
for the Group. Variable elements of reward including performance-based annual bonuses and long-term incentives will form a significant part of the overall 
remuneration package for Executive Directors and senior management. 

How the views of shareholders are taken into account 
The Committee recognises that developing a dialogue with shareholders is constructive and informative in developing and applying the Remuneration 
Policy. The Committee monitors the feedback received from shareholders during the year, feedback was proactively sought and shareholders accounting 
for over 63% of total equity responded. The Committee takes into account the best practice guidance issued by institutional shareholders and their 
representative bodies.

The Directors’ Remuneration Policy
The Directors’ Remuneration Policy was last approved by shareholders at the 2018 AGM and is due to be renewed at the 2021 AGM. This report has been 
prepared on behalf of, and has been approved by, the Board. It complies with The Large and Medium-sized Companies and Groups (Accounts and Reports) 
(Amendment) Regulations 2013. 

Changes from the previously approved policy
Only minor changes to the previous policy are proposed; the most significant being our formal commitment to reduce executive pension contribution rates 
to align more closely to the wider workforce rate and the implementation of bonus deferral when it is felt appropriate to do so. These changes are set out in 
the table below. 

Remuneration 
element

Base salary

Purpose

Operation

Maximum

Performance measures 

This is the basic 
pay and reflects 
the individual’s role, 
responsibilities  
and contribution  
to the Group; critical 
to help attract and 
retaining the right 
talent.

Base salaries are reviewed annually with 
changes typically taking effect from the 
beginning of the relevant financial year. 
When reviewing, consideration is given by the 
Committee to a range of factors, including 
the Group’s overall performance, market 
conditions and individual responsibility of 
executives and the level of salary increases 
given to employees across the Group.  
Higher increases may be awarded where 
there has been an increase in responsibility. 

Base salaries will be benchmarked 
periodically against companies that are 
both main and AIM listed, who are of  
a similar size, sector and complexity.

n/a

Salaries will generally be set at the mid-
market levels; however, the Committee 
remains mindful of the need to attract, 
recruit and retain talent within the team.

If a new Executive Director’s salary is set on 
appointment below the median market rate, 
phased increases (as a percentage of salary) 
above those granted generally to other 
employees may be awarded subject to the 
individual’s performance and development. 

The Group will provide market competitive 
benefits, which may periodically be reviewed. 
Executives will generally be eligible to receive 
those benefits on similar terms to other 
senior executives and those available to  
the broader workforce.

Executives are entitled to a car allowance 
or a company car, car insurance, other 
running costs and fuel, death in service 
life assurance, private medical care and 
any other Group-wide benefits including 
employee discount. Business travel and 
associated hospitality are provided in the 
normal course of business.

The Committee has the discretion to 
add or remove benefits to remain market 
competitive or to meet the needs of the 
business including where new benefits  
are introduced for the wider workforce.  
In addition, where the Committee considers 
it appropriate to do so, additional relocation 
expenses may be paid.

Executive Directors may take pension 
benefits as a contribution to defined 
contribution personal pension plans  
or receive cash in lieu.

Benefits

To provide benefits 
which are valued 
by the individual 
and assist them 
in carrying out 
their duties and to 
support wellness 
and engagement.

Pension

To provide a market 
competitive 
pension 
contribution  
(or equivalent  
cash allowance).

91

No explicit maximum. We ensure that 
benefits offered are in line with the 
market and review their cost from  
time to time in the context of the wider 
workforce provision.

n/a

n/a

A total maximum value of 5%, which 
aligns closely to the workforce rate. 
The Committee reserves the right to 
increase the rate if changes are made 
for the workforce – no such increase  
is planned at the present time.

Strategic ReportCorporate GovernanceFinancial StatementsRemuneration Policy report continued

Remuneration 
element

Bonus

Purpose

Operation

Maximum

Performance measures 

Provide an 
incentive linked 
to the financial 
performance of 
the Group and any 
other appropriate 
individual or 
business measures.

Deferral provides 
further alignment 
to shareholders’ 
long-term interests 
for achievement of 
stretching targets.

Bonuses are normally paid in cash.  
Payments are made subject to meeting  
pre-determined targets set at the start of 
the year and approved by the Committee. 

Malus and clawback rules apply to cash  
and deferred awards; see explanatory notes 
for more information. 

The Committee will consider the 
introduction of bonus deferral arrangements 
for any bonus earned in excess of 100%  
of salary.

The current annual bonus potential 
for the CEO and CFO is 140% of base 
salary. The threshold bonus levels will be 
no more than 25% of their respective 
maxima. As the regulations require 
a formal cap for a three-year period, 
future bonus potential will only increase 
where appropriate against market data 
and, in any event, will be subject to  
an overall maximum of 200% of salary 
for any Executive Director.

The Committee intends for 
the majority of the bonus to be 
based on financial measures, but 
has the discretion to introduce 
operational, corporate, divisional 
and/or individual performance 
measures if appropriate to the 
business including measures 
relating to the Group’s 
environmental, social and 
governance (ESG) objectives.

Performance conditions, 
once set, will generally remain 
unaltered, but the Committee 
has the right in its absolute 
discretion to make adjustments 
during any performance period 
to reflect any events arising 
which were unforeseen when 
the performance conditions 
were originally set by the 
Committee, for example, related 
to transactions. Any amended 
targets should be no more or less 
difficult to achieve than the original 
targets were considered to be 
when set.

Performance is normally based  
on earnings per share targets,  
but different measures and 
targets may be used alongside  
or instead of earnings per share  
for future awards at the discretion 
of the Committee.

Performance conditions, once set, 
will generally remain unaltered, but 
the Committee has the right in its 
absolute discretion to substitute or 
vary the performance conditions 
during any performance period 
in case of events arising which 
were unforeseen when the 
performance conditions were first 
set by the Committee, provided 
that such substitution or variation 
is reasonable and produces a 
fairer measure of performance 
and is not materially less difficult 
to satisfy.

Long-term 
incentives 

To align the 
Directors with 
the long-term 
performance of the 
business and the 
returns received by 
shareholders.

Awards may be made annually as options 
(including nil cost options) or as conditional 
share awards based on performance 
conditions. The Committee may set 
performance conditions typically over  
a three-year period.

The current intention is to use conditional 
shares or nil cost options for awards.

The policy is to award Executive 
Directors nil cost share options equating 
to no more than 150% of their basic 
salary in respect of each financial year.

No more than 25% of an award can be 
earned for a threshold performance.

Dividend equivalents will be made as either 
a cash payment or delivery of plan shares in 
an amount equal in value to the dividends 
that would have been payable on the number 
of vested plan shares under the award in 
respect of the period between the award 
date and the date on which the award vested 
or, where the award is an option and a holding 
period applies, to the date of expiry of the 
holding period or exercise (if earlier).

A two-year post-vesting holding period shall 
apply to LTIP awards granted to Executive 
Directors and may apply (at the discretion  
of the Committee) in relation to LTIP awards 
granted to others.

Malus and clawback rules apply to vested 
awards; see explanatory notes for more 
information.

Shareholding 
guidelines

Executive Directors 
are expected 
to maintain 
their minimum 
shareholding levels 
once they have 
been obtained.

The Committee will review shareholding 
annually against the Policy. The Committee 
reserves the right to alter the shareholding 
guidelines during the period of the Policy 
but without making the guidelines any less 
onerous overall.

The minimum required level of 
shareholding is 200% of base salary  
of the relevant Executive Director.  
We encourage Executive Directors  
to meet this requirement within five 
years of the date of appointment. 

n/a

Executive Directors are expected to 
retain vested LTIP awards (after tax)  
until the minimum shareholding level  
is attained. 

92

1
2
0
2
t
r
o
p
e
R

l

a
u
n
n
A

c
l
p
p
u
o
r
G
S
c
S

 
 
 
 
 
Remuneration 
element

Employee 
share plan

Purpose

Operation

Maximum

Performance measures 

Executive Directors can participate in  
the employee Share Incentive Plan (SIP)  
on the same terms as other employees  
of the Group in the UK.

Executive Directors will also be eligible to 
participate in any replacement or new all 
employee share plan that is introduced  
on the same terms as other employees. 

To encourage 
share ownership 
by employees and 
participation in the 
long-term success 
of the Group, the 
Group operates  
an employee share 
incentive plan for 
UK employees 
which was adopted 
in April 2015.

n/a

Under the rules of the SIP employees 
can purchase shares from their pre-tax 
and pre-national insurance salary 
through a resident SIP trust. Although 
the Group has no current intention  
to do so, the Group may also award 
matching shares (in proportion to the 
number of shares an employee chooses 
to purchase), or make an award of  
free shares.

The maximum amount that can be 
purchased, offered as a match or 
awarded for free under the SIP is subject 
to the published HMRC annual limits.

Payment of statutory entitlements and settlement of claims
The Group may pay any statutory entitlements to which an Executive Director is entitled, or settle or compromise any claims made in connection with  
the termination of employment of the Executive Director where the Committee considers such claims to have a reasonable prospect of success and that  
it is in the best interests of the Group to do so.

Remuneration Policy and other employees
As well as the Executive Directors, other senior management will also participate in the performance-based annual incentive. Around 82% of our colleagues 
are eligible for either a sales commission or bonus, based broadly on the same metrics of sales and profit as the Executive Directors. A small group of  
senior management also participates in the Long-Term Incentive Plan for performance share awards. 

The Group is committed to widespread share ownership. The Group employee Share Incentive Plan (SIP), which was adopted prior to admission, has been 
launched. Under the SIP, Executive Directors are eligible to participate on a basis consistent with all other employees. Currently, 70 employees participate  
in the scheme.

In setting the Remuneration Policy going forward, the Committee will also have regard to pay structures across the broader Group. The Committee takes 
into account the general base salary increase for the broader workforce when undertaking annual salary reviews for the Executive Directors and will consider 
consultation with the wider workforce should it be felt appropriate to do so.

Operation of variable pay
Annual incentive plan
The Committee will set the performance targets annually under the annual incentive plan to take account of the Group’s strategic plan and financial 
performance. The performance targets are set by the Committee based on a range of factors including against the budget for the financial year. The metrics 
adopted by the Committee and the weighting of them may vary in relation to the Group’s strategy each year. 

93

The Committee sets a threshold on-target and maximum pay-out target under the plan.

Long-Term Incentive Plan (LTIP)
The Committee will regularly review the performance targets in relation to the LTIP to take account of the Group’s strategic plan and financial performance. 
Targets will be set by the Committee at the time of the grant of each award. 

The Committee will operate the scheme in accordance with the plan rules which were approved by shareholders in January 2015. Under the plan rules the 
Committee has authority to vary the terms of an existing award in certain circumstances. This includes the ability to:
 – Settle awards in cash in extremis;
 – Make adjustments to the number of shares, in the event of a change in the share capital of the Group; and
 – Permit the early vesting of awards in the event of a change in control of the Group or, if appropriate to do so, on cessation of employment (see policy  

on service contracts and payments for loss of office). 

Clawback
The annual incentive plan and the LTIP rules include provisions for malus and clawback within a three-year period following payment or vesting if the 
Committee concludes that there has been a material misstatement of financial results; an error has been made in assessing any performance targets; 
conduct of the individual amounts to fraud or gross misconduct; events or behaviour of the individual leads to censure of the Group by a regulatory authority 
which has an impact on the reputation of the Group which justifies clawback being operated; or where the Committee discovers information from which it 
concludes that a bonus or award was paid or vested to a greater extent than it should have been. Malus and clawback provisions have applied to awards made 
since January 2015.

Strategic ReportCorporate GovernanceFinancial StatementsRemuneration Policy report continued

Potential reward scenarios
The graphs below show an estimate of the Executive Directors’ remuneration package as it will be implemented for 2022. 

Assumptions
 – The minimum scenario reflects fixed remuneration only which is base salary, pension and benefits. 
 – The on-target scenario reflects the fixed remuneration plus 50% of the maximum annual bonus under the annual incentive plan, and 25% vesting  

under the LTIP being the threshold level (assuming an award of 150% of salary to Executive Directors under the LTIP).

 – The maximum scenario reflects fixed remuneration plus 100% of the maximum annual bonus under the annual incentive plan which is 140% of base 

salary and 100% vesting under the LTIP (assuming an award of 150% of salary under the LTIP). 

 – The maximum plus scenario is the same above but shows the impact of a 50% increase in the share price on the value of the LTIP award (the on-target 

and maximum scenarios exclude the impact of share price increase). 

Steve Carson (Chief Executive Officer)

Chris Muir (Chief Financial Officer)

£’000

2,000

1,500

1,900,429

47%

1,600,429
37%

1,000

29%

35%

870,429
17%
32%

500

0

23%

28%

51%

440,429

100%

Maximum 
Plus

Maximum On-target Minimum

£’000

2,000

1,500

1,000

500

0

1,523,036
47%

1,283,036
37%

29%

35%

699,036
17%
32%

23%

28%

51%

355,036
100%

Maximum 
Plus

Maximum On-target Minimum

Base

Bonus

LTIP

Discretions retained by the Committee in operating variable pay schemes
The Committee operates the Group’s various incentive plans according to their respective rules and (in the case of the Share Incentive Plan) in accordance 
with relevant legislation and HMRC guidance. In order to ensure efficient administration of these plans, certain operational discretions are reserved to the 
Committee. These include:
 – Determining who may participate in the plans;
 – Determining the timing of grants of awards and/or payments under the plans;
 – Determining the quantum of any awards and/or payments (within the limits set out in the Policy table above);
 – In exceptional circumstances, determining that a share-based award shall be settled (in full or in part) in cash;
 – Determining the performance measures and targets applicable to an award (in accordance with the statements made in the Policy table above);
 – Where a participant ceases to be employed by the Group or relocates abroad, determining whether ‘good leaver’ status shall apply;
 – Determining the extent of vesting of an award based on assessment of the performance conditions, including discretion as to the basis on which 

performance is to be measured if an award vests in advance of normal timetable (on cessation of employment as a ‘good leaver’ or on the occurrence  
of corporate events);

 – Whether, and to what extent, pro ration shall apply in the event of cessation of employment as a ‘good leaver’ or on the occurrence of corporate events;
 – Whether malus and/or clawback shall be applied to any award and, if so, the extent to which they shall apply; and
 – Making appropriate adjustments to awards on account of certain events, such as major changes in the Group’s capital structure.

Recruitment and promotions
The remuneration package for a new Executive Director would be set in accordance with the terms of the Group’s Remuneration Policy at the time of the 
appointment. 

Additionally, on appointment of any new Executive Director (whether by external recruitment or internal promotion) the Remuneration Policy will permit  
the following:
 – Variable pay will be capped at the limits set out in the Policy for existing Directors. 
 – On pensions, the intention is to limit the pension provision (provided either through a Company contribution to a defined contribution scheme or paid as  
a cash allowance in lieu of pension) to the same level as the wider workforce for all new Executive Directors and members of the senior management team. 

 – The Group may compensate a new Executive Director for amounts forgone from the individual’s former employer in addition to ongoing remuneration 
provided under the Policy (as permitted under Listing Rules) taking account of the amount forfeited, the extent of any performance conditions, the 
nature of the award and the time period for vesting. 

 – The annual incentive plan would operate in accordance with its terms pro-rated for the period of employment, and depending on the appointment 

timing, different performance targets might be set as the Committee considers appropriate.

 – On an internal appointment, any variable pay element awarded in respect of the individual’s former role would be allowed to pay out according to its terms, 
with any relevant adjustment to take account of the appointment. Any other ongoing remuneration obligations existing prior to the appointment would 
also continue. 

 – On any appointment, the Committee may agree that the Group will meet any appropriate relocation expenses. 

Service contract and payments for loss of office
Main provisions on termination
The service contract for the CEO and CFO is indefinite but terminable either by the Company or the Executive Director on 12 months’ notice. The service 
contract for the CEO is dated 24 November 2020 and for the CFO, 8 January 2016.

94

1
2
0
2
t
r
o
p
e
R

l

a
u
n
n
A

c
l
p
p
u
o
r
G
S
c
S

 
 
 
 
 
An Executive Directors’ service contract can also be terminated without notice or payment of compensation except for pay accrued up to the termination 
date on the occurrence of certain events such as gross misconduct. 

Payment in lieu of notice equal to the base salary only for the unexpired period of notice can be paid under the Executive Directors’ service agreements.

Ordinarily, an Executive Director shall not be entitled to receive any benefits or allowances following their cessation of employment. However, the 
Committee may in exceptional circumstances allow an Executive Director to continue to receive appropriate benefits or allowances (such as reasonable 
outplacement or legal fees) for a limited period following cessation. 

There are no enhanced provisions on a change of control under the Executive Directors’ service contracts. Should a change of control event occur then 
awards under the bonus and long-term incentive plans shall become payable as soon as practicable after the event date. The awards will be pro-rated to 
reflect the extent to which the relevant performance targets have been met at the date of the relevant event, and on a time-apportioned basis, although  
the Committee has discretion to disapply time-apportionment if it considers it appropriate to do so.

Any new contracts will be on similar terms.

The service contracts of the Executive Directors are available for inspection at the registered office of the Company. 

Annual bonus on termination
There is no contractual entitlement to annual bonus on termination or if an Executive Director is under notice. Under the annual incentive plan, the 
Committee has absolute discretion to permit a bonus to be paid to a ‘good leaver’ based on the full or part-year performance, subject to consideration  
by the Committee. A full or pro-rata time-based bonus may be awarded, and this may be paid either at or before the normal payment date. 

Good leavers include individuals who leave due to ill health, death or redundancy, or in other circumstances at the discretion of the Committee. 

Performance share plans on termination
Share-based awards made under the Group’s share plans are governed by the relevant plan rules. Under the rules of the LTIP, unvested awards shall ordinarily 
lapse on the individual giving or being given notice of termination of employment, except in certain prescribed ‘good leaver’ scenarios. Good leavers include 
individuals who leave due to retirement, ill health, death or redundancy, or in other circumstances at the discretion of the Committee. 

In determining the extent of any vesting, the Committee will take into account the achievement of any applicable performance targets. A pro-rata reduction 
would normally be applied on a time-apportioned basis, although the Committee has discretion to disapply this requirement in exceptional circumstances  
if it considers it appropriate to do so. Awards will typically vest at the usual date but early vesting of outstanding awards may be permitted at the discretion  
of the Committee.

Awards which may have vested before giving or receiving notice of termination of employment remain exercisable for a period of six months after leaving  
or (if later) the expiry of any holding period which the award was subject to. The Committee has the discretion to extend this period. 

95

Chairman and Non-Executive Directors
Fees
The level and structure of fees for the Non-Executive Directors was set by the Board from admission. The fees of the Non-Executive Directors are set by 
the Board taking account of the chairmanship of Board Committees and the time and responsibility of the roles of each of them. The fees are paid in cash. 
The Committee has responsibility for determining fees paid to the Chairman of the Board. All fees are subject to the aggregate fee cap for Directors in the 
Articles of Association, which is currently £400,000 per annum. 

Details of the fees paid to the Non-Executive Directors are set out in the Directors’ Remuneration report. The Chairman and the Non-Executive Directors 
are entitled to be reimbursed for all expenses reasonably incurred by them in the performance of their duties. The Chairman and Non-Executive Directors  
do not participate in any bonus or share plans of the Company.

The Non-Executive Directors do not have service contracts. They are appointed for an initial three-year period subject to being re-elected by members annually.

Remuneration element

Purpose

Operation

Maximum

Non-Executive 
Directors’ fees

Helps recruit and 
retain high quality, 
experienced 
individuals.

The level and structure of fees was set by the Board at admission. The fees consist 
of an annual basic fee plus additional fees paid for the chairmanship of Board 
Committees. Limited benefits relating to travel and accommodation may be 
provided in relation to the performance of any Director’s duties.

The aggregate amount 
of Directors’ fees is 
limited by the Group’s 
Articles of Association.

Reflects time 
commitment  
and role.

Non-Executive Directors’ fees are set by the Executive Directors with reference 
to external data on fee levels in similar businesses, having taken account of the 
responsibilities of individual Directors and their expected annual time commitment.

Letters of appointment
Alan Smith and Ron McMillan have letters of appointment dated 22 October 2014 for an initial period of three years and are subject to three months’ notice 
of termination by either side at any time and subject to annual re-appointment as a Director by the shareholders. George Adams’ letter of appointment is 
dated 9 July 2015, and Angela Luger’s letter of appointment is dated 16 May 2019. Alan Smith and Ron McMillan were re-appointed for a further term of three 
years commencing 22 October 2020. George Adams was re-appointed for a further term of three years commencing 9 July 2021. The appointment letters 
provide that no other compensation is payable on termination. 

Insurance
All of the members of the Board have the benefit of Directors and Officers Liability Insurance which gives them cover for legal action which may arise against 
them personally.

Strategic ReportCorporate GovernanceFinancial StatementsDirectors’ report

Activities and results
The Directors present their Annual Report, together with the audited consolidated financial statements for the year ended 31 July 2021. ScS is one of  
the UK’s leading furniture and flooring retailers, operating from 100 ScS stores principally located in modern retail park locations across the country.

Management Report
The Directors’ report, together with the Strategic report, set out on pages 1 to 60, form part of the Management report for the purposes of Disclosure 
Guidance and Transparency Rule (DTR) 4.1.5R.

Statutory information contained elsewhere in the Annual Report 
As permitted by legislation, the Group has chosen to include certain matters in its Strategic report that would otherwise be required to be included  
in the Directors’ report, as the Board considers them to be of strategic importance. The Strategic report can be found on pages 1 to 60. 

Other information that is relevant to the Directors’ report, and which is incorporated by reference into this report, can be located as follows:

Information

Future developments

Stakeholder engagement

Streamlined energy and carbon reporting statement

Corporate governance statement

Section 172 statement

Risk and risk management

Statement of Directors’ responsibilities 

Disclosures required pursuant to Listing Rule 9.8.4R can be found on the following pages:

Listing Rule

Listing Rule requirement

Interest capitalised by the Group and any related tax relief

Unaudited financial information (LR 9.2.18 R)

Long-term incentive schemes (LR 9.4.3 R)

Directors’ waivers of emoluments

Directors’ waivers of future emoluments

Non pre-emptive issues of equity for cash

Non pre-emptive issues for cash by any unlisted major subsidiary undertaking

Parent company participation in a placing by a listed subsidiary

Contract of significance in which a Director is or was materially interested

9.8.4(1)

9.8.4(2)

9.8.4(4)

9.8.4(5)

9.8.4(6)

9.8.4(7)

9.8.4(8)

9.8.4(9)

9.8.4(10)

9.8.4(11)

9.8.4(12)

9.8.4(13)

9.8.4(14)

Pages

24 to 27

30 to 41

34

65 to 74

42 to 43

48 to 49

99

Disclosure 

Not applicable

Strategic report page 1 to 60

Directors’ Remuneration report 

pages 86

Not applicable

Not applicable

Not applicable

Not applicable

Not applicable

Not applicable

Contract of significance between the Company (or one of its subsidiaries) and a controlling shareholder Not applicable

Waiver of dividends by a shareholder

Waiver of future dividends by a shareholder

Directors’ report page 97

Directors’ report page 97

Board statement in respect of relationship agreement with the controlling shareholder

Not applicable

Non-financial information statement
In addition to the above referenced sections of the Annual Report, the Section 172 statement and non-financial information sections of the Annual Report 
set out on pages 42 to 43 are intended to help stakeholders understand the Group’s development, performance and impact of its activities, information 
relating to the environment, employee, social, respect for human rights, anti-corruption and anti-bribery matters in accordance with the non-financial 
reporting requirements contained in sections 414CA and 414CB of the Companies Act 2006.

Results and dividend 
The financial statements set out the Group’s results for the year ended 31 July 2021 and are contained in pages 106 to 127. The Group’s profit after tax  
for the financial year ended 31 July 2021 of £19.1m (2020: loss after tax of £2.2m) is reported in the Consolidated statement of comprehensive Income  
on page 106. 

The strength of the Group’s balance sheet, coupled with the robust trading experienced since our showrooms opened in April, provided the Board with  
the confidence to recommence dividends during the year with an interim dividend of 3.0p per share paid in July 2021. The Board is recommending a final 
dividend of 7.0p per ordinary share, which together with the interim dividend, results in a full-year dividend of 10.0p. This dividend, if approved, will be paid  
on 10 December 2021 to shareholders on the register on 12 November 2021. The ex-dividend date is 11 November 2021.

Movements in reserves are shown in the Consolidated statement of changes in equity on page 108.

Articles of Association
The Company’s Articles of Association may only be amended by special resolution at a general meeting of the shareholders. 

96

1
2
0
2
t
r
o
p
e
R

l

a
u
n
n
A

c
l
p
p
u
o
r
G
S
c
S

 
 
 
 
 
Share capital
Details of the Company’s issued share capital are shown in note 9 to the financial statements on page 133.

The Company has one class of ordinary shares which carry no fixed income. Each share carries the right to one vote at general meetings. The ordinary shares 
are listed on the Official List and are traded on the London Stock Exchange. No person has any special rights over the Company’s share capital and all issued 
shares are fully paid. There are no restrictions on voting rights or the transfer of securities in the Company and the Directors are not aware of any agreements 
between holders of the Company’s shares that may result in such restrictions.

Details of outstanding employee share options and the operation of relevant schemes are shown in note 22 to the financial statements on pages 125 to 126. 

Authority to purchase shares
The Company was authorised by shareholders at the 2020 AGM to purchase in the market up to 10% of the Company’s issued share capital, as permitted 
under the Company’s Articles of Association. A renewal of this authority will be proposed at the 2021 AGM.

Employee Benefit Trust
The Company established the ScS Group plc Employee Benefit Trust (EBT) with Sanne Fiduciary Services Limited as the Trustees in Jersey in January 2015. 
The purpose of the EBT continues to be to hold shares in trust in connection with the Group’s share incentive schemes. During the financial year to 31 July 
2021, the Trust purchased 200,000 ordinary shares of £0.001 each in the Group at an average price of 204.4p per ordinary share, of which 19,861 were used 
to satisfy awards. The EBT has waived any dividends which it may be entitled to receive in respect of ordinary shares held by it and has also agreed to waive 
voting rights to such shares. 257,414 ordinary shares in the Group remained held as treasury shares at 31 July 2021. 

Significant agreements – change of control
The Company is not party to any significant agreements that would take effect, alter or terminate upon a change in control of the Company following a 
takeover. The Directors are not aware of any agreements between the Company and its Directors and employees that provide for compensation for loss 
of office or employment that occurs following a takeover bid, except that provisions of the Company’s share plans may cause options and awards granted 
under such plans to vest on a takeover.

Directors and their interests
Details of the Directors of the Company as at 31 July 2021 are shown on pages 62 to 63 and their interests in shares and share awards made to them under 
share incentive schemes in the Company are shown in the Directors’ Remuneration report on page 87, all of which form part of this report. There have been 
no changes in the Board of the Company since that date.

The appointment and replacement of Directors is governed by the Company’s Articles of Association, the UK Corporate Governance Code, the Companies Act 
2006 and related legislation. All the Directors will seek re-election at the AGM. A Director may be appointed by ordinary resolution of the shareholders or by the 
Board. The Board may from time to time appoint a Director to fill a vacancy or as an additional Director, provided that the individual seeks election at the next AGM.

The Directors of the Company who were in office during the year and up to the date of signing the financial statements unless otherwise stated were:
Alan Smith  
George Adams 
Ron McMillan 
Angela Luger 
David Knight 
Steve Carson  
Chris Muir   

Non-Executive Chair
Non-Executive Director
Non-Executive Director
Non-Executive Director 
Chief Executive Officer (Resigned 31 July 2021)
Chief Executive Officer (Appointed 6 January 2021)
Chief Financial Officer

97

Subject to provisions of the Companies Act 2006, the Company’s Articles of Association, and to any directions given by special resolution, the business of 
the Company shall be managed by the Board, which may exercise all the powers of the Company.

Directors’ indemnities
As permitted by the Company’s Articles of Association, the Directors have the benefit of an indemnity which is applicable in certain circumstances.  
The Company also purchased and maintains Directors’ and Officers’ liability insurance. Both the insurance and indemnities applied throughout the financial 
year ended 31 July 2021 and through to the date of this report.

Employee involvement
The Group’s policy is to actively involve its employees in the business and to ensure that matters of concern to them, including the aims and objectives and 
the financial and economic factors which impact thereon, are communicated in an open and regular manner. This is achieved principally through three sales 
conferences (either physically or virtually) held at meaningful times during the year, supported by regular senior management meetings and briefings, both 
on a national and regional basis, and a comprehensive weekly newsletter which is made available to all employees. During the year the annual employee 
engagement survey was carried out and our designated Non-Executive Workforce Engagement Director, George Adams, held the Directors discussion 
group meetings virtually in which colleagues from across the business were able to share their thoughts and opinions. The feedback from the Directors 
discussion group meetings is reported at Board meetings and given due consideration in relation to decisions taken by the Board.

We also encourage colleagues to become involved in the financial performance of our business through a variety of share and bonus schemes. Employee 
engagement is considered further within our the Section 172 statement on page 42 to 43.

Our Code of Conduct which applies across the Group sets out the standard of behaviour expected of all of our people and includes guidance on policies 
such as anti-bribery, conflicts of interest and whistle-blowing procedures. We have a zero-tolerance approach to bribery and provide our colleagues with the 
ability to raise concerns regarding misconduct via an independent and confidential whistle-blowing service.

Strategic ReportCorporate GovernanceFinancial StatementsDirectors’ report continued

Equal opportunities 
The Group is committed to providing equality of opportunity to employees and potential employees. This applies to recruitment, training, career 
development and promotion for all employees, regardless of physical ability, gender, sexual orientation, religion, age or ethnic origin. Full and fair 
consideration is given to employment applications by disabled persons wherever suitable opportunities exist, having regard to their particular aptitudes  
and abilities. Training and career development support is provided where appropriate. Should an employee become disabled, efforts are made to ensure 
their continued employment with the Group, with re-training being provided if necessary.

Charitable and political donations
During the year, the Group made charitable donations, including funds raised by employees, of £60,000 (2020: £66,000). No political donations,  
expenditure or contributions have been made or incurred (2020: £nil). 

Going concern
Having considered the Group’s current trading and cash flow generation, including severe but plausible stress testing scenarios, the Directors have 
concluded that it is appropriate to prepare the Group financial statements on a going concern basis.

Major interest in shares
As at 14 September 2021 the following shareholders have notified the Company of their interest in 3% or more of the Company’s issued share capital:

M&G Investment Management

Artemis Investment Management

Tellworth Investments

Stadium Capital Management

Premier Miton Investors 

Number of 
shares held

% of issued 
share capital

4,595,529

4,243,686

3,945,571

1,846,677

1,719,766

12.09

11.16

10.38

4.86

4.52

Fidelity International

SCION Asset Management

Huntington Management

Mr David Knight

Number of 
shares held

% of issued 
share capital

1,706,618

1,700,000

1,642,148

1,528,615

4.49

4.47

4.32

4.02

Annual General Meeting 
A notice convening the Company’s Annual General Meeting on 26 November 2021 will be issued to shareholders separately. 

Auditors
The Group’s independent auditors, PricewaterhouseCoopers LLP (PwC), have indicated their willingness to continue in office and the Audit Committee  
has recommended that PwC remain in office. A resolution to re-appoint PwC as auditors will be put to the members at the Annual General Meeting. 

So far as the Directors are aware, there is no relevant audit information of which the auditors are unaware. The Directors have taken all steps that they ought 
to have taken as Directors to make themselves aware of any relevant audit information and to establish that the auditors are aware of that information.

98

By order of the Board

Richard Butts
Company Secretary
4 October 2021

1
2
0
2
t
r
o
p
e
R

l

a
u
n
n
A

c
l
p
p
u
o
r
G
S
c
S

 
 
 
 
 
Statement of Directors’ responsibilities in respect of the financial statements

Directors’ confirmations
Each of the Directors, whose names and functions are listed in 
the Board of Directors section confirm that, to the best of their 
knowledge:
 – the Group financial statements, which have been prepared 
in accordance with international accounting standards 
in conformity with the requirements of the Companies 
Act 2006 and international financial reporting standards 
adopted pursuant to Regulation (EC) No 1606/2002 as it 
applies in the European Union, give a true and fair view  
of the assets, liabilities, financial position and profit of  
the group;

 – the Company financial statements, which have been 

prepared in accordance with United Kingdom Accounting 
Standards, comprising FRS 101, give a true and fair view 
of the assets, liabilities, financial position and profit of the 
Company; and

 – the Directors’ Report includes a fair review of the 

development and performance of the business and  
the position of the Group and Company, together with  
a description of the principal risks and uncertainties that  
it faces.

By order of the Board

Richard Butts
Company Secretary
4 October 2021

99

The Directors are responsible for preparing the Annual Report 
and the financial statements in accordance with applicable law 
and regulation.

Company law requires the Directors to prepare financial 
statements for each financial year. Under that law the Directors 
have prepared the Group financial statements in accordance 
with international accounting standards in conformity with 
the requirements of the Companies Act 2006 and the 
Company financial statements in accordance with United 
Kingdom Generally Accepted Accounting Practice (United 
Kingdom Accounting Standards, comprising FRS 101 ‘Reduced 
Disclosure Framework’, and applicable law). Additionally, 
the Financial Conduct Authority’s Disclosure Guidance and 
Transparency Rules require the Directors to prepare the Group 
financial statements in accordance with international financial 
reporting standards adopted pursuant to Regulation (EC) No 
1606/2002 as it applies in the European Union.

Under company law, Directors must not approve the financial 
statements unless they are satisfied that they give a true and 
fair view of the state of affairs of the Group and Company and 
of the profit or loss of the Group for that period. In preparing 
the financial statements, the Directors are required to:
 – select suitable accounting policies and then apply  

them consistently;

 – state whether applicable international accounting 

standards in conformity with the requirements of the 
Companies Act 2006 and international financial reporting 
standards adopted pursuant to Regulation (EC) No 
1606/2002 as it applies in the European Union have been 
followed for the Group financial statements and United 
Kingdom Accounting Standards, comprising FRS 101 have 
been followed for the Company financial statements, 
subject to any material departures disclosed and explained 
in the financial statements;

 – make judgements and accounting estimates that are 

reasonable and prudent; and

 – prepare the financial statements on the going concern 

basis unless it is inappropriate to presume that the Group 
and Company will continue in business.

The Directors are also responsible for safeguarding the assets 
of the Group and Company, and hence, for taking reasonable 
steps for the prevention and detection of fraud and other 
irregularities.

The Directors are responsible for keeping adequate 
accounting records that are sufficient to show and explain 
the Group’s and company’s transactions and disclose with 
reasonable accuracy at any time the financial position of the 
Group and Company and enable them to ensure that the 
financial statements and the Directors’ Remuneration report 
comply with the Companies Act 2006.

The Directors are responsible for the maintenance and 
integrity of the company’s website. Legislation in the United 
Kingdom governing the preparation and dissemination of 
financial statements may differ from legislation in other 
jurisdictions.

Strategic ReportCorporate GovernanceFinancial StatementsFinancial Statements

Independent auditors’ report to the members of ScS Group plc

Report on the audit of the financial statements

Opinion
In our opinion:
 – ScS Group plc’s group financial statements and company financial statements (the “financial statements”) give a true and fair view of the state of  

the group’s and of the company’s affairs as at 31 July 2021 and of the group’s profit and the group’s and company’s cash flows for the 53 week period  
(the “year”) then ended;

 – the group financial statements have been properly prepared in accordance with international accounting standards in conformity with the requirements 

of the Companies Act 2006;

 – the company financial statements have been properly prepared in accordance with United Kingdom Generally Accepted Accounting Practice  

(United Kingdom Accounting Standards, comprising FRS 101 “Reduced Disclosure Framework”, and applicable law); and

 – the financial statements have been prepared in accordance with the requirements of the Companies Act 2006.

We have audited the financial statements, included within the Annual Report, which comprise: the Consolidated and Company statement’s of financial 
position as at 31 July 2021; the Consolidated statement of comprehensive income, the Consolidated and company statement’s of cash flows, and  
the Consolidated and Company statement’s of changes in equity for the period then ended; and the notes to the financial statements, which include  
a description of the significant accounting policies.

Our opinion is consistent with our reporting to the Audit Committee.

Separate opinion in relation to international financial reporting standards adopted pursuant to Regulation (EC) No 1606/2002 
as it applies in the European Union
As explained in note 2 to the financial statements, the group, in addition to applying international accounting standards in conformity with the requirements 
of the Companies Act 2006, has also applied international financial reporting standards adopted pursuant to Regulation (EC) No 1606/2002 as it applies in 
the European Union.

In our opinion, the group financial statements have been properly prepared in accordance with international financial reporting standards adopted pursuant 
to Regulation (EC) No 1606/2002 as it applies in the European Union.

100

Basis for opinion
We conducted our audit in accordance with International Standards on Auditing (UK) (“ISAs (UK)”) and applicable law. Our responsibilities under ISAs (UK)  
are further described in the Auditors’ responsibilities for the audit of the financial statements section of our report. We believe that the audit evidence  
we have obtained is sufficient and appropriate to provide a basis for our opinion.

Independence
We remained independent of the group in accordance with the ethical requirements that are relevant to our audit of the financial statements in the UK,  
which includes the FRC’s Ethical Standard, as applicable to listed public interest entities, and we have fulfilled our other ethical responsibilities in accordance 
with these requirements.

To the best of our knowledge and belief, we declare that non-audit services prohibited by the FRC’s Ethical Standard were not provided.

Other than those disclosed in Note 4 to the financial statements, we have provided no non-audit services to the company or its controlled undertakings  
in the period under audit.

Our audit approach
Overview
Audit scope
 – We performed an audit of the complete financial information of the Group’s trading entity A Share & Sons Limited, the only component in scope  

for SCS Group plc.

 – The timing of the audits for the statutory accounts for the Group, Company and the subsidiary companies took place at the same point in time and,  

as such, as at the date of this opinion we have audited all material balances across the Group.

Key audit matters
 – Impairment of assets in relation to loss making stores (group)
 – Impact of COVID-19 (group and parent)

Materiality
 – Overall group materiality: £2,650,000 (2020: £2,000,000) based on 1% of revenue, capped at 20% of three year average profit/(loss) before tax  

(2020: 1% of revenue, capped at 20% of five year average (loss)/profit before tax).
 – Overall company materiality: £705,000 (2020: £702,000) based on 1% of total assets.
 – Performance materiality: £1,987,500 (group) and £529,000 (company).

1
2
0
2
t
r
o
p
e
R

l

a
u
n
n
A

c
l
p
p
u
o
r
G
S
c
S

 
 
 
 
 
The scope of our audit
As part of designing our audit, we determined materiality and assessed the risks of material misstatement in the financial statements.

Key audit matters
Key audit matters are those matters that, in the auditors’ professional judgement, were of most significance in the audit of the financial statements of the 
current period and include the most significant assessed risks of material misstatement (whether or not due to fraud) identified by the auditors, including 
those which had the greatest effect on: the overall audit strategy; the allocation of resources in the audit; and directing the efforts of the engagement team. 
These matters, and any comments we make on the results of our procedures thereon, were addressed in the context of our audit of the financial statements 
as a whole, and in forming our opinion thereon, and we do not provide a separate opinion on these matters.

This is not a complete list of all risks identified by our audit.

Transition to IFRS 16 and recognition of right of use assets and lease liabilities (Group) and Carrying value of Investments in subsidiaries (Company), which 
were key audit matters last year, are no longer included because of this being the year after IFRS 16 adoption meaning the transition to the new standard is 
no longer a significant risk, and the carrying value of investment in subsidiaries risk has reduced due to the improved market capitalisation of ScS Group plc, 
which is indicative of the group’s value, and the return to profit in the year which provides sufficient headroom on the value in use calculation. Otherwise,  
the key audit matters below are consistent with last year.

Key audit matter 

How our audit addressed the key audit matter

Impairment of assets in relation to loss making stores (group) 
Refer to pages 78 (Audit Committee Report), 115 (Critical 
accounting estimates and assumptions – Impairment of 
property, plant and equipment and right-of-use assets) 
and 116 (Note 5 – Operating exceptional items included 
within administrative expenses). 

ScS Group plc has 100 stores at year end. The nature 
of the business is such that, when all costs have been 
allocated on a store by store basis, some stores fixed 
assets and right of use assets are not covered by the 
present value of its future cash flows. This gives rise to 
potential impairment of the assets. Where there is an 
indicator of impairment in a store’s value management 
test the carrying value of assets by reference to the 
future discounted cashflows that the store is expected  
to generate. Management have used EBITDA as a 
proxy for cashflows, exclusive of rent repayments. 
We recognise that there are a number of judgements 
involved in the impairment of asset calculation, including 
forecasting of future results, length of leases, allocation 
of costs and use of an appropriate discount rate. As such, 
the judgements involved in the impairment of assets 
calculation were an area of focus. Management have 
calculated an impairment reversal of £4.2m, which has 
been treated as an exceptional item in the Statement  
of comprehensive income. 

We obtained the impairment workings from management and checked their arithmetical accuracy. 
We agreed allocation of fixed assets on a sample basis by vouching to invoice. We assessed the store 
by store allocation of revenue and direct costs for reasonableness by comparing to previous year 
actual’s. We agreed that central costs had been allocated on a reasonable basis to the underlying 
stores, and all material costs had been allocated. We agreed that the rental charge was correctly 
excluded from the stores EBITDA. There were no issues noted with the underlying data used in 
calculating the impairment provision. 

Management’s assessment of which stores were at risk of impairment were based on the 
forecasted future performance of individual stores in the group’s portfolio. We agreed the FY22 
forecast results used in the asset impairment calculation were consistent with board approved 
budgets. We assessed the reasonableness of the assumptions used in the calculation and 
performed sensitivities where appropriate. This included, but was not limited to, assessment 
of discount rate and store growth rates with reference to the macro-economic and industry 
predictions. We concluded that the level of impairment of fixed assets and right of use assets  
in the store portfolio was materially correct. 

101

We assessed the reasonableness of the impairment reversal being treated as an exceptional item 
within the Statement of comprehensive income and agreed as reasonable based on the nature 
and magnitude of the impairment reversal. We have assessed completeness and accuracy of the 
related disclosures within the financial statements. We are satisfied the assumptions made by 
management in determining the asset impairment and the related disclosures in the financial 
statements are appropriate.

Strategic ReportCorporate GovernanceFinancial StatementsIndependent auditors’ report to the members of ScS Group plc continued

Key audit matter 

How our audit addressed the key audit matter

Impact of COVID-19 (group and parent)
Refer to page 78 (Audit Committee Report). 

The ongoing and evolving COVID-19 pandemic is 
having a significant impact on the global economy and 
the UK economy in which the Group operates. There is 
significant uncertainty as to what the lasting impact of 
the pandemic will be on the economy. Management have 
considered the potential impact on the Group of the 
ongoing COVID-19 pandemic. In relation to the on-going 
application of controls, processes and governance, 
management have not observed a significant impact to 
the running of the business since lockdown measures 
were first introduced in the UK in March 2020 and 
through subsequent restrictions.

In relation to the Group’s going concern assessment, 
management have adjusted the cash flow forecasts 
for the period to October 2022 to reflect a severe 
but plausible downside scenario resulting from the 
consequences of COVID-19. Having taken into account 
these models, together with the current level of cash and 
other facilities available to the group, and with a robust 
assessment of planned and possible mitigating actions, 
management has concluded that the Group remains  
a going concern. 

Management has described its going concern and 
viability assessment on page 60 of the annual report. 

We have considered the carrying value of the Groups fixed assets, including right of use assets,  
in relation to loss making stores within the specific key audit matter; Impairment of assets in relation 
to loss making stores. We have re-evaluated our risk assessment, including the going concern risk 
of the Group.

Based on management’s assessment and our audit procedures thereon as described below,  
we consider our original risk assessment to remain appropriate and therefore do not consider  
going concern to be a heightened risk for the Group. In assessing management’s consideration  
of the ability of the Group to continue as a going concern, we have undertaken the following  
audit procedures: 
 – We obtained from management their latest forecasts that support the Board’s assessment and 
conclusions with respect to the going concern basis of preparation of the financial statements. 
 – We assessed the management accounts for the financial year to date and checked that these 

were consistent with the starting point of management’s forecasts. 
 – We also checked the arithmetical accuracy of management’s forecasts. 
 – We evaluated management’s Board approved budget and cashflow forecast and severe yet 

plausible downside scenario for the period to October 2022. 

 – We challenged the adequacy and appropriateness of the underlying assumptions and significant 

forecast cashflows.

 – We understood the mitigating actions taken by management to date, and confirmed the 

available mitigating actions in management’s model are within their control and can be taken  
on a timely basis, if needed. 

 – We evaluated the level of forecast liquidity and forecast compliance with the bank facility 

covenants, and agreed to source documentation.

Our findings and conclusions in respect of going concern are set out in the ‘Going concern’ section 
below. We have evaluated management’s disclosures in the financial statements in relation to 
COVID-19 and are satisfied that they are consistent with the risks affecting the Group, their impact 
assessment and the procedures that we have performed. We have also considered the impact of 
remote working on internal control environment and having nothing to report.

How we tailored the audit scope
We tailored the scope of our audit to ensure that we performed enough work to be able to give an opinion on the financial statements as a whole, taking into 
account the structure of the group and the company, the accounting processes and controls, and the industry in which they operate.

As part of designing our audit, we determined materiality and assessed the risks of material misstatement in the financial statements. In particular, we 
looked at where the directors made subjective judgements, for example in respect of significant accounting estimates that involved making assumptions 
and considering future events that are inherently uncertain. As in all of our audits we also addressed the risk of management override of internal controls, 
including evaluating whether there was evidence of bias by the directors that represented a risk of material misstatement due to fraud.

Materiality
The scope of our audit was influenced by our application of materiality. We set certain quantitative thresholds for materiality. These, together with qualitative 
considerations, helped us to determine the scope of our audit and the nature, timing and extent of our audit procedures on the individual financial statement 
line items and disclosures and in evaluating the effect of misstatements, both individually and in aggregate on the financial statements as a whole.

Based on our professional judgement, we determined materiality for the financial statements as a whole as follows:

Overall materiality

£2,650,000 (2020: £2,000,000).

Financial statements – group

How we determined it

Rationale for  
benchmark applied

1% of revenue, capped at 20% of three year average profit/(loss) 
before tax (2020: 1% of revenue, capped at 20% of five year 
average (loss)/profit before tax).

Based on our professional judgement and our knowledge of the 
client, materiality was based on 1% of revenue which is a standard 
materiality benchmark particularly in low margin businesses such 
as ScS Group plc. However it is important that we are mindful of 
our materiality level in the context of the businesses profitability. 
Consequently we capped the materiality level applied at 20% of 
the three year average profit/(loss) before tax.

Financial statements – company

£705,000 (2020: £702,000).

1% of total assets

Based on our professional judgement and our knowledge of 
the client our materiality was based on 1.0% (2020: 1.0%) of 
total assets. We used this as the benchmark for our materiality 
calculations due to the entity being a holding company with 
limited activity and our judgement around what would affect 
the decisions of the members.

The materiality allocated to A Share and Sons Limited was £2,500,000, this was the only component in scope.

102

1
2
0
2
t
r
o
p
e
R

l

a
u
n
n
A

c
l
p
p
u
o
r
G
S
c
S

 
 
 
 
 
We use performance materiality to reduce to an appropriately low level the probability that the aggregate of uncorrected and undetected misstatements 
exceeds overall materiality. Specifically, we use performance materiality in determining the scope of our audit and the nature and extent of our testing 
of account balances, classes of transactions and disclosures, for example in determining sample sizes. Our performance materiality was 75% of overall 
materiality, amounting to £1,987,500 for the group financial statements and £529,000 for the company financial statements.

In determining the performance materiality, we considered a number of factors – the history of misstatements, risk assessment and aggregation risk and  
the effectiveness of controls – and concluded that an amount at the upper end of our normal range was appropriate.

We agreed with the Audit Committee that we would report to them misstatements identified during our audit above £132,500 (group audit) (2020: £100,000) 
and £35,000 (company audit) (2020: £35,000) as well as misstatements below those amounts that, in our view, warranted reporting for qualitative reasons.

Conclusions relating to going concern
Our evaluation of the directors’ assessment of the group’s and the company’s ability to continue to adopt the going concern basis of accounting included:
 – Obtaining management forecasts for the period to October 2022 and evaluating management’s downside scenarios, including a severe but plausible 

scenario, and challenging their appropriateness and underlying assumptions;

 – Evaluating the level of forecast liquidity and forecast compliance with the bank facility covenants.

Based on the work we have performed, we have not identified any material uncertainties relating to events or conditions that, individually or collectively,  
may cast significant doubt on the group’s and the company’s ability to continue as a going concern for a period of at least twelve months from when the 
financial statements are authorised for issue.

In auditing the financial statements, we have concluded that the directors’ use of the going concern basis of accounting in the preparation of the financial 
statements is appropriate.

However, because not all future events or conditions can be predicted, this conclusion is not a guarantee as to the group’s and the company’s ability to 
continue as a going concern.

In relation to the directors’ reporting on how they have applied the UK Corporate Governance Code, we have nothing material to add or draw attention to  
in relation to the directors’ statement in the financial statements about whether the directors considered it appropriate to adopt the going concern basis  
of accounting.

Our responsibilities and the responsibilities of the directors with respect to going concern are described in the relevant sections of this report.

103

Reporting on other information
The other information comprises all of the information in the Annual Report other than the financial statements and our auditors’ report thereon.  
The directors are responsible for the other information. Our opinion on the financial statements does not cover the other information and, accordingly,  
we do not express an audit opinion or, except to the extent otherwise explicitly stated in this report, any form of assurance thereon.

In connection with our audit of the financial statements, our responsibility is to read the other information and, in doing so, consider whether the other 
information is materially inconsistent with the financial statements or our knowledge obtained in the audit, or otherwise appears to be materially misstated. 
If we identify an apparent material inconsistency or material misstatement, we are required to perform procedures to conclude whether there is a material 
misstatement of the financial statements or a material misstatement of the other information. If, based on the work we have performed, we conclude that 
there is a material misstatement of this other information, we are required to report that fact. We have nothing to report based on these responsibilities.

With respect to the Strategic report and Directors’ Report, we also considered whether the disclosures required by the UK Companies Act 2006 have  
been included.

Based on our work undertaken in the course of the audit, the Companies Act 2006 requires us also to report certain opinions and matters as described below.

Strategic Report and Directors’ Report
In our opinion, based on the work undertaken in the course of the audit, the information given in the Strategic Report and Directors’ Report for the year 
ended 31 July 2021 is consistent with the financial statements and has been prepared in accordance with applicable legal requirements.

In light of the knowledge and understanding of the group and company and their environment obtained in the course of the audit, we did not identify any 
material misstatements in the Strategic report and Directors’ Report.

Strategic ReportCorporate GovernanceFinancial StatementsIndependent auditors’ report to the members of ScS Group plc continued

Directors’ Remuneration
In our opinion, the part of the Directors’ Remuneration Report to be audited has been properly prepared in accordance with the Companies Act 2006.

Corporate governance statement
The Listing Rules require us to review the directors’ statements in relation to going concern, longer-term viability and that part of the corporate governance 
statement relating to the company’s compliance with the provisions of the UK Corporate Governance Code specified for our review. Our additional 
responsibilities with respect to the corporate governance statement as other information are described in the Reporting on other information section  
of this report.

Based on the work undertaken as part of our audit, we have concluded that each of the following elements of the corporate governance statement is materially 
consistent with the financial statements and our knowledge obtained during the audit, and we have nothing material to add or draw attention to in relation to:
 – The directors’ confirmation that they have carried out a robust assessment of the emerging and principal risks;
 – The disclosures in the Annual Report that describe those principal risks, what procedures are in place to identify emerging risks and an explanation of how 

these are being managed or mitigated;

 – The directors’ statement in the financial statements about whether they considered it appropriate to adopt the going concern basis of accounting in 
preparing them, and their identification of any material uncertainties to the group’s and company’s ability to continue to do so over a period of at least 
twelve months from the date of approval of the financial statements;

 – The directors’ explanation as to their assessment of the group’s and company’s prospects, the period this assessment covers and why the period is 

appropriate; and

 – The directors’ statement as to whether they have a reasonable expectation that the company will be able to continue in operation and meet its liabilities 
as they fall due over the period of its assessment, including any related disclosures drawing attention to any necessary qualifications or assumptions.

Our review of the directors’ statement regarding the longer-term viability of the group was substantially less in scope than an audit and only consisted of 
making inquiries and considering the directors’ process supporting their statement; checking that the statement is in alignment with the relevant provisions 
of the UK Corporate Governance Code; and considering whether the statement is consistent with the financial statements and our knowledge and 
understanding of the group and company and their environment obtained in the course of the audit.

In addition, based on the work undertaken as part of our audit, we have concluded that each of the following elements of the corporate governance 
statement is materially consistent with the financial statements and our knowledge obtained during the audit:
 – The directors’ statement that they consider the Annual Report, taken as a whole, is fair, balanced and understandable, and provides the information 

necessary for the members to assess the group’s and company’s position, performance, business model and strategy;

104

 – The section of the Annual Report that describes the review of effectiveness of risk management and internal control systems; and
 – The section of the Annual Report describing the work of the Audit Committee.

We have nothing to report in respect of our responsibility to report when the directors’ statement relating to the company’s compliance with the Code does 
not properly disclose a departure from a relevant provision of the Code specified under the Listing Rules for review by the auditors.

Responsibilities for the financial statements and the audit
Responsibilities of the directors for the financial statements
As explained more fully in the Statement of Directors’ responsibilities in respect of the financial statements, the directors are responsible for the preparation 
of the financial statements in accordance with the applicable framework and for being satisfied that they give a true and fair view. The directors are 
also responsible for such internal control as they determine is necessary to enable the preparation of financial statements that are free from material 
misstatement, whether due to fraud or error.

In preparing the financial statements, the directors are responsible for assessing the group’s and the company’s ability to continue as a going concern, 
disclosing, as applicable, matters related to going concern and using the going concern basis of accounting unless the directors either intend to liquidate  
the group or the company or to cease operations, or have no realistic alternative but to do so.

Auditors’ responsibilities for the audit of the financial statements
Our objectives are to obtain reasonable assurance about whether the financial statements as a whole are free from material misstatement, whether due 
to fraud or error, and to issue an auditors’ report that includes our opinion. Reasonable assurance is a high level of assurance, but is not a guarantee that an 
audit conducted in accordance with ISAs (UK) will always detect a material misstatement when it exists. Misstatements can arise from fraud or error and are 
considered material if, individually or in the aggregate, they could reasonably be expected to influence the economic decisions of users taken on the basis of 
these financial statements.

Irregularities, including fraud, are instances of non-compliance with laws and regulations. We design procedures in line with our responsibilities, outlined 
above, to detect material misstatements in respect of irregularities, including fraud. The extent to which our procedures are capable of detecting 
irregularities, including fraud, is detailed below.

1
2
0
2
t
r
o
p
e
R

l

a
u
n
n
A

c
l
p
p
u
o
r
G
S
c
S

 
 
 
 
 
Based on our understanding of the group and industry, we identified that the principal risks of non-compliance with laws and regulations related to 
Companies Act 2006 and the Listing Rules, and we considered the extent to which non-compliance might have a material effect on the financial statements. 
We evaluated management’s incentives and opportunities for fraudulent manipulation of the financial statements (including the risk of override of controls), 
and determined that the principal risks were related to posting inappropriate journal entries to understate revenue or the company’s EBITDA. Audit 
procedures performed by the engagement team included:
 – Discussions with management, including consideration of known or suspected instances of non-compliance with laws and regulations and fraud;
 – Review of board minutes;
 – Review of legal expenditure in the year to identify potential non-compliance with laws and regulation;
 – Evaluation of management’s controls designed to prevent and detect irregularities and fraud, such as whistleblowing controls; 
 – Identifying and testing journal entries, in particular any journal entries posted with unusual account combinations; and
 – Challenging assumptions and judgements made by management in their significant accounting estimates, in particular stock provisions, impairment  

of assets and consideration of the impact of COVID-19 on going concern 

There are inherent limitations in the audit procedures described above. We are less likely to become aware of instances of non-compliance with laws 
and regulations that are not closely related to events and transactions reflected in the financial statements. Also, the risk of not detecting a material 
misstatement due to fraud is higher than the risk of not detecting one resulting from error, as fraud may involve deliberate concealment by, for example, 
forgery or intentional misrepresentations, or through collusion.

Our audit testing might include testing complete populations of certain transactions and balances, possibly using data auditing techniques. However,  
it typically involves selecting a limited number of items for testing, rather than testing complete populations. We will often seek to target particular items  
for testing based on their size or risk characteristics. In other cases, we will use audit sampling to enable us to draw a conclusion about the population from 
which the sample is selected.

A further description of our responsibilities for the audit of the financial statements is located on the FRC’s website at: www.frc.org.uk/
auditorsresponsibilities. This description forms part of our auditors’ report.

Use of this report
This report, including the opinions, has been prepared for and only for the company’s members as a body in accordance with Chapter 3 of Part 16 of the 
Companies Act 2006 and for no other purpose. We do not, in giving these opinions, accept or assume responsibility for any other purpose or to any other 
person to whom this report is shown or into whose hands it may come save where expressly agreed by our prior consent in writing.

Other required reporting

105

Companies Act 2006 exception reporting
Under the Companies Act 2006 we are required to report to you if, in our opinion:
 – we have not obtained all the information and explanations we require for our audit; or
 – adequate accounting records have not been kept by the company, or returns adequate for our audit have not been received from branches not visited  

by us; or

 – certain disclosures of directors’ remuneration specified by law are not made; or
 – the company financial statements and the part of the Directors’ Remuneration Report to be audited are not in agreement with the accounting records 

and returns.

We have no exceptions to report arising from this responsibility.

Appointment
Following the recommendation of the Audit Committee, we were appointed by the directors on 3 November 2009 to audit the financial statements for the 
year ended 31 July 2009 and subsequent financial periods. The period of total uninterrupted engagement is 13 years, covering the years ended 31 July 2009 
to 31 July 2021. The audit went out to competitive tender for the year end 27 July 2019 and we were reappointed as auditors on 21 November 2018.

Andy Ward 
(Senior Statutory Auditor)
for and on behalf of PricewaterhouseCoopers LLP
Chartered Accountants and Statutory Auditors
Newcastle
4 October 2021

Strategic ReportCorporate GovernanceFinancial StatementsConsolidated statement of comprehensive income 
For the year ended 31 July 2021

Gross sales

Revenue
Cost of sales

Gross profit
Distribution costs
Administrative expenses 

Operating profit

Analysed as:
Underlying operating profit
Operating exceptional items included within administrative expenses

Operating profit

Finance costs
Finance income

Net finance costs

Profit/(loss) before taxation
Income tax (charge)/credit

Profit/(loss) for the year 

Attributable to:
Owners of the parent
Profit/(loss) and total comprehensive income/(expense) for the year 

Earnings/(loss) per share (expressed in pence per share):
Basic earnings/(loss) per share (pence)

Diluted earnings/(loss) per share (pence)

106

All amounts relate to continuing operations. 

There are no other sources of comprehensive income/(expense).

53 weeks ended
31 July 2021
£’000

52 weeks ended
25 July 2020
£’000

Note

3

3

4

5

7
8

9

324,519

310,566
(163,579)

146,987
(18,680)
(101,534)

26,773

22,531
4,242

26,773

(4,180)
81

(4,099)

22,674
(3,610)

19,064

268,119

255,491
(135,911)

119,580
(16,988)
(101,873)

719

4,708
(3,989)

719

(4,195)
355

(3,840)

(3,121)
898

(2,223)

19,064

(2,223)

10

10

50.4p

48.6p

(5.8p)

(5.8p)

1
2
0
2
t
r
o
p
e
R

l

a
u
n
n
A

c
l
p
p
u
o
r
G
S
c
S

 
 
 
 
 
Consolidated statement of financial position 
As at 31 July 2021

Non-current assets
Intangible assets
Property, plant and equipment
Right-of-use assets
Deferred tax asset 

Total non-current assets

Current assets
Inventories
Trade and other receivables
Current income tax receivable
Cash and cash equivalents

Total current assets

Total assets

Current liabilities
Current income tax liabilities
Trade and other payables
Provisions
Lease liabilities 

Total current liabilities

Non-current liabilities
Trade and other payables
Provisions
Lease liabilities

Total non-current liabilities

Total liabilities

Capital and reserves attributable to the owners of the parent
Share capital
Share premium
Capital redemption reserve
Treasury reserve
Merger reserve
Retained earnings

Equity attributable to the owners of the parent

Total equity

Total equity and liabilities

Note

As at 31 July 2021
£’000

As at 25 July 2020
£’000

11
12
13
18

14
15

16
19
13

17
19
13

20
20

28

2,243
18,381
102,630
2,024

125,278

17,328
4,947
–
87,650

109,925

235,203

1,171
71,818
488
22,693

96,170

–
1,155
93,368

94,523

190,693

38
16
15
(549)
25,511
19,479

44,510

44,510

235,203

2,358
17,209
118,499
722

138,788

18,207
4,804
358
82,282

105,651

244,439

–
81,169
125
24,167

105,461

137
1,084
112,253

113,474

218,935

38
16
15
(182)
25,511
106

25,504

25,504

244,439

107

The notes on pages 110 to 127 are an integral part of these consolidated financial statements. 

The financial statements on pages 106 to 127 were approved by the Board and authorised for issue on 4 October 2021 and signed on its behalf by:

Steve Carson
Chief Executive Officer
ScS Group plc: Registered number 03263435

Strategic ReportCorporate GovernanceFinancial StatementsConsolidated statement of changes in equity 
For the year ended 31 July 2021

At 28 July 2019
Impact of change in accounting policy 
Tax impact of change in accounting policy

Balance at 28 July 2019 (restated)
Loss and total comprehensive expense
Share-based payment credit (note 22)
Purchase of own shares
Treasury shares (note 28)
Cancellation of repurchased shares
Dividend paid (note 21)

At 25 July 2020

At 26 July 2020
Profit and total comprehensive income
Share-based payment charge (note 22)
Purchase of treasury shares (note 28)
Sale of treasury shares (note 28)
Dividend paid (note 21)

At 31 July 2021

Share
capital
£’000

Share
premium
£’000

Capital
redemption 
reserve
£’000

40
–
–

40
–
–
–
–
(2)
–

38

38
–
–
–
–
–

38

16
–
–

16
–
–
–
–
–
–

16

16
–
–
–
–
–

16

13
–
–

13
–
–
–
–
2
–

15

15
–
–
–
–
–

15

Merger
reserve
£’000

25,511
–
–

25,511
–
–
–
–
–
–

25,511

25,511
–
–
–
–
–

25,511

Treasury 
reserve
£’000

(91)
–
–

(91)
–
–
–
(91)
–
–

Retained 
earnings
£’000

17,407
(5,826)
990

12,571
(2,223)
(818)
(4,425)
(663)
–
(4,336)

Total
equity
£’000

42,896
(5,826)
990

38,060
(2,223)
(818)
(4,425)
(754)
–
(4,336)

(182)

106

25,504

(182)
–
–
(410)
43
–

(549)

106
19,064
1,450
–
(8)
(1,133)

25,504
19,064
1,450
(410)
35
(1,133)

19,479

44,510

108

1
2
0
2
t
r
o
p
e
R

l

a
u
n
n
A

c
l
p
p
u
o
r
G
S
c
S

 
 
 
 
 
Consolidated statement of cash flows 
For the year ended 31 July 2021

Cash flows from operating activities
Profit/(loss) before taxation
Adjustments for:
Depreciation of property, plant and equipment
Depreciation of right-of-use assets
Amortisation of intangible assets
Impairment (reversal)/charge on non-current assets
Share-based payment charge/(credit)
Finance costs
Finance income

Changes in working capital:
Decrease in inventories
(Increase)/decrease in trade and other receivables
(Decrease)/increase in trade and other payables

Cash generated from operating activities
Interest paid
Income taxes paid

Net cash flow generated from operating activities

Cash flows used in investing activities
Purchase of property, plant and equipment
Payments to acquire intangible assets
Interest received

Net cash flow used in investing activities

Cash flows used in financing activities
Dividends paid 
Purchase of own shares 
Sale of treasury shares
Interest paid on lease liabilities 
Payment of capital element of leases
Proceeds from bank loan
Repayment of borrowings

Net cash flow used in financing activities

Net increase in cash and cash equivalents
Cash and cash equivalents at beginning of year

Cash and cash equivalents at end of year

53 weeks ended
31 July 2021
£’000

52 weeks ended
25 July 2020
£’000

Note

22,674

(3,121)

12
13
11
5
22
7
8

14
15

7

8

21
28
28

3,980
21,149
865
(4,242)
1,450
4,180
(81)

49,975

879
(143)
(9,141)

41,570
(439)
(3,381)

37,750

(3,654)
(855)
81

(4,428)

(1,133)
(410)
35
(3,741)
(22,705)
–
–

(27,954)

5,368
82,282

87,650

4,847
22,787
647
3,376
(818)
4,195
(355)

31,558

1,002
191
26,715

59,466
(215)
(1,595)

57,656

(2,694)
(1,151)
355

(3,490)

(4,336)
(5,180)
–
(3,980)
(16,054)
12,000
(12,000)

(29,550)

24,616
57,666

82,282

109

Strategic ReportCorporate GovernanceFinancial Statements 
Notes to the consolidated financial statements

1.  General information 
ScS Group plc (the ‘Company’) is a public limited company, limited by shares, which is listed on the London Stock Exchange, incorporated and domiciled in 
England, within the UK (Company registration number 03263435). The address of the registered office is 45-49 Villiers Street, Sunderland, SR1 1HA. 

The Company’s principal activity is to act as a holding company for its subsidiaries. The Company and its subsidiaries’ (the ‘Group’s’) principal activity is the 
provision of furniture and flooring, trading under the name ScS.

2.  Accounting policies 
Basis of preparation
The Group’s financial statements have been prepared in accordance with international accounting standards in conformity with the requirements of the 
Companies Act 2006 (‘IFRS’) and the applicable legal requirements of the Companies Act 2006 for the 53 weeks ended 31 July 2021 (2020: 52 weeks ended 
25 July 2020). In addition to complying with international accounting standards in conformity with the requirements of the Companies Act 2006, the Group’s 
financial statements also comply with international financial reporting standards adopted pursuant to Regulation (EC) No 1606/2002 as it applies in the 
European Union. The Group’s financial statements are presented in Sterling and all values are rounded to the nearest thousand pounds (£’000) except when 
otherwise indicated. They are prepared on the historical cost basis, except for share-based payments that have been measured at fair value.

The financial statements for the year have been prepared for the 53 weeks ended 31 July 2021 (2020: 52 weeks ended 25 July 2020). The accounting policies 
which follow set out those policies which apply in preparing the financial statements for the year ended 31 July 2021. These policies have been consistently 
applied to all of the years presented, unless otherwise stated.

Going concern
At the time of approving the financial statements, the Board is required to formally assess that the business has adequate resources to continue in 
operational existence for the foreseeable future and as such can continue to adopt the ‘going concern’ basis of accounting. 

Liquidity
The most significant factor in considering whether current resources are adequate is to consider the Group’s liquidity. At 31 July 2021, the Group’s  
cash balance totalled £87.7m, and £15.4m was owed as trade payables for goods delivered (note 16). The Group has no drawn down debt, and further liquidity 
is available through the £20.0m CLBILS revolving credit facility (RCF) granted on 25 August 2020. This facility is committed for a term of 36 months and  
would be renegotiated well in advance of this maturity date. The RCF is subject to certain covenants in respect of fixed charge cover, liquidity and leverage.

110

Cash flows
As part of the Group’s ongoing review of going concern, the Directors have reviewed the results for the 12 months to 31 July 2021 and have modelled cash 
flow forecasts under the following scenarios:
 – A ‘base case’ scenario to July 2024 that includes assumptions in relation to customer demand, the availability of product and the estimated continued 
impact of the recovery of the UK economy on the Group’s performance. We assume no further lockdown periods or direct impact on our store and 
distribution operation. We expect order levels to return to those experienced pre-pandemic, and assume continued availability of product and no other 
significant impacts of COVID-19.

 – A ‘severe but plausible downside’ sensitivity scenario which sees a further wave of COVID-19 during winter which requires a further UK lockdown. We have 
assumed stores are required to close for our key winter trading period – from Boxing Day until the end of January 2022, although distribution operations 
continue to be permitted. Stores re-open in February 2022, with a limited period of additional demand, although we have prudently assumed only a third 
of lost orders are recovered.

The Group has included within the severe but plausible model associated reductions in marketing, management and staff bonus costs and sales-related 
commission payments.

The government continues to provide government support through reduced business rates to 31 March 2022. The modelled scenarios include the benefit 
of the reduced business rates. No additional government or landlord support (such as a further extension of the furlough scheme) has been included to 
support the modelled scenarios.

Throughout the ‘severe but plausible downside’ scenario, the Group would have significant cash headroom, with the cash low point at the end of July 2022 
still being substantial at £47.6m, before use of the £20m RCF. Furthermore, forecasts show sufficient headroom on all of the financial covenants and no 
requirement for any additional sources of financing (including any drawdown on the RCF).

Many of our large suppliers operate using credit insurance, which they use to support their payment terms with the Group. As these credit insurers are 
consistently reviewing their support for the companies involved a severe economic climate could mean that they withdraw their support for the Group.  
This could create working capital challenges for our suppliers, requiring them to request earlier payment dates. The Group has modelled the impact of the  
full withdrawal of this insurance, and noted that the cash headroom available ensures this does not pose a further risk to the Group’s going concern basis.

For the reasons set out in detail above, the Board believe that it remains appropriate to prepare the Group financial statements on a going concern basis.

1
2
0
2
t
r
o
p
e
R

l

a
u
n
n
A

c
l
p
p
u
o
r
G
S
c
S

 
 
 
 
 
2.  Accounting policies continued
New standards, amendments and interpretations 
At the date of authorisation of these financial statements, new standards, amendments and interpretations which had been issued but were not yet 
mandatory are not expected to have a material impact on the consolidated financial statements.

The following accounting standards, interpretations and amendments have been adopted in the year:
 – Amendments to IFRS 3  
 – Amendments to IFRS 9, IAS 39, IFRS 7, IFRS 4 and IFRS 16  
 – Amendments to IAS 1 and IAS 8  
 – Amendments to IFRS 16 COVID-19  
 – Conceptual Framework  

Definition of a Business
Interest Rate Benchmark Reform
Definition of Material
Related Rent Concessions
Amendments to References to the Conceptual Framework in IFRS Standards

None of the items listed above have had any material impact on the amounts reported in this consolidated set of financial statements.

Basis of consolidation 
The Group financial statements consolidate the financial statements of ScS Group plc and the entities it controls (its subsidiaries) drawn up to within seven 
days of 31 July each year.

The financial year represents the 53 weeks ended 31 July 2021 (prior financial year 52 weeks ended 25 July 2020).

Subsidiaries 
Subsidiaries are entities controlled by the Company. Control exists when the Company has the power, directly or indirectly, to govern the financial and 
operating policies of an entity so as to obtain benefits from its activities. In assessing control, potential voting rights that presently are exercisable or 
convertible are taken into account. Control is generally accompanied by a shareholding of more than one-half of the voting rights. The financial information 
of subsidiaries is included in the consolidated financial information from the date that control commences until the date that control ceases.

Transactions eliminated on consolidation 
Intra-Group balances, and any gains and losses or income and expenses arising from intra-Group transactions, are eliminated in preparing the consolidated 
financial information. Gains arising from transactions with jointly controlled entities are eliminated to the extent of the Group’s interest in the entity. Losses 
are eliminated in the same way as gains, but only to the extent that there is no evidence of impairment. 

Exceptional items 
Exceptional items are defined as items of income and expenditure which are material and unusual in nature and which are considered to be of such 
significance that they require separate disclosure on the face of the income statement. Any future movements on items previously classified as exceptional 
will also be classified as exceptional.

111

Gross sales and revenue
For the purposes of managing its business the Group focuses on gross sales, which is defined as the fair value of the consideration received or receivable, 
prior to any accounting adjustments for interest-free credit fees or aftercare product costs. The Board of Directors believe gross sales is a more transparent 
measure of the activity levels and performance of its showrooms and online channels as it is not affected by customer preferences on payment options. 
Accordingly, gross sales is presented in this Annual Report, in addition to statutory revenue, as an alternative performance measure, with a reconciliation 
between the two measures provided in note 3.

Both gross sales and revenue are stated net of discounts, returns and value added taxes, and are recognised when the Group has satisfied its performance 
obligations by transferring control of the goods or service to the customer, and the revenue and costs in respect of the transaction can be measured reliably 
and collectability is reasonably assured. This is deemed to be when the goods and any associated warranty contracts have been delivered to the customer. 
Warranty services, once sold, are subsequently provided by third parties. Revenue is measured net of the charges associated with interest-free credit sales.

The Group operates a negative working capital model whereby customers pay a deposit at the point of order and, unless the order is to be financed using 
consumer credit, settle outstanding balances before delivery. Payment of part of the consideration is often, therefore, taken before the Group has fulfilled its 
performance obligation. These deposits taken from customers are referred to as contract liabilities under IFRS 15, and are presented as payments received 
on account within current liabilities, until the goods or services are delivered. A very small number of deposits are refunded without delivery of product, and 
therefore, materially, the value of customer deposits will be realised within 12 months. Where the outstanding balance is settled subsequent to the delivery 
of goods via consumer credit, the full financed balance is received within two working days of delivery from our third-party finance providers, who are then 
responsible for collecting subsequent payments from the customer. There has been no significant changes to the methodology in recognising contract 
liabilities in the current year.

The Group holds a sales return provision in the Consolidated statement of financial position to provide for expected levels of returns on sales made before 
the year end but returned after the year end. The Group recognises the expected value of revenue relating to returns within sales provisions and the 
expected value of cost of sales relating to the returned items is included within inventories.

Segmental reporting
As noted in the gross sales and revenue note above, segments are reported in a manner consistent with the internal reporting to the Board of Directors  
(see note 3 – Segment information on page 115).

Strategic ReportCorporate GovernanceFinancial Statements 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued

2.  Accounting policies continued
Intangible assets
Intangible assets purchased separately are capitalised at cost and amortised on a straight-line basis over their useful economic life. The useful economic 
lives used are as follows:

Computer software 

20-33% straight-line per annum

The carrying value of intangible assets is reviewed for impairment when events or changes in circumstances indicate the carrying value may not be 
recoverable.

Property, plant and equipment
Property, plant and equipment are stated at historic purchase cost less accumulated depreciation and accumulated impairment losses. Cost includes the 
original purchase price of the asset and the costs attributable to bringing the asset to its working condition for its intended use. Depreciation is provided on  
all tangible fixed assets, at rates calculated to write off the cost, less estimated residual value, of the tangible fixed assets over their anticipated useful lives  
at the rates shown below:

Fixtures and fittings 
Computer equipment 
Leasehold improvements 
Freehold buildings 

10-20% straight-line per annum
20-33% straight-line per annum
The shorter of the term of the lease or 2% straight-line per annum
2% straight-line per annum

The carrying values of property, plant and equipment are reviewed for impairment when events or changes in circumstances indicate the carrying value may 
not be recoverable.

Leases
The Group assesses whether a contract is, or contains, a lease at inception of the contract. Typically, lease contracts relate to properties such as showrooms 
and distribution centres, and vehicles leases. For leases in which the Group is a lessee, the Group recognises a right-of-use asset and a lease liability at 
commencement of the lease.

The Group transitioned to IFRS 16 on 28 July 2019 using the modified retrospective transition approach. The cumulative impact of applying IFRS 16 was 
accounted for as an adjustment to retained earnings on the transition date.

Lease liabilities 
The lease liability is measured at the present value of the lease payments, discounted at the lessee’s incremental borrowing rate specific to the term and 
start date of the lease, unless the interest rate implicit in the lease can be readily determined. Lease payments include:
 – Fixed payments (including in-substance fixed payments), less any lease incentives receivable;
 – Variable lease payments that are based on an index or a rate, initially measured using the index or rate as at the commencement date;
 – Amounts expected to be payable by the group under residual value guarantees;
 – The exercise price of a purchase option if the group is reasonably certain to exercise that option; and
 – Payments of penalties for terminating the lease, if the lease term reflects the group exercising that option.

The lease liability is subsequently measured at amortised cost using the effective interest rate method. It is remeasured, with a corresponding adjustment  
to the right-of-use asset, if there is a modification, a change in the lease term or a change in the fixed lease payments. Interest charges are included in finance 
costs in the consolidated income statement.

Right-of-use assets
The right-of-use asset is initially measured at cost, comprising:
 – The amount of the initial measurement of lease liability;
 – Any lease payments made at or before the commencement date less any lease incentives received;
 – Any initial direct costs; and
 – Restoration costs.

The right-of-use asset is subsequently depreciated using the straight-line method over the shorter of the asset’s useful life or the lease term. Depreciation 
on right-of-use assets is included in administrative costs in the consolidated income statement. The right-of-use asset is tested for impairment if there  
are any indicators of impairment. 

Leases of low value assets and short-term leases of 12 months or less are expensed to the Group income statement.

Inventories
Inventories are stated at the lower of cost and net realisable value and consist of finished goods held for resale. Where necessary, provision is made for 
obsolete, slow-moving and defective stocks. Cost comprises the purchase price of goods and other directly attributable costs incurred in bringing the 
product to its present location and condition. Net realisable value is the estimated selling price less any further costs to be incurred to disposal.

112

1
2
0
2
t
r
o
p
e
R

l

a
u
n
n
A

c
l
p
p
u
o
r
G
S
c
S

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
2.  Accounting policies continued
Trade receivables
Trade receivables are amounts due from customers for goods sold or services performed in the ordinary course of business. If collection is expected in one 
year or less (or in the normal operating cycle of the business if longer), they are classified as current assets. If not, they are presented as non-current assets.

Trade receivables are recognised initially at fair value and subsequently measured at amortised cost using the effective interest method, less provision for 
impairment. As a requirement of applying IFRS 9, the Group has applied an expected credit loss (ECL) model when calculating impairment losses on its trade 
and other receivables. The majority of the trade receivables are due from finance houses with which there is a very low likelihood, and no previous history,  
of default, and therefore, there has been no material impact of the ECL model.

Trade payables
Trade payables are obligations to pay for goods or services that have been acquired in the ordinary course of business from suppliers. Accounts payable are 
classified as current liabilities if payment is due within one year or less. If not, they are presented as non-current liabilities.

Trade payables are recognised initially at fair value and subsequently measured at amortised cost using the effective interest method.

Borrowings
Borrowings are recognised initially at fair value, net of transaction costs incurred. Borrowings are subsequently carried at amortised cost; any difference 
between the proceeds (net of transaction costs) and the redemption value is recognised in the income statement over the period of the borrowings using 
the effective interest method.

Cash and cash equivalents
For the purpose of presentation in the Consolidated statement of cash flows, cash and cash equivalents includes cash on hand.

Treasury shares
The Employee Benefit Trust (EBT) provides for the issue of shares to Group employees, principally under share option schemes. Shares in the Company 
held by the EBT are included in the balance sheet as treasury shares at cost, including any directly attributable incremental costs. Subsequent consideration 
received for the sale of such shares is also recognised in equity, with any difference between the sale proceeds and the original cost being taken to retained 
earnings. No gain or loss is recognised in the financial statements on transactions in treasury shares. 

The number of such shares is also deducted from the number of shares in issue when calculating the earnings per share. 

113

Share capital
Ordinary shares are classified as equity.

Incremental costs directly attributable to the issue of new ordinary shares or options are shown in equity as a deduction, net of tax, from the proceeds.

Pre-opening and launch costs
Pre-opening and launch costs are charged to the income statement in the year they are incurred.

Advertising expenditure
All routine and general advertising costs are expensed as incurred. Advertising costs paid to media companies are recognised as a prepayment until the 
advertising is placed in the media and communicated to the public, at which point the expenditure is expensed to the income statement.

Supplier contributions
Contributions received from suppliers towards the cost of displaying and promoting their product are recognised as a reduction in the advertising and 
marketing costs to which they relate.

Supplier rebates
Rebates receivable from suppliers are based upon the volume of business with each supplier and are recognised in the income statement in cost of sales or 
credited to stock as appropriate on an earned basis, by reference to the supplier revenue.

Pension costs
Contributions to the defined contribution scheme are charged to the income statement in the year in which they become payable. The assets of the scheme 
are held separately from those of the Group in an independently administered fund.

Strategic ReportCorporate GovernanceFinancial StatementsNotes to the consolidated financial statements continued

2.  Accounting policies continued
Taxation
Tax on the profit or loss for the year comprises current and deferred tax. Tax is recognised in the income statement except to the extent that it relates to  
a business combination, or items recognised directly in equity or other comprehensive income. 

Current tax is the expected tax payable or receivable on the taxable income or loss for the year, using tax rates enacted or substantively enacted at the 
balance sheet date, and any adjustment to tax payable in respect of previous years.

Deferred tax is recognised using the liability method, on temporary differences at the balance sheet date between the tax base of assets and liabilities and 
their carrying amounts for financial reporting purposes, to the extent that the Directors consider that it is more likely than not that there will be suitable 
taxable profits from which the future reversal of the underlying timing differences can be deducted.

Deferred tax is measured on an undiscounted basis at the average tax rates that are expected to apply in the periods in which timing differences reverse, 
based on tax rates and laws enacted or substantively enacted at the balance sheet date.

Deferred tax assets and liabilities are offset when there is a legally enforceable right to set off current tax assets against current tax liabilities and when they 
relate to income taxes levied by the same taxation authority and the Group intends to settle its current tax assets and liabilities on a net basis.

Foreign currency
Transactions in foreign currencies are translated at the rate ruling at the date of the transaction. Monetary assets and liabilities denominated in foreign 
currencies are translated at the rate of exchange ruling at the balance sheet date. All exchange differences are taken to the income statement in the period  
in which they arise.

Share-based payments
The Company operates an equity-settled, share-based payment plan for Directors of the trading subsidiary undertaking, A. Share & Sons Limited, which 
includes the Executive Directors of the Group. The fair value of the Directors’ services received by the Group in exchange for the issue of shares in the 
Company is recognised as an expense in the financial statements of the subsidiary company to which services have been supplied. The total amount to 
be expensed over the vesting period is determined by reference to the fair value of the shares issued, excluding the impact of any non-market vesting 
conditions (for example, profitability and sales growth targets). Non-market vesting conditions are included in assumptions about the number of shares  
that are expected to vest. At each balance sheet date, the Group revises its estimates of the number of shares that are expected to vest. It recognises the 
impact of the revision to original estimates, if any, in the income statement, with a corresponding adjustment to equity.

Dividends
Interim dividends are recognised when they are paid to the Group’s shareholders. Final dividends are recognised when they are approved by the Group’s 
shareholders.

Provisions
Provisions are recognised when the Group has a present obligation as a result of a past event, it is probable that a transfer of economic benefits will be 
required to settle the obligation, and a reliable estimate can be made of the amount of the obligation.

Critical accounting judgements and estimates
The preparation of the Group’s financial statements requires management to make judgements, estimates and assumptions in applying the Group’s 
accounting policies to determine the reported amounts of assets, liabilities, income and expenses. The estimates and associated assumptions are based on 
historical experience and various other factors that are believed to be reasonable under the circumstances. Actual results may differ from these estimates. 
The estimates and underlying assumptions are reviewed on an ongoing basis, with revisions to accounting estimates applied prospectively.

Discount rates utilised within IFRS 16 accounting has been removed as a critical accounting estimate following completion of the adoption of IFRS 16 
‘Leases’. This was added as a critical accounting estimate in the FY20 financial statements due to the significance of the liabilities (and corresponding 
right-of-use assets) which were brought on to the balance sheet on transition. This is no longer considered as a critical accounting estimate following the 
completion of the transition to IFRS 16 as the impact of the discount rate on lease additions and modifications during the year, and the level of estimation 
required in determining the discount rates, was not significant. 

Going concern has been removed as a critical accounting judgement. Refer to page 110.

114

1
2
0
2
t
r
o
p
e
R

l

a
u
n
n
A

c
l
p
p
u
o
r
G
S
c
S

 
 
 
 
 
2.  Accounting policies continued
Critical accounting estimates and assumptions
Management consider that accounting estimates and assumptions made in relation to the following items have a significant risk of resulting in a material 
adjustment to the carrying amounts of assets and liabilities within the next financial period.

Stock provisions
The Group holds £17.3m of inventory at the year end, and the majority of this stock is held for display in our showrooms. Due to the nature of this stock, it will 
often be subject to the wear and tear associated with use in a showroom environment, and some items may have also been in our showroom for an extended 
period of time. As such, this stock is often unable to achieve the same margin as the ‘special order’ stock purchased and delivered directly to our customers, 
and may occasionally be sold at a level lower than cost following a business decision to refresh the range or better utilise the space. The Group’s policy in 
relation to stock provisioning is, therefore, to provide for obsolete, slow-moving and defective stock, and therefore, ensure that stock is held at the most 
appropriate estimate of net realisable value. 

In determining an estimate of this value, management has made judgements in respect of the quality of the Group’s products and saleability, and applied  
a provision based on historic sales levels. Whilst management considers that the methodologies and assumptions adopted in the valuation are supportable, 
reasonable and robust, because of the inherent uncertainty of the sale price of stock currently held, those estimated values may differ from the final sale  
and the total differences could potentially be significant Impairment of property, plant and equipment and right-of-use assets.

Impairment of property, plant and equipment and right-of-use assets
Management consider each showroom to be a cash-generating unit (CGU). At each balance sheet date, the Group reviews the carrying amounts of its property, 
plant and equipment, right-of-use assets and intangible assets to determine whether there is any indication of impairment at a showroom following poor 
performance. If any such indication exists, the recoverable amount of the asset is estimated in order to determine the extent of the impairment loss, if any. 

Recoverable amounts for CGUs are the higher of fair value less costs of disposal, and value in use. Value in use is calculated from cash flow projections based 
on the Group’s internal budgets, which are then extrapolated over the remaining showroom lease length, and management’s expectations of estimated 
growth rates. 

The key estimates for the value in use calculations are those regarding the discount rate used and expected changes to future cash flows. Management sets 
the budgets based on past experiences and expectations of future changes in the market and estimates discount rate using pre-tax rates that reflect the 
current market assessment of the time value of money and the risks specific to the CGUs, deriving from the Group’s post-tax weighted average cost of capital. 
Management have considered the potential impact of changes in assumptions on the impairment in note 5. If the recoverable amount of an asset or CGU is 
estimated to be less than its carrying amount, the carrying amount of the asset or CGU is reduced to its recoverable amount. An impairment loss is recognised 
as an expense immediately. Where an impairment loss subsequently reverses, the carrying amount of the asset or CGU is increased to the revised estimate 
of its recoverable amount, but so that the increased carrying amount does not exceed the carrying amount that would have been determined had no 
impairment loss been recognised for the asset or CGU in prior years. A reversal of an impairment loss is recognised as income immediately.

115

3.  Segment information
The Directors have determined the operating segments based on the operating reports reviewed by the Operating Board (the Executive Directors and the 
other Directors of the trading subsidiary, A. Share & Sons Limited) that are used to assess both performance and strategic decisions. The Directors have 
identified that the Operating Board are the chief operating decision makers in accordance with the requirements of IFRS 8 ‘Segmental reporting’.

The Directors consider that the Group operates one type of business generating gross sales and revenue from the retail of furniture and flooring. All gross 
sales and revenue profit before taxation, assets and liabilities are attributable to the principal activity of the Group and other related services. All gross sales 
and revenues are generated in the United Kingdom.

An analysis of gross sales and revenue is as follows:

Sale of goods
Associated sale of warranties

Gross sales
Less: costs of interest-free credit

Revenue

Of which:

Furniture
Flooring 

Revenue

53 weeks ended
31 July 2021
£’000

52 weeks ended
25 July 2020
£’000

301,327
23,192

324,519
(13,953)

310,566

249,578
18,541

268,119
(12,628)

255,491

280,926
29,640

310,566

226,112
29,379

255,491

Strategic ReportCorporate GovernanceFinancial StatementsNotes to the consolidated financial statements continued

4.  Operating profit
Operating profit is stated after charging/(crediting):

Fees payable to the Company auditors for the audit of Company and consolidated financial statements
Fees payable to the Company’s auditors and their associates for other services to the Group
 – audit of the Company’s subsidiaries pursuant to legislation
 – other services (see Audit Committee report on page 80 for further information)
Depreciation of property, plant and equipment – owned
Depreciation of right-of-use assets
Amortisation of intangible assets 
Impairment (reversal)/charge of property, plant and equipment and right-of-use assets 
COVID-19-related rent concessions

53 weeks ended
31 July 2021
£’000

52 weeks ended
25 July 2020
£’000

30

25

177
20
3,980
21,149
865
(4,242)
–

97
15
4,847
22,787
647
3,376
(615)

During the year, the Group received the benefit of support from the UK government of £10.2m in response to the COVID-19 outbreak. This benefit relates 
to retail business rates relief. The Group also received £3.0m under the UK government’s Coronavirus Job Retention Scheme which was paid in respect of 
employees on furlough and recognised as grant income. Following the strong trading on reopening of our showrooms, the Group took the decision to repay 
the £3.0m CJRS payment in full. 

In the prior year, the Group received support from the UK government of £8.4m in response to the COVID-19 outbreak. This included £5.0m under the UK 
government’s Coronavirus Job Retention Scheme which was paid in respect of employees on furlough and was recognised as a grant in accordance with the 
accounting policy set out in note 2. The remaining £3.4m was benefit from retail business rates relief.

5. Operating exceptional items included within administrative expenses
In order to provide a clearer understanding of underlying profitability, underlying operating profit excludes exceptional items, which relate to costs that, either 
by their size or nature, require separate disclosure in order to give a fuller understanding of the Group’s financial performance. Exceptional items, booked to 
operating costs, comprised the following:

116

Impairment reversal/(charge)
Restructuring costs

53 weeks ended
31 July 2021
£’000

52 weeks ended
25 July 2020
£’000

4,242
–

4,242

(3,376)
(613)

(3,989)

Impairment reversal/(charge)
Current year exceptional items include a credit of £4,242,000 which relates to the reversal of previous impairment to the Group’s stores. The majority of 
the current year credit reverses the impairment taken in the prior year as a consequence of reduced forecasts following the impact of COVID-19, with an 
additional element reversing historic store impairment following stronger forecast store performance as a result of encouraging trading and increased 
opportunities in our markets. This has been split between the right-of-use asset (£2,932,000) and tangible assets (£1,310,000), apportioned based on net 
book value. 

Management have considered the potential impact of changes in assumptions on the impairment recorded against the Group’s network of store cash-
generating units. While there is not a significant risk of an adjustment to the carrying amount of any one store cash-generating unit that would be material
to the Group as a whole in the next financial year, management have considered sensitivities to the impairment charge as a result of changes to the post-tax 
discount rate. The discount rate used in management’s calculation was 8.7%. The sensitivities applied are an increase or decrease of 1.0% used to determine 
the impairment reversal. It is estimated that a 1.0% decrease/increase in discount rate assumptions, with no change to forecast revenue assumptions, would 
result in a £320,000 increase/£322,000 decrease in the impairment reversal of store assets in the 53 weeks to 31 July 2021.

In the prior year, exceptional costs disclosed of £3,376,000 related to an impairment charge being recognised on the assets associated with a number of our 
showrooms. This was split between the right-of-use asset (£2,619,000) and tangible assets (£757,000), apportioned based on net book value.

Restructuring costs
In the prior year, exceptional costs disclosed of £613,000 were in relation to amounts payable for loss of office incurred as a result of restructuring, 
predominantly relating to the centralisation of administrative support from each of our individual showrooms to our head office in Sunderland.

1
2
0
2
t
r
o
p
e
R

l

a
u
n
n
A

c
l
p
p
u
o
r
G
S
c
S

 
 
 
 
 
6.  Employees and Directors
6.1 Staff costs
The aggregate remuneration of all employees including Directors comprises:

Wages and salaries
Social security costs
Other pension costs
Share-based payment charge/(credit) (note 22)

53 weeks ended
31 July 2021
£’000

52 weeks ended
25 July 2020
£’000

57,150
5,696
1,306
1,450

65,602

47,281
4,532
1,235
(818)

52,230

The Group received £3.0m (2020: £5.0m) under the UK government’s Coronavirus Job Retention Scheme to offset against the gross wages and salaries 
costs disclosed above. The amounts received in relation to the current year were subsequently repaid. 

The average monthly number of employees (including Executive Directors) during the year was as follows:

Sales
Office and managerial
Services and warehousing
Cleaning

Total

53 weeks ended
31 July 2021

52 weeks ended
25 July 2020

750
572
499
34

1,855

681
525
466
35

1,707

Details of Directors’ remuneration, share options, long-term incentive schemes and pension entitlements are disclosed in the Remuneration Report on 
pages 81 to 90.

6.2 Key management compensation
Key management comprises the Directors of the trading subsidiary, A. Share & Sons Limited and the Group Directors and excludes the Non-Executive 
Directors.

117

The key management compensation is as follows:

Short-term employee benefits
Deferred contribution pension cost
Share-based payment charge/(credit)

53 weeks ended
31 July 2021
£’000

52 weeks ended
25 July 2020
£’000

3,465
200
1,450

1,349
209
(818)

Further detail on the above can be found in the Remuneration Report along with details of shares exercised by the highest paid Director. 

The share-based payment charge in the year of £1,450,000 relates to the Group’s improved trading performance against the EPS targets under the Group’s 
Long-Term Incentive Plan as set out in note 22.

The share-based payment credit in the prior year of £818,000 relates to the unwinding of expenses previously recognised due to EPS for the Group falling 
below the minimum performance conditions.

7.  Finance costs

Bank facility renewal fees
Bank facility non-utilisation fees
Bank facility utilisation fees
Other finance costs
Interest on lease liability

53 weeks ended
31 July 2021
£’000

52 weeks ended
25 July 2020
£’000

19 
396
–
24
3,741

4,180

55
63
97
–
3,980

4,195

Strategic ReportCorporate GovernanceFinancial StatementsNotes to the consolidated financial statements continued

8.  Finance income

Bank interest received

9.  Taxation
(a) Analysis of tax charge/(credit) in the year

Current tax:
UK corporation tax on profits for the year
Adjustments in respect of prior years

Total current tax charge/(credit)

Deferred tax:
Origination and reversal of temporary differences 
Adjustments in respect of prior years

Total deferred tax credit (note 18)

Income tax charge/(credit) in the Consolidated statement of comprehensive income

53 weeks ended
31 July 2021
£’000

52 weeks ended
25 July 2020
£’000

81

355

53 weeks ended
31 July 2021
£’000

52 weeks ended
25 July 2020
£’000

4,385
527

4,912

(608)
(694)

(1,302)

3,610

(459)
(255)

(714)

(284)
100

(184)

(898)

(b) Factors affecting tax charge/(credit) for the year
The tax charge (2020: credit) assessed on the profit (2020: loss) for the year is lower (2020: higher) than the standard rate of corporation tax in the UK of 
19.00% (2020: 19.00%). The differences are explained below:

Profit/(loss) before taxation

118

Profit/(loss) before tax at 19.00% (2020: 19.00%)
Effects of:
Other expenses deductible/(not deductible) 
Depreciation and impairment eligible/(not eligible) for tax purposes
Amounts in relation to share options
Adjustments in respect of prior years
Impact of changes in tax rates

Income tax charge/(credit) in the Consolidated statement of comprehensive income

53 weeks ended
31 July 2021
£’000

52 weeks ended
25 July 2020
£’000

22,674

4,308

281
(167)
(373)
(167)
(272)

3,610

(3,121)

(593)

(146)
161
(112)
(155)
(53)

(898)

(c) Factors that may affect future tax charges
The UK government in its 2021 Budget announced that the main UK corporate rate would be maintained at 19% until 31 March 2023, before being increased 
to 25% from 1 April 2023. These changes were substantively enacted at the balance sheet date, 31 July 2021, and hence, have been reflected in the 
measurement of deferred tax balances resulting in deferred tax being calculated using an effective rate of 22%.

1
2
0
2
t
r
o
p
e
R

l

a
u
n
n
A

c
l
p
p
u
o
r
G
S
c
S

 
 
 
 
 
10.  Earnings/(loss) per share

a) Basic earnings/(loss) per share attributable to the ordinary equity holders of the Company
Basic earnings per share from underlying operations
From exceptional costs

Total basic earnings/(loss) per share

b) Diluted earnings/(loss) per share attributable to the ordinary equity holders of the Company
Diluted earnings per share from underlying operations
From exceptional costs

Total diluted earnings/(loss) per share

c) Reconciliations of earnings used in calculating earnings/(loss) per share
Profit/(loss) from operations
– (Deduct)/add back exceptional costs net of tax

Total profits from underlying operations

d) Weighted average number of shares used as the denominator
Weighted average number of shares in issue for the purposes of basic earnings/(loss) per share
Effect of dilutive potential ordinary shares:
– Share options

Weighted average number of ordinary shares for the purpose of diluted earnings/(loss) per share

53 weeks ended
31 July 2021
£’000

52 weeks ended
25 July 2020
£’000

41.3p
9.1p

50.4p

39.8p
8.8p

48.6p

2.6p
(8.4p)

(5.8p)

2.6p
(8.4p)

(5.8p)

53 weeks ended
31 July 2021
£’000

52 weeks ended
25 July 2020
£’000

19,064
(3,436)

15,628

(2,223)
3,231

1,008

53 weeks ended
31 July 2021
number

52 weeks ended
25 July 2020
number

37,828,902

38,464,470

1,435,066

1,598,815

39,263,968

40,063,285

A total of 1,598,815 potential ordinary shares were not included within the calculation of diluted earnings per share as at 25 July 2020 as they were antidilutive.

119

Strategic ReportCorporate GovernanceFinancial StatementsComputer
software

8,256
750
(361)

8,645

5,898
865
(361)

6,402

2,243

2,358

Computer
software

6,893
1,363

8,256

5,251
647

5,898

2,358

1,642

Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued

11.  Intangible assets

Cost 
At 26 July 2020
Additions
Disposals

At 31 July 2021

Accumulated amortisation
At 26 July 2020
Charge for the year
Depreciation on disposals

At 31 July 2021

Net book amount
At 31 July 2021

At 25 July 2020

Cost 
At 28 July 2019
Additions

At 25 July 2020

Accumulated amortisation
At 28 July 2019
Charge for the year

120

At 25 July 2020

Net book amount
At 25 July 2020

At 27 July 2019

Amortisation is charged through the administration expenses line.

1
2
0
2
t
r
o
p
e
R

l

a
u
n
n
A

c
l
p
p
u
o
r
G
S
c
S

 
 
 
 
 
12.  Property, plant and equipment

Cost 
At 26 July 2020
Additions
Disposals

At 31 July 2021

Accumulated depreciation and impairment
At 26 July 2020
Charge for the year
Depreciation on disposals
Impairment reversal

At 31 July 2021

Net book amount
At 31 July 2021

At 25 July 2020

Cost 
At 28 July 2019
Additions

At 25 July 2020

Accumulated depreciation and impairment
At 28 July 2019
Opening IFRS 16 impairment adjustment
Charge for the year
Impairment

At 25 July 2020

Net book amount
At 25 July 2020

At 27 July 2019

The net book value of leasehold improvements is as follows:

Short leaseholds (up to 25 years)
Long leaseholds (greater than 25 years)

Freehold land
and buildings
£’000

Leasehold
improvements
£’000

Computer 
equipment
£’000

Fixtures and
fittings
£’000

159
–
–

159

99
3
–
(2)

100

59

60

159
–

159

94
1
3
1

99

60

65

54,073
1,170
(71)

55,172

41,871
2,505
(71)
(759)

43,546

11,626

12,202

53,704
369

54,073

38,326
284
2,806
455

41,871

12,202

15,378

4,664
495
(156)

5,003

3,975
547
(156)
(71)

4,295

708

689

4,357
307

4,664

3,260
24
654
37

3,975

689

1,097

32,637
2,177
(139)

34,675

28,379
925
(139)
(478)

28,687

5,988

4,258

31,085
1,552

32,637

26,560
171
1,384
264

28,379

4,258

4,525

Total
£’000

91,533
3,842
(366)

95,009

74,324
3,980
(366)
(1,310)

76,628

18,381

17,209

89,305
2,228

91,533

68,240
480
4,847
757

74,324

17,209

21,065

121

As at
31 July 2021
£’000

As at
25 July 2020
£’000

11,571
55

11,626

12,144
58

12,202

Impairment of property, plant and equipment
All showrooms have been tested for impairment as at the year end. The impairment review compared the value in use of each CGU based on the Group’s 
latest budget and forecast cash flows to the carrying values as at 31 July 2021. A reversal of £1,310,000 as a result of improved future projections for the 
business, was recorded against property, plant and equipment and was recognised as an exceptional item (see note 5).

As disclosed in the accounting policies (note 2), the cash flows used within the impairment model are based on assumptions which are sources of estimation 
uncertainty and small movements in these assumptions could lead to a further impairment charge or reversal. 

Strategic ReportCorporate GovernanceFinancial StatementsNotes to the consolidated financial statements continued

13.  Leases
This note provides information for leases where the Group is a lessee. The Group leases retail, distribution and office properties and motor vehicles. The 
leases have varying terms which are negotiated on an individual basis and contain a range of different terms and conditions. 

Consolidated statement of financial position
The Consolidated statement of financial position as at 31 July 2021 shows the following amounts relating to leases. 

Right-of-use assets

Cost 
At 26 July 2020
Additions1
Disposals
At 31 July 2021

Accumulated depreciation
At 26 July 2020
Charge for the year
Depreciation on disposals
Impairment reversal (note 5)

At 31 July 2021

Net book amount
At 31 July 2021

At 25 July 2020

Cost 
At 28 July 2019
Additions1
Disposals

At 25 July 2020

122

Accumulated depreciation
At 28 July 2019
Charge for the year
Depreciation on disposals
Impairment (note 5)

At 25 July 2020

Net book amount
At 25 July 2020

Leasehold 
property
£’000

137,675
1,127
–
138,802

23,478
19,220
–
(2,932)

39,766

99,036

114,197

122,970
14,705
–

137,675

–
20,859
–
2,619

23,478

Motor  
vehicles
£’000

5,808
1,221
(427)
6,602

1,506
1,929
(427)
–

3,008

3,594

4,302

3,317
2,913
(422)

5,808

–
1,928
(422)
–

1,506

Total
£’000

143,483
2,348
(427)
145,404

24,984
21,149
(427)
(2,932)

42,774

102,630

118,499

126,287
17,618
(422)

143,483

–
22,787
(422)
2,619

24,984

114,197

4,302

118,499

1. 

 Right-of-use asset additions include new leases. lease renewals and increases in term and/or scope for existing leases.

Impairment of right-of-use assets
All showrooms have been tested for impairment as at the year end. The impairment review compared the value in use of each CGU based on the Group’s 
latest budget and forecast cash flows to the carrying values as at 31 July 2021. A reversal of £2,932,000 as a result of improved future projections for the 
business, was recorded against property, plant and equipment and was recognised as an exceptional item (see note 5).

As disclosed in the accounting policies (note 2), the cash flows used within the impairment model are based on assumptions which are sources of estimation 
uncertainty and small movements in these assumptions could lead to a further impairment. 

Lease liabilities 
The following tables show the discounted lease liabilities included in the Group Consolidated statement of financial position and a maturity analysis of the 
contractual undiscounted lease payments:

Current 
Non-current

As at
31 July 2021
£’000

22,693
93,368

116,061

As at
25 July 2020
£’000

24,167
112,253

136,420

1
2
0
2
t
r
o
p
e
R

l

a
u
n
n
A

c
l
p
p
u
o
r
G
S
c
S

 
 
 
 
 
13.  Leases (continued)
Maturity analysis – contractual undiscounted lease payments:

Group
Within one year
Within two to five years
After five years

Total undiscounted lease payments

As at
31 July 2021
£’000

As at
25 July 2020
£’000

25,784
72,591
29,101

28,010
81,366
41,132

127,476

150,508

The Group presents lease liabilities separately in the consolidated balance sheet.

Consolidated statement of comprehensive income
The Group has recognised depreciation and interest costs in respect of leases, rather than rental charges of £25,609,000. During the year, the Group 
recognised £21,149,000 of depreciation charges and £3,741,000 of interest costs in respect of these leases. Leases of low value assets and short-term 
leases of 12 months or less are expensed to the Group income statement.

14.  Inventories

Finished goods

As at
31 July 2021
£’000

17,328

As at
25 July 2020
£’000

18,207

The cost of inventories before cash discounts and volume rebates, as an expense and included in cost of sales relating to continued operations amounted to 
£164,795,000 (2020: £138,663,000).

Inventories include a provision of £3,213,000 (2020: £2,894,000). Write-downs of inventories to net realisable value amounted to £874,000 (2020: £640,000). 
These were recognised as an expense during the period and were included in cost of sales in the Consolidated statement of comprehensive income.

15.  Trade and other receivables

Trade receivables
Other receivables
Prepayments

As at
31 July 2021
£’000

As at
25 July 2020
£’000

123

808
1,859
2,280

4,947

1,577
1,948
1,279

4,804

The fair value of trade and other receivables is approximate to their carrying value. Trade and other receivables are considered due once they have passed 
the contracted due date. 

The carrying amounts of trade and other receivables are all denominated in Sterling.

The majority of the trade receivables are due from third-party finance providers with which there is a very low likelihood, and no previous history, of default, 
and therefore, there has been no material impact of the Group’s expected credit loss model.

The bad debt provision is not considered material for disclosure.

16.  Trade and other payables – current

Trade payables
Payments received on account
Other taxation and social security payable
Accruals 

As at
31 July 2021
£’000

As at
25 July 2020
£’000

15,369
36,955
6,175
13,319

71,818

20,638
34,592
12,834
13,105

81,169

The fair value of financial liabilities approximates their carrying value due to short maturities. Financial liabilities are denominated in Sterling.

Payments received on account represent deposits taken from customers at the point of order and in advance of the Group fulfilling its performance 
obligations to provide goods and services for customer orders. They will be realised in the next 12 months. The brought forward balance of payments 
received on account was recognised as revenue during the year.

Strategic ReportCorporate GovernanceFinancial StatementsNotes to the consolidated financial statements continued

17.  Trade and other payables – non-current

Accruals 

18.  Deferred tax asset
The Group’s movements in deferred taxation during the current financial year and previous year are as follows:

Opening deferred tax asset/(liability)
Adjustment on initial application of IFRS 16

Opening deferred tax asset (restated)
Adjustments in respect of prior years
Credited to profit and loss account arising from the origination and reversal of temporary differences (note 9)

Closing deferred tax asset 

Deferred taxation has been fully recognised/provided for in respect of:

Accelerated capital allowances
Losses
Other timing differences
Capital gains held over
Adjustment on initial application of IFRS 16

Closing deferred tax asset

124

As at
31 July 2021
£’000

As at
25 July 2020
£’000

–

–

137

137

As at
31 July 2021
£’000

As at
25 July 2020
£’000

722
–

722
694
608

2,024

(452)
990

538
(100)
284

722

As at
31 July 2021
£’000

As at
25 July 2020
£’000

(407)
1,145
477
(157)
966

2,024

(407)
284
43
(135)
937

722

The deferred tax assets include an amount of £1,145,000 which relates to carried-forward tax losses. The group has concluded that the deferred assets will 
be recoverable using the estimated future taxable income based on the approved business plans and budgets. The Group expects to continue generating 
taxable income. The losses can be carried forward indefinitely and have no expiry date. There is £33,000 of historic unused losses in the Group’s none trading 
subsidiaries which have not been recognised due uncertainty that there will be eligible taxable income to offset the losses against. Deferred tax assets are 
expected to be utilised in more than 12 months from the 31 July 2021.

19.  Provisions

At 26 July 2020
Provisions made during the year

At 31 July 2021

Property 
obligations
£’000

1,209
434

1,643

Total
£’000

1,209
434

1,643

Property provisions relate to an estimate of dilapidation and decommissioning costs based on anticipated lease expiries and renewals. These provisions are 
expected to be utilised at the end of each specific lease.

Current 
Non-current

20.  Share capital and share premium

As at 31 July 2021 and 25 July 2020 

As at
31 July 2021
£’000

As at
25 July 2020
£’000

488
1,155

1,643

Number of  
shares

38,012,655

Ordinary  
shares  
£’000

38

Share  
premium  
£’000

16

125
1,084

1,209

Total
£’000

54

Authorised, allotted and fully paid share capital is 38,012,655 of £0.001 each (2020: 38,012,655 of £0.001 each).

1
2
0
2
t
r
o
p
e
R

l

a
u
n
n
A

c
l
p
p
u
o
r
G
S
c
S

 
 
 
 
 
21.  Dividends
An interim dividend of 3.0p (2020: £nil) per ordinary share was declared by the Board of Directors on 16 June 2021. The strength of the Group’s balance sheet, 
coupled with the robust trading experienced since showrooms re-opened in April 2021, provided the Board with the confidence to recommence dividends 
and as such a final dividend of 9.0p (2020: £nil) has been proposed and, if approved, will be recorded within the financial statements for the year ended  
30 July 2022.

22.  Share-based payments
The Group operates equity-settled share schemes for certain employees that are intended to act as a long-term incentive to help retain key employees  
and Directors who are considered important to the success of the business.

Post-admission incentive arrangements
The ScS Group plc Long-Term Incentive Plan (LTIP) was adopted on 21 January 2015. The LTIP allows for various types of awards and the following grants 
over shares in ScS Group plc have been made:
(i)  £Nil cost options conditional on the IPO taking place (approved on 21 January 2015).
(ii)  Market value options under an HMRC approved Company Share Option Plan (CSOP) conditional on the IPO taking place (approved on 21 January 2015).
(iii)  Unapproved market value options conditional on the IPO taking place (approved on 21 January 2015).
(iv)  Performance-based £nil cost options granted on 30 March 2015 (the performance condition is based on EPS as set out in the consolidated audited 

financial statements of the Group for 2017). As the EPS for the Group was lower than the performance condition set, these awards were forfeited  
as at 28 July 2018.

(v)  Performance-based £nil cost options granted on 17 October 2016 (the performance condition is based on EPS as set out in the consolidated audited 
financial statements of the Group for the financial year ended 27 July 2019). As the EPS for the Group was higher than the minimum performance 
condition set, a proportion of these options were awarded as at 25 July 2020.

(vi)  Performance-based £nil cost options granted on 16 October 2017 (the performance condition is based on EPS as set out in the consolidated audited 
financial statements of the Group for the financial year ended 25 July 2020). As the EPS for the Group was lower than the minimum performance 
condition set, these options lapsed as at 31 July 2021.

(vii)  Performance-based £nil cost options granted on 15 October 2018 (the performance condition is based on EPS as set out in the consolidated audited 

financial statements of the Group for the financial year ended 31 July 2021).

(viii) Performance-based £nil cost options granted on 14 October 2019 (the performance condition is based on EPS as set out in the consolidated audited 

financial statements of the Group for the financial year ended 30 July 2022).

(ix)  Performance-based £nil cost options granted on 12 October 2020 (the performance condition is based on EPS as set out in the consolidated audited 

financial statements of the Group for the financial year ended 29 July 2023).

Fair value of awards
The awards granted have been valued using the Black-Scholes model. No performance conditions were included in the fair value calculations.

125

The expected life is the estimated time period to exercise. The expected volatility is calculated by reference to the historic volatility of the Group from the 
period between admission and the date of grant and historic volatilities of comparator companies measured over a period commensurate with the expected 
life. The dividend yield is based on the target dividend yield set at IPO (with the exception of awards that give an entitlement to receive dividend equivalents). 
The risk-free interest rate is the yield on UK government bonds of a term consistent with the expected life. The level of vesting is estimated at the balance 
sheet date and will be trued up until the vesting date. 

LTIP  
(pre-IPO nil cost options)

LTIP  
(CSOP market value options)

2019, 2020 and 2021 LTIP 
(Directors’ awards)

LTIP  
(all awards)

Share  
awards

Average 
exercise price

Share  
awards

Average 
exercise price

Share  
awards

Average 
exercise price 

Share  
awards

Average 
exercise price

Outstanding as at 28 July 2019
Granted
Forfeited
Exercised

Outstanding as at 25 July 2020
Granted
Lapsed
Forfeited
Exercised
Outstanding as at 31 July 2021

Exercisable at 31 July 2021
Exercisable at 25 July 2020

22,857  £0.000001
–
–
– £0.000001
(22,857) £0.000001

–
–
–
–
–
–

–
–

–
–
–
–
–
–

–
–

47,513 
–
–
–

47,513 
–
–
–
(19,861)
27,652 

27,652 
47,513 

£1.75
–
–
–

£1.75
–
–
–
£1.75
£1.75

£1.75
£1.75

Note: Weighted average share price for all LTIP awards during the year.

1,492,630  £0.000001
562,340 £0.000001
(258,226) £0.000001
(245,442) £0.000001

1,563,000

£0.05
562,340 £0.000001
(258,226) £0.000001
(268,299) £0.000001

1,551,302  £0.000001
627,163 £0.000001
(452,004) £0.000001
(319,047) £0.000001
– £0.000001
1,407,414  £0.000001

1,598,815

£0.05
627,163 £0.000001
(452,004) £0.000001
(319,047) £0.000001
£1.75
£0.033

(19,861)
1,435,066

–
–

–
–

27,652 
47,513 

£1.75
£1.75

Strategic ReportCorporate GovernanceFinancial StatementsNotes to the consolidated financial statements continued

22.  Share-based payments continued
Fair value of awards continued
As at 31 July 2021, 562,597 of the outstanding LTIP share options relate to the 2018 LTIP, which vested as at the year end date. Due to the Group’s EPS being 
higher than the minimum target set, a proportion of these options will be awarded. Further information on the LTIP is available in the Directors’ Remuneration 
report on page 86.

The fair value of share options issued and the assumptions used in the calculation are as follows:

Grant date
Share price at grant date
Exercise price
Number of employees
Shares issued
Expected volatility
Expected life (years)
Risk-free interest rate
Expected dividend yield
Fair value per share
Actual/estimated vesting

2015

2015

2017

2018

2019

2020

2021

21 January 
2015
£1.75
£nil 
25
571,421
33.7%
3
0.70%
8%
£1.38
100%

21 January 
2015
£1.75
£1.75
6
68,659
36.2%
5
1.06%
8%
£0.24
100%

17 October 
2016
£1.83
£nil
6
474,125
–1
3
–1
–1
£1.83
56%

16 October 
2017
£1.75
£nil
8
554,141
–1
3
–1
–1
£1.75
0%

15 October 
2018
£2.23
£nil
8
672,848
–1
3
–1
–1
£2.23
89%

14 October
2019
£2.36
£nil
7
562,340
–1
3
–1
–1
£2.36
33%

12 October
2020
£2.00
£nil
6
627,163
–1
3
–1
–1
£2.00
46%

1. 

 LTIP participants are entitled to receive dividend equivalents on unvested awards, and therefore, dividend yield does not impact the fair value calculation. Furthermore, volatility and  
risk-free rates do not impact the fair value calculation for awards with no exercise price or market-based performance conditions.

The total charge for the year relating to employee share-based payment plans was £1,450,000 (2020: credit of £818,000) which is in relation to equity-settled 
share-based payment transactions. There are no liabilities arising from share-based payment transactions.

23.  Capital commitments
Capital commitments contracted for but not provided amounted to £nil (2020: £480,000).

126

24.  Pension commitments
The Group operates several defined contribution pension schemes for the benefit of its staff. The assets of the schemes are held separately from those of 
the Group in independently administered funds. The pension charges represent contributions payable by the Group to these funds and are shown in note 6. 
Amounts outstanding at the year end were £211,000 (2020: £227,000) and are held in accruals.

25.  Financial instruments – risk management
Financial risk management policy
The Group’s principal financial instruments comprise cash and cash equivalents. The main purpose of these financial instruments is to provide funds for 
the Group’s operations. The Group has other financial instruments being trade receivables, trade payables and lease liabilities that arise directly from its 
operations.

It is, and has been, under review throughout the year, the Group’s policy that no trading in financial instruments shall be undertaken. The Group has not 
entered into derivative transactions during the years under review. The Group does not undertake any speculative transactions and continues to pursue 
prudent treasury policies by investing surplus funds only with reputable UK financial institutions. 

Credit risk
The finance for all the Group’s credit sales is provided from external financing companies who bear the whole risk of customer defaults on repayment. The 
Group’s financial assets which are past due and not impaired are deemed not material for disclosure. The remaining balance is deemed fully recoverable due 
to the use of finance houses to mitigate the risk of recoverability. There have been no gains/losses on financial liabilities. 

Cash and deposits are invested with Lloyds Bank plc. 

Liquidity risk
The Group’s exposure to liquidity risk is low, as historically, working capital requirements have been funded entirely by self-generated cash flow. 

At 31 July 2021, the Group’s cash balance totalled £87.7m, and £15.4m was owed as trade payables for goods delivered. The Group has no drawn down debt, 
and further liquidity is available through the £20.0m CLBILS revolving credit facility (RCF) granted on 25 August 2020. This facility is committed for a term of 
36 months and would be renegotiated well in advance of this maturity date. The RCF is subject to certain covenants in respect of fixed charge cover, liquidity, 
leverage and capital spending.

Financial instruments by category
Financial assets and liabilities are classified in accordance with IFRS 9. No financial instruments have been reclassified or derecognised in the year. There are 
no financial assets which are pledged or held as collateral. The Group does not hold any financial assets or liabilities held as fair value through the income 
statement, defined as being in a hedging relationship or any available for sale financial assets. 

1
2
0
2
t
r
o
p
e
R

l

a
u
n
n
A

c
l
p
p
u
o
r
G
S
c
S

 
 
 
 
 
25.  Financial instruments – risk management (continued)
Financial instruments by category (continued)
The Group’s main financial assets comprise cash and cash equivalents and trade receivables (note 15) arising from the Group’s activities. These financial 
assets all meet the conditions to be recognised at amortised cost under IFRS 9.

Other than trade and other payables (note 16) and lease liabilities (note 13), the Group had no financial liabilities within the scope of IFRS 9 as at 31 July 2021 
(2020: £nil). Balances within trade and other payables will mature within one year and lease liabilities are measured at amortised cost.

The fair value of the Group’s financial assets and liabilities is not materially different from their carrying values. Financial assets and liabilities comprise 
principally of trade receivables and trade payables and the only interest-bearing balances are the bank deposits and borrowings which attract interest at 
variable rates.

Capital management
The Group’s objectives when managing capital are to safeguard its ability to continue as a going concern and retain financial flexibility to provide returns 
for shareholders and benefits for other stakeholders. The Group considers capital to be equity and cash. Equity and cash are disclosed in the Consolidated 
statement of financial position.

The Group manages its capital through continued focus on free cash flow generation and setting the level of capital expenditure and dividend in the context 
of the current period and forecast free cash flow. 

26.  Related parties
Holdings in subsidiaries and any relevant related party transactions are disclosed in the Company financial statements in note 5. Only ScS Furnishings 
Limited and the ScS Group plc Employee Benefit Trust are not included in the consolidation on the grounds of materiality.

27.  Contingent liabilities
The subsidiary undertakings of the Group are party to a debenture with Lloyds Bank plc which grants fixed and floating charges over the assets of each 
subsidiary undertaking.

28.  Treasury share reserve

As at 28 July 2019
Purchase of own shares
Transfer to retained earnings

As at 25 July 2020
Purchase of own shares
Sale of treasury shares

As at 31 July 2021

127

£’000

91
754
(663)

182
410
(43)

549

During the financial year, the Group’s Employee Benefit Trust purchased 200,000 ordinary shares of £0.001 each in the Group at an average price of  
204.4 pence per ordinary share for the purpose of satisfying management share incentive awards. Subsequently, 19,861 of these shares were used to  
satisfy awards, with the remainder held as treasury shares. As at 31 July 2021 the Group holds 257,414 of its own ordinary shares of 0.1 pence each in the 
Group at an average purchase price of 213.4 pence.

During the prior year, the Group’s Employee Benefit Trust purchased 324,582 ordinary shares of £0.001 each in the Group at an average price of 232.2 pence 
per ordinary share for the purpose of satisfying management share incentive awards. 290,025 of these shares had been used to satisfy awards, with the 
remainder held as treasury shares. As at 25 July 2020 the Group held 77,275 of its own ordinary shares of 0.1 pence each in the Group at an average purchase 
price of 234.9 pence.

29.  Net debt

Cash and cash equivalents
Lease liabilities 

Net debt

Year ended
31 July 2021
£’000

87,650
(116,061)

(28,411)

Year ended
25 July 2020
£’000

82,282
(136,420)

(54,138)

As a result of the adoption of IFRS 16, the Group is in a net debt position due to the recognition of a lease liability.

The change in lease liabilities from £136,420,000 to £116,061,000 was a result of £3,741,000 interest charged, £26,448,000 principal repayments and 
additions of £2,348,000.

Strategic ReportCorporate GovernanceFinancial StatementsCompany statement of financial position
As at 31 July 2021

Non-current assets
Investments

Total non-current assets

Current assets
Trade and other receivables
Deferred tax asset

Cash at bank and in hand

Total current assets

Total assets

Current liabilities
Trade and other payables

Total current liabilities

Total liabilities

Capital and reserves
Called-up share capital
Share premium account
Capital redemption reserve
Treasury share reserve
Retained earnings

Total shareholders’ funds

Total equity

Total equity and liabilities

Note

As at 31 July 2021
£’000

As at 25 July 2020
£’000

5

6
7

8

9
9

12

70,000

70,000

70,000

70,000

35
442

–

477

27
149

–

176

70,477

70,176

14,196

14,196

14,196

38
16
15
(549)
56,761

56,281

56,281

70,477

12,563

12,563

12,563

38
16
15
(182)
57,726

57,613

57,613

70,176

128

The notes on pages 131 to 133 form an integral part of these financial statements.

The total comprehensive income for the year included within the financial statements of the Company is £176,000 (2020: £3,612,000).

The financial statements on pages 128 to 133 were approved by the Board and authorised for issue on 4 October 2021 and signed on its behalf by:

Steve Carson
Chief Executive Officer

1
2
0
2
t
r
o
p
e
R

l

a
u
n
n
A

c
l
p
p
u
o
r
G
S
c
S

 
 
 
 
 
Company statement of changes in equity
For the year ended 31 July 2021

At 28 July 2019
Profit and total comprehensive income
Purchase of own shares
Cancellation of repurchased shares
Treasury shares (note 12)
Dividends paid (note 10)

At 25 July 2020

At 26 July 2020
Profit and total comprehensive income
Purchase of treasury shares (note 12)
Sale of treasury shares (note 12)
Dividend paid (note 10)

At 31 July 2021

Called-up
share
capital
£’000

Share
premium
account
£’000

Capital
redemption
reserve
£’000

Treasury
reserve
£’000

40
–
–
(2)
–
–

38

38
–
–
–
–

38

16
–
–
–
–
–

16

16
–
–
–
–

16

13
–
–
2
–
–

15

15
–
–
–
–

15

(91)
–
–
–
(91)
–

(182)

(182)
–
(410)
43
–

(549)

Retained
earnings
£’000

63,538
3,612
(4,425)
–
(663)
(4,336)

57,726

57,726
176
–
(8)
(1,133)

56,761

Total
equity
£’000

63,516
3,612
(4,425)
–
(754)
(4,336)

57,613

57,613
176
(410)
35
(1,133)

56,281

129

Strategic ReportCorporate GovernanceFinancial StatementsCompany statement of cash flows
As at 31 July 2021

Cash flows from operating activities
(Loss)/profit before taxation

Changes in working capital:
Increase in trade and other receivables
Increase in trade and other payables

Cash generated from operations
Net cash flow generated from operating activities

Net cash flow used in investing activities

Cash flows used in financing activities
Dividends paid 
Purchase of own shares
Sales of own shares

Net cash flow used in financing activities

Net increase in cash and cash equivalents

Cash and cash equivalents at beginning of year

Cash and cash equivalents at end of year

53 weeks ended 
31 July 2021
£’000

52 weeks ended 
25 July 2020
£’000

Note

6
8

10

(117)

3,463

(8)
1,633

1,508
1,508

(23)
6,076

9,516
9,516

–

–

(1,133)
(410)
35

(1,508)

–

–

–

(4,336)
(5,180)
–

(9,516)

–

–

–

130

1
2
0
2
t
r
o
p
e
R

l

a
u
n
n
A

c
l
p
p
u
o
r
G
S
c
S

 
 
 
 
 
Notes to the company financial statements
For the year ended 31 July 2021

1.  General information 
ScS Group plc (the ‘Company’) is a company limited by shares incorporated and domiciled in England, within the UK (Company registration number 
03263435). The address of the registered office is 45-49 Villiers Street, Sunderland, SR1 1HA. The Company’s principal activity is to act as a holding company 
for its subsidiaries, and its shares are listed on the London Stock Exchange (LSE).

2.  Accounting policies
The principal accounting policies applied in the preparation of these financial statement are set out below. These policies have been consistently applied  
to all the years presented, unless otherwise stated.

Statement of compliance with FRS 101
These financial statements were prepared in accordance with Financial Reporting Standard 101, ‘Reduced Disclosure Framework’ (FRS 101). The Company 
meets the definition of a qualifying entity under FRS 100, ‘Application of Financial Reporting Requirements’ as issued by the Financial Reporting Council.

Basis of preparation
The financial statements have been prepared under the historical cost convention and in accordance with the Companies Act 2006.

As permitted by FRS 101, the Company has taken advantage of the disclosure exemptions available under that standard in relation to business combinations, 
financial instruments, capital management, presentation of comparative information in respect of certain assets, standards not yet effective, impairment  
of assets and related party transactions. Where required, equivalent disclosures are given in the consolidated financial statements of ScS Group plc.

Going concern 
The Company is the ultimate holding company to a group which is highly cash generative, and which holds sufficient medium and long-term facilities in  
place to enable it to meet its obligations as they fall due. The Directors are, therefore, satisfied that the Company has adequate resources to continue  
in operational existence for the foreseeable future.

Further information on the Group’s going concern and ongoing viability is provided in note 2 of the Group financial statements.

Critical accounting estimates and judgements
The preparation of financial statements in conformity with FRS 101 requires the use of certain critical accounting estimates. It also requires management  
to exercise its judgement in the process of applying the Company’s accounting policies. However, due to the nature of the Company, we do not consider 
there to be any critical accounting estimates or judgements made in the preparation of these financial statements.

131

Capital management 
The Company follows the same capital management as the Group – see page 127 in the Group financial statements.

New standards, amendments and interpretations
For the latest amendments and interpretations, please refer to page 111 in the Group financial statements.

Fixed asset investments
Fixed asset investments in subsidiary undertakings are recorded at cost plus incidental expenses less any provision for impairment.

Trade receivables
Trade receivables for the Company refer to prepayments made for services performed in the ordinary course of business. Trade receivables are recognised 
initially at fair value and subsequently measured at amortised cost using the effective interest method, less provision for impairment.

Trade payables
Trade payables are obligations to pay for goods or services that have been acquired in the ordinary course of business from suppliers. Trade payables are 
recognised initially at fair value and subsequently measured at amortised cost using the effective interest method.

Treasury shares
The Employee Benefit Trust (EBT) provides for the issue of shares to Group employees, principally under share option schemes. Shares in the Company 
held by the EBT are included in the balance sheet as treasury shares at cost, including any directly attributable incremental costs. Subsequent consideration 
received for the sale of such shares is also recognised in equity, with any difference between the sale proceeds and the original cost being taken to retained 
earnings. No gain or loss is recognised in the financial statements on transactions in treasury shares. 

Taxation
The tax charge for the financial period is based on the profit for the financial period.

Related parties
In these financial statements, the Company has taken advantage of the following disclosure exemptions available under FRS 101:
 – The requirement of paragraph 17 of IAS 24 ‘Related Party Transactions’; and
 – The requirements in IAS 24 ‘Related Party Disclosures’ to disclose related party transactions entered into between two or more members of a group, 

provided that any subsidiary which is party to the transaction is a wholly-owned by such a member.

Strategic ReportCorporate GovernanceFinancial StatementsNotes to the company financial statements continued
For the year ended 31 July 2021

3.  Income statement exemption
The Company has elected to take the exemption under section 408 of the Companies Act 2006 from presenting the Income Statement or a Statement of 
Comprehensive Income for the Company. Total comprehensive income for the Company for the year was £176,000 (2020: £3,612,000).

4.  Directors’ emoluments
No Executive Directors received any remuneration for their services to the Company (2020: £nil). All Executive Directors’ remuneration was borne by another 
Group company, A. Share & Sons Limited. These costs have been consolidated into the Group’s financial statements and are disclosed, along with the Non-
Executive Directors’ fees, within the Remuneration Report on pages 81 to 90.

The Company does not employ any staff other than the Non-Executive Directors noted above.

5.  Investments

Cost and net book value
At 25 July 2020 and 31 July 2021

Subsidiary
undertaking
£’000

70,000

The subsidiaries, which were owned and incorporated in the United Kingdom are as follows:

Name

Principal activity

Class of shares held

% of holdings

Parlour Product Topco Limited

Holding company

Held by subsidiary undertakings
Parlour Product Holding Limited
A. Share & Sons Limited
ScS Furnishings Limited

Holding company
Specialist retailer of upholstered furniture
Dormant company

Ordinary

Ordinary
Ordinary
Ordinary

100%

100%
100%
100%

The registered office address for all of the subsidiaries is 45-49 Villiers Street, Sunderland, SR1 1HA.

All shares carry equal voting rights and are deemed to be controlled by ScS Group plc.

132

ScS Furnishings Limited is exempt from audit as it is dormant. Its aggregate amount of capital and reserves is £1.

6.  Trade and other receivables

Prepayments

7.  Deferred tax asset
The Company’s movements in deferred taxation during the current financial year and previous year are as follows: 

Opening deferred tax asset
Credited to profit and loss account arising from the origination and reversal of temporary differences 

Closing deferred tax asset

Deferred taxation has been fully recognised in respect of:

Losses

Closing deferred tax asset

1
2
0
2
t
r
o
p
e
R

l

a
u
n
n
A

c
l
p
p
u
o
r
G
S
c
S

As at
31 July 2021
£’000

35

As at
25 July 2020
£’000

27

As at
31 July 2021
£’000

As at
25 July 2020
£’000

149
293

442

–
149

149

As at
31 July 2021
£’000

As at
25 July 2020
£’000

442

442

149

149

 
 
 
 
 
8.  Trade and other payables

Amounts owed to Group undertakings
Accruals and deferred income

As at
31 July 2021
£’000

As at
25 July 2020 
£’000

13,906
290

14,196

12,415
148

12,563

Amounts owed to Group undertakings are unsecured, interest-free and repayable on demand.

9.  Share capital and share premium

As at 25 July 2020 and 31 July 2021

Number of  
shares

38,012,655

Ordinary  
shares  
£’000

38

Share  
premium  
£’000

16

Total 
£’000

54

Authorised, allotted and fully paid share capital is 38,012,655 of £0.001 each (2020: 38,012,655 of £0.001 each).

10.  Dividends
An interim dividend of 3.0p (2020: £nil) per ordinary share was declared by the Board of Directors on 16 June 2021. The strength of the Group’s balance sheet, 
coupled with the robust trading experienced since showrooms re-opened in April 2021, provided the Board with the confidence to recommence dividends 
and as such a final dividend of 7.0p (2020: £nil) has been proposed and, if approved, will be recorded within the financial statements for the year ended  
30 July 2022.

11.  Financial instruments
The Company has financial instruments, being trade receivables and trade payables, that arise directly from its operations. The financial instruments –  
risk management policy has been included in note 25 of the Group financial statements.

12.  Treasury share reserve
Details of the Company’s share capital and share buybacks are given in note 28 of the Group financial statements.

133

Strategic ReportCorporate GovernanceFinancial StatementsAlternative performance measures (APMs)

In the reporting of financial information, the Board have adopted various Alternative performance measures (APMs). APMs should be considered in addition 
to IFRS measurements. The Board believe that these APMs assist in providing useful information on the underlying performance and position of the Group 
and enhance the comparability of information between reporting periods by adjusting for non-underlying items which affect IFRS measures and are used 
internally by the Board to measure the Group’s performance.

Consequently, APMs are used by the Board and management for performance analysis, planning, reporting and incentive setting purposes and have 
remained consistent with prior year. A subset is also used by management in setting director and management remuneration. The measures are also used  
in discussions with the investment analyst community. The key APMs used by the Group are summarised in the table below.

Reconciliation

N/A

Revenue
Add back: costs of interest-free credit

Gross sales (note 3)

Revenue
Add back: costs of interest-free credit

Gross sales (note 3)
Gross profit

Gross margin

Net increase in cash and cash equivalents
Dividends
Purchase of own shares

Sale of own shares
Free cash flow

Operating exceptional items (note 5)

Statutory operating profit 
Depreciation on tangible fixed assets 
Depreciation on right-of-use assets 
Amortisation of intangible assets 

EBITDA

Non-underlying items 

Underlying EBITDA 

2021
£’000

310,566
13,953

2020
£’000

255,491
12,628

324,519

268,119

2021
£’000

310,566
13,953

324,519
146,987

2020
£’000

255,491
12,628

268,119
119,580

45.3%

44.6%

2021
£’000

5,368
1,133
410

(35)
6,876

2021
£’000

4,242

2021
£’000

26,773
3,980
21,149
865

52,767

(4,242)

48,525

2020
£’000

24,616
4,336
5,180

–
34,132

2020
£’000

(3,989)

2020
£’000

719
4,847
22,787
647

36,978

3,989

32,989

APM

Definition

Like-for like order growth

Gross sales

‘Like-for-like’ order growth comprises total 
orders (inclusive of VAT) in a financial period 
compared to total orders achieved in a prior 
period excluding new or closed stores to 
ensure comparability.

Gross sales represents turnover on the sale  
of goods and warranties before deduction  
of interest-free credit.

Gross margin

Gross profit as a percentage of gross sales.

134

Free cash flow

Net increase in cash before the impacts of 
dividends paid and the purchase of own shares.

Non-underlying items

Underlying EBITDA

Certain costs or incomes that derive from 
events or transactions that fall outside  
the normal activities of the Group and are  
excluded by virtue of their size and nature 
to reflect management’s view of the 
performance of the Group.

Earnings before interest, tax, depreciation  
and amortisation before the effect of  
non-underlying items in the period.

1
2
0
2
t
r
o
p
e
R

l

a
u
n
n
A

c
l
p
p
u
o
r
G
S
c
S

 
 
 
 
 
APM

Definition

Reconciliation

Underlying operating profit

Underlying profit before tax

Underlying basic EPS

Underlying operating profit is based on 
operating profit before the impact of certain 
costs or incomes that derive from events 
or transactions that fall outside the normal 
activities of the Group and are excluded 
by virtue of their size and nature to reflect 
management’s view of the performance  
of the Group.

Underlying profit before tax is based on profit 
before tax, before the impact of certain 
costs or incomes that derive from events 
or transactions that fall outside the normal 
activities of the Group and are excluded 
by virtue of their size and nature to reflect 
management’s view of the performance of  
the Group.

Underlying basic earnings per share (EPS) is 
based on earnings per share before the impact 
of certain costs or incomes that derive from 
events or transactions that fall outside the 
normal activities of the Group and are excluded 
by virtue of their size and nature to reflect 
management’s view of the performance  
of the Group.

Statutory operating profit 
Non-underlying items 

Underlying operating profit

Statutory profit/(loss) before tax 
Non-underlying items 

Underlying profit before tax

Profit/(loss) for the period

Non-underlying items net of tax

Underlying profit after tax

Number of shares (000’s)

Underlying EPS

2021
£’000

26,773
(4,242)

22,531

2021
£’000

22,674
(4,242)

18,432

2021
£’000

19,064

(3,436)

15,628

37,829

41.3p

2020
£’000

719
3,989

4,708

2020
£’000

(3,121)
3,989

868

2020
£’000

(2,223)

3,231

1,008

38,464

2.6p

135

Strategic ReportCorporate GovernanceFinancial StatementsCompany information

Registered office
ScS Group plc
45-49 Villiers Street
Sunderland
SR1 1HA
Tyne and Wear

Tel: 0191 731 3000
www.scsplc.co.uk

Company number
Registered in England: 03263435

Listing
Ordinary shares of ScS Group plc are listed with a premium listing on the London Stock Exchange.

Share registrar
Equiniti
Aspect House
Spencer Road
Lancing
West Sussex
BN99 6DA

Tel: 0371 384 2468
www.equiniti.com

Independent auditor
PricewaterhouseCoopers LLP
5th & 6th Floor
Central Square South
Orchard Street
Newcastle Upon Tyne
NE1 3AZ

136

Tel: 0191 232 8493
www.pwc.co.uk

Brokers
Shore Capital Group Ltd
Cassini House
57 St James’s Street
London
SW1A 1LD

Tel: 020 7408 4050
www.shorecap.co.uk

Principal bankers
Lloyds Banking Group PLC
10 Gresham Street
London
EC2V 7AE

Tel: 020 7616 1500
www.lloydsbankinggroup.com

Financial PR
Buchanan
107 Cheapside
London
EC2V 6DN

Tel: 020 7466 5000
scs@buchanan.uk.com 

1
2
0
2
t
r
o
p
e
R

l

a
u
n
n
A

c
l
p
p
u
o
r
G
S
c
S

 
 
 
 
 
S

c

S

G

r

o

u

p

p

l

c

A

n

n

u

a

l

R

e

p

o

r

t

2

0

2

1

ScS Group plc
45-49 Villiers Street, Sunderland
SR1 1HA, Tyne and Wear
Tel. 0191 731 3000
www.scs.co.uk